GFZ-62835EN B-62835EN

GE Fanuc CNC
Power Mate D and F Motion Controllers
Maintenance Manual

Presented By: CNC Center

For Product Needs Please Visit:
http://www.cnccenter.com/
OR Email:
sales@cnccenter.com
OR Call:
1-800-963-3513
GE Fanuc CNC Manuals www.cnccenter.com
 GE Fanuc Automation

PowerMotion™ Products

Power Mate D and F Motion Controllers

Maintenance Manual

GFZ-62835EN/01 October 1996

B–62835EN/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s–1
B–62835EN/01 PREFACE

PREFACE

Description of 1.Display and operation

this manual This chapter covers those items, displayed on the CRT, that are related to
maintenance. A list of all supported operations (CRT or DPL) is also

om
provided at the end of this chapter.
2.Hardware
This chapter covers hardware–related items, including the hardware
configuration, connection, and Power Mate status indicated on printed
circuit boards. A list of all units is also provided as well as an explanation

r.c
of how to replace each unit.
3.Data input/output
This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs,

e
parameters, lodder program, and tool compensation data, as well as the
input/output procedures.
nt
4.Interface between the Power Mate and PMC
This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system configuration,
and the signals used by the PMC.
ce
5.Digital servo
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust the
reference position return position.
nc

6.and 7. AC spindles
These chapters describe the spindle amplifier checkpoints, as well as the
spindle tuning screen.
.c

8.Trouble shooting
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event of
w

certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot be turned on

or if automatic operation cannot be performed. Countermeasures to be
applied in the event of alarms being output are also described.
w

9.and 10. Spindle trouble shooting

These chapters explain the alarms related to spindles, as well as the
w

corresponding countermeasures to be applied.

APPENDIX
The appendix consists of a list of all alarms, as well as a list of
maintenance parts. The I/O Unit–MODEL A is also described.
This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to the
Connection Manual (B–62833EN).
This manual describes all optional functions. Refer to the manual
provided by the machine tool builder for details of any options with which
the installed machine tool is provided.

p–1
PREFACE B–62835EN/01

Applicable models This manual describes following function.

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :

Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D Power Mate–D

Power Mate
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL F Power Mate–F

Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to the Power Mate–D/F.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).

om
 1 Manuals related to the Power Mate–D/F

Specification
Manual name
Number
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62092E

r.c
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62833EN
CONNECTION MANUAL
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62094E

e
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62835EN *
nt
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HAND BOOK
B–62097EN
ce
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F B–62093E–1
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(Macro Compiler/Macro executor)

For specifications and maintenance of FUNUC CONTROL MOTOR α

nc

/β series, refer to the following manuals:

Document
Document name Major contents Major usage
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series B–65142E S Specification S Selection of motor
.c

DESCRIPTIONS S Characteristics S Connection of motor

S External dimensions
S Connections
S Specifications and S Selection of amplifier
w

FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER B–65162E

α series DESCRIPTIONS functions S Connection of amplifier
S Installation
S External dimensions
w

and maintenance
area
S Connections
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α series S Start up procedure S Start up the system
w

B–65165E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL S Troubleshooting (Hardware)
S Maintenance of mo- S Troubleshooting
tor S Maintenance of motor
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series B–65150E S Initial setting S Start up the system
PARAMETER MANUAL S Setting parameters (Software)
S Description of pa- S Turning the system
rameters (Parameters)
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR β series B–65232EN S Specification S Selection of motor
DESCRIPTIONS S Characteristics S Connection of motor
S External dimensions
S Connections

p–2
B–62835EN/01 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.2 DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY OF SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

om
1.2.1 CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.2 DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3.2 Software Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3.3 Module Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

r.c
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4.3 Clearing Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4.4 Display of Special Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

e
1.5 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.6
1.5.2
nt
Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1 Displaying of CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
27
27
ce
1.6.2 Displaying of DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.6.3 Contents Displayed (Common) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.6.4 Contens Displayed (DPL/MDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.7 POWER MATE STATE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
nc

1.8 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

1.8.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.8.2 Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be Recorded in the Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.3 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
.c

1.9 LIST OF OPERATIONS (CRT/MDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1.10 LIST OF OPERATION (DPL/MDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.11 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
w

2. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
w

2.1 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

2.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.2.1 Environmental Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
w

2.2.2 Power Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2.2.3 Action Against Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.3 INTER–MACHINE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3.1 CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3.2 Reader/Puncher Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.3.3 Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.3.4 I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.3.5 Servo Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.3.6 Connection to Serial Spindle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.3.7 Connection to Analog Spindle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

c–1
 Table of Contents B–62835EN/01

2.3.8 Position Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.3.9 DPL/MDI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.3.10 Detachable LCD/MDI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.3.11 Handy Operator’s Panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.3.12 Touch panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.4 LED DISPLAY/SETTING AND MODULE CONFIGURATION OF UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.4.1 LED Display of Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.4.2 Connector and Signal Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.4.3 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.4.4 Battery of Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.4.5 Setting the Rotary Switch RSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

om
2.4.6 Rotary Switch MTSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.4.7 Location of Modules and Internal Printed Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.4.8 LED display of I/O Link Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.5 LIST OF PRINTED BOARD AND UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.5.1 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.5.2 Control Unit Printed Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

r.c
2.5.3 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2.5.4 CRT/MDI, DPL/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.5.5 CRT/MDI, DPL/MDI Printed Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.6 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

e
2.6.1 Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.6.2 Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder (a Series Servo Amplifier/Built–in Type Battery) . . . . 118

2.7
2.6.3
2.6.4
nt
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder (b Series Servo Amp Module/Built–in Type Battery) .
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
120
121
121
ce
2.7.2 Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.8 REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2.8.1 The Base Printed Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2.8.2 The Power Supply Printed Circuit Boards and Sub Printed Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
nc

2.8.3 The Fan motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

2.8.4 The CRT Control Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
2.8.5 The MDI Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2.8.6 The CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
.c

2.9 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

2.10 REPLACING THE FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.10.1 The Power Mate Controller Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
w

2.10.2 The CRT/MDI Control PCB Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

2.10.3 The I/O Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
2.10.4 The I/O Unit–MODEL A Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
w

2.10.5 Replacing the DPL/MDI Switcher Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

2.10.6 Replacing the LCD Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2.11 ADJUSTING THE PLASMA DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
w

2.12 7.2–INCH MONOCHROME LCD ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

2.13 REPLACING THE LCD BAKLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.2.3 Outputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

c–2
B–62835EN/01 Table of Contents

3.2.4 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

3.2.5 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.2.6 Outputting Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.2.7 Outputting Ladder Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.2.8 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.2.9 Inputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.2.10 Inputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
3.2.11 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.2.12 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.2.13 Inputting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.2.14 Inputting PMC Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

om
3.2.15 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

r.c
4.2.1 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.2.2 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.2.3 Built–in Debug Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.2.4 System Reserve Area of Internal Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.2.5 Execution Period of PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

e
4.3 OPERATION ON THE CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
nt
PMCLAD SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PMCDGN SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PMCRAM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
163
167
ce
4.4 OPERATION ON THE DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.4.1 Selectingthe PMC Programmer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.4.2 Setting and Displaying System Parameters (SYSTEM PARAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.4.3 Editing the Sequence Program (Edit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.4.4 Editing Ladder Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
nc

4.4.5 Starting and Stopping the Sequence Program (Run/Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

4.4.6 Error Messages (for Ladder Mnemonics Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.5 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.6 ADDRESS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
.c

4.6.1 Power Mate–D for 1–path Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

4.6.2 Power Mate–D for 2–path Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.6.3 Power Mate–F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
w

4.7 SIGNAL AND SYMBOL CORRESPONDENCE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

5. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

w

5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
w

5.2.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

5.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.4.3 Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

c–3
 Table of Contents B–62835EN/01

6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

6.1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6.1.1 Method A of Gear Change (PRM3705#2=0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.1.2 Method B of Gear Change (PRM 3705#2=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.2 TABLE OF TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6.2.1 Printed Circuit Board (A16B–2201–0440) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6.2.2 Signal Waveform a Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.3 CONFIRMING POWER SUPPLY (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
6.3.1 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
6.3.2 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

om
6.4 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.4.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.4.2 Spindle Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6.4.3 Spindle Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.4.4 Spindle Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
6.4.5 Correspondence Between Operation Mode and Parameters on Spindle Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

r.c
6.5 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF STANDARD PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

e
7.1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
7.1.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
7.1.2 Calculation of S Analog Voltage and Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

7.2
7.1.3
nt
Tuning S Analog Voltage (D/A Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE OF TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Model 1S to 3S (Amp. Specification : A06B–6059–H00x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
242
242
ce
7.2.2 Models 6S to 26S (Amp. specification : A06B–6059–H2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.2.3 Test Points Signal Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
7.3 SETTING PARAMETERS (DIGITAL AC SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7.4 SETTING STANDARD PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
nc

7.5 LIST OF PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

7.6 TUNING AFTER REPLACING PCB (S SERIES AC SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

8. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
.c

8.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

8.1.1 Investigating the Conditions Under Which Failure Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
w

8.2 POWER CANNOT BE TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

8.3 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . 257
8.4 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
w

8.5 HANDLE OPERATION (MPG) CAN NOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

8.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
w

8.7 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

8.8 WHEN MANIPULATION IS NOT POSSIBLE WITH THE CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
8.9 ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
8.10 REFERENCE POSITION DEVIATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.11 ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
8.12 ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
8.13 ALARM 301 TO 305 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
8.14 ALARM 306 TO 308 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

c–4
B–62835EN/01 Table of Contents

8.15 ALARM 350 (SERIAL PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

8.16 ALARM 351 (SERIAL PULSE CODER COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.17 ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
8.18 ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.19 ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY ON, REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ABNORMAL) . . . . . . 297
8.20 ALARM 410 (EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
8.21 ALRAM 411 (EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
8.22 ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.23 ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

om
8.24 ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
8.25 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
8.26 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8.27 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

r.c
8.28 ALARM 751 (SPINDLE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.29 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
8.30 ALARM 910 TO 911 (RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.31 ALARM 920 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

e
8.32 ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.33 ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.34
8.35
nt
ALARM 950 OR 951 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
331
ce
8.36 ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
8.37 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

nc

9.1 LIST OF SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE AMPLIFIER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

9.2 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EACH ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

10.TROUBLESHOOTING (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

.c

10.1 AL–01 (MOTOR OVERHEAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

10.2 AL–02 (EXCESSIVE DEVIATION OF SPEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
w

10.3 AL–06, 07 (OVER SPEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

10.4 AL–09 (UNIT OVERHEAT / 6S TO 26S ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
w

10.5 AL–10 (LOW INPUT VOLTAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

10.6 AL–11 (DC LINK EXCESSIVE VOLTAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.7 AL–12 (DC LINK EXCESSIVE CURRENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
w

10.8 ABNORMAL SOUND AND VIBRATION DURING ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

10.9 NO ROTATION OR INCORRECT SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10.10 CONFIRMATION OF TRANSISTOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

APPENDIX
A. I/O UNIT MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
A.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

c–5
 Table of Contents B–62835EN/01

A.2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

A.3 LED INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
A.4 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
A.5 REMOVING A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

B. ALARM LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

C. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

C.1 MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

om
D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
D.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
D.2 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
D.2.1 Conditions for Enabling This Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

r.c
D.2.2 Output to a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
D.2.3 Input from a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
D.3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
D.3.1 Outputting Data to a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

e
D.3.2 Inputting Data from a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
D.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
D.5
D.6
nt
ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEMORY CARD WRITE PROTECT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
397
398
ce
E. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
E.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
E.2 NAMES AND FUNCTION OF MEMORY COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
E.3 OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
nc

E.3.1 Connection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

E.3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
E.3.3 Disconnection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
.c

F. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

w
w
w

c–6
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION

This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function

keys. The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.

om
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS
1.2 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY OF SOFTWARE
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN

r.c
1.5 HELP FUNCTION
1.6 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE
1.7 POWER MATE STATE DISPLAY

e
1.8 OPERATION HISTORY
1.9 LIST OF OPERATIONS (CRT/MDI)
nt 1.10 LIST OF OPERATIONS (DPL/MDI)
1.11 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN
OPTION IS CHANGED
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.1 Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described
below.
FUNCTION KEYS
AND SOFT KEYS

1.1.1 To display a more detailed screen of CRT, PDP, LCD, handy operator’s
Soft Keys panel, press a function key followed by a soft key. Soft keys are also used
for actual operations.
The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing
each function key.

om
The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :

: Indicates screens

: Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a

r.c
function key(*1)

 ] : Indicates a soft key(*2)

( ) : Indicates input from the MDI panel.

e
: Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key).
nt
*1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
ce
*2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration.

NOTE
nc

1 The CRT, PDP, LCD, and handy operator’s panel cannot be

used with the Power Mate–F.
2 If the DPL/MDI is connected, the CRT, PDP, LCD, and
handy operator’s panel are disabled, and the functions of
.c

these screens are restricted to position display.

w
w
w

2
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS

POS

Absolute coordinate display

om
[WORK] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Relative coordinate display

r.c
[REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
(Axis name) [EXEC]
[PTSPRE] [EXEC]

e
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Current position display

[ALL] [(OPRT)]
nt
(Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
ce
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
(Axis name) [EXEC]
[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
nc

[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Handle interruption
.c

[HNDL] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]

[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
w
w
w

3
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the AUTO mode

PROG

Program display screen

om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH]
(1) (N number) [N SRH]
[REWIND]

r.c
Program check display screen

[CHECK] [WORK] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[REL] (O number) [O SRH]

e
(N number) [N SRH]
[REWIND]

Current block display screen

nt
ce
[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
nc

Next block display screen

[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
.c
w

[FL.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display)

w

File directory display screen

[DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (File No. ) [F SET]

[EXEC]
w

4
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the EDIT mode

1/2
PROG

Program display

om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

r.c
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]

e
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
nt
[DELETE]
[CAN]
(O number)
[CAN]
(N number)
[EXEC]

[EXEC]
ce
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR~] (O number) [EXEC]
[~CRSR]
[~BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR~] (O number) [EXEC]
nc

[~CRSR]
[~BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [~CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
.c

[~BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]

(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]

w

[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]
w

(1)(Continued on the next page)

w

5
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

2/2
(1)

Program directory display

[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program

[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]

om
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]

e r.c
Floppy directory display

[FLOPPY] [PRGRM]
[DIR] [(OPRT)]
nt
Return to the program
[F SRH] (Numeral)
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[F SET]
ce
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
nc

[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]

(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
.c

[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]

[CAN]
[EXEC]
w
w
w

6
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the MDI mode

PROG

Program display

om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Program input screen

[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

r.c
[START] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

e
Current block display screen

[CURRNT] [(OPRT)]
nt
[BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
ce
Next block display screen

[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
nc
.c
w
w
w

7
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the STEP, JOG or ZRN mode

PROG

Program display

om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Current block display screen

[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

r.c
Next block display screen

[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

8
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the TJOG or THDL mode

PROG

Program display

[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

om
Program input screen

[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program

r.c
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

e
Program directory display

[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
nt
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

9
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
(When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in all modes)

1/2
PROG

Program display

om
[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END]
(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

r.c
[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]

e
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
nt
[DELETE]
[CAN]
(O number)
[CAN]
(N number)
[EXEC]

[EXEC]
ce
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR~] (O number) [EXEC]
[~CRSR]
[~BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR~] (O number) [EXEC]
nc

[~CRSR]
[~BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [~CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
.c

[~BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]

(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]

w

[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]
w

(1)(Continued on the next page)

w

10
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2
(1)

Program directory display

[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]

(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program

[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]

om
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]

e r.c
Floppy directory display

[FLOPPY] [PRGRM]
[DIR] [(OPRT)]
nt
Return to the program
[F SRH] (Numeral)
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[F SET]
ce
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
nc

[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]

(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
.c

[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]

[CAN]
[EXEC]
w
w
w

11
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key

OFFSET
SETTING

OFFSET

SETTING

Tool offset screen

om
[OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]
(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

Setting screen

r.c
[SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]

e
(Numeral) [INPUT]

nt
ce
Macro variables display screen

[MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
nc

[PUNCH]
.c

Menu programming screen

[MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]

w

Software operator’s panel screen

w

[OPR]
w

12
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM

1/3
SYSTEM

Parameter screen

[PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

om
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

r.c
N , enter a file num-
[READ] [CAN] To enter a file number: Press
[EXEC] ber, then press , [F–SRCH], and [EXEC] on
the PRGRM screen
N , enter a file num-
[PUNCH] [CAN] To enter a file number: Press
[EXEC] ber, then press , [F–SRCH], and [EXEC] on

e
the PRGRM screen

Diagnosis screen

[DGNOS] [(OPRT)]
nt
(Number) [NO SRH]
ce
PMC screen

[PMC] [PMCLAD] [SEARCH] [TOP]

nc

[BOTTOM]
[SRCH]
[W–SRCH]
[N–SRCH]
.c

[F–SRCH]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
w

[TRIGER] [TRGON]
[TRGOFF]
[START]
w

[DUMP] [SEARCH]
w

[DPARA]/[NDPARA] [BYTE]
[TRGSRC] [WORD]
[INIT] [D.WORD]
[WINDOW] [DIVIDE]
[CANCEL]
[DELETE]
[SELECT]
[WIDTH]
(1) (2) (3)
(Continued on the next page)

13
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

(1) (2) (3) 2/3

[DUMP] [SEARCH]

[BYTE]
[WORD]
[D.WORD]
[DRARA]/[NDPARA]
[PMCDGN] [TITLE]
[STATUS] [SEARCH]
[ALARM]

om
[TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM]
[EXEC]

[PMCPRM] [TIMER]
[COUNTR]
[KEEPRL]

r.c
[DATA] [G.DATA] [C.DATA]
[G.CONT] [G–SRCH]
[NO.SRH] [SEARCH]
[INIT]
[SETTING] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM]

e
[NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]
[STOP]/[RUN]
[I/O] [EXEC]
nt
[CANCEL]
(No.)
ce
[SPEED] [INPUT]
[INIT]
[MDI]/[ROM]
nc

System configuration screen

[SYSTEM]
.c
w
w

(1)

(Continued on the next page)

w

14
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

3/3

(1)

Pitch error compensation screen

[PITCH] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

[ON:1]
[OFF:0]

om
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[READ] [CAN] To enter a file number: Press N , enter a file num-

[EXEC] ber, then press , [F–SRCH], and [EXEC] on
the PRGRM screen

r.c
[PUNCH] [CAN] N
To enter a file number: Press , enter a file num-
[EXEC] ber, then press , [F–SRCH], and [EXEC] on
the PRGRM screen

e
Servo parameter screen

[SV.PRM] [SV.SET]
[SV.TUN]
nt
[(OPRT)]
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
ce
Spindle parameter screen

[SP.PRM] [SP.SET] [ON:1]

[(OPRT)]
nc

[SP.TUN] [OFF:0]
[SP.MON] [INPUT]
.c
w
w
w

15
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Alarm display screen

[ALARM]

om
Message display screen

[MSG]

r.c
Alarm history screen

[HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR]

e
HELP SCREEN
nt
Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP
ce
HELP
nc

Alarm detail screen

[1 ALAM] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]

.c

Operation method screen

[2 OPR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]

w

Parameter table screen

w

[3 PARA]
w

16
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.1.2
DPL/MDI

om
r.c
Function key

e
/

Date input key

nt AND

9
ce
Q
Program edit key
nc

Input key
.c

Cursor move key

w

Fig.1.1.2 DPL/MDI Panel

(1) Function keys

w

Function keys indicate large items like chapters in a document.

w

Indicates the current position.

Conducts the following:

In EDIT mode ...edits and displays the program in the memory
In automatic operation ...displays command value.

Used to display offset settings and to set and display macro variables.

Used to set and display parameter, diagnostic, and PMC parameter.

17
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

Display of Alarm number and external message.

(2) Keyboard functions
Table 1.1.2 MDI Keyboard functions

Key Functions
Address /numerical key Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the letter or the numeral is input
INPUT ( ) key
once to the key input buffer, and it is displayed on the DPL. To input the data, press

om
the INPUT key.
Press this key to cancel character or sign input to the key input buffer.
Cancel ( ) key (Example) When the key input buffer displays N0001, N0001 is cancelled with
this key.
When an alarm is displayed, depressing CAN will reset the alarm message.
Cursor shift keys There are two kinds of cursor shift key described below.

r.c
: This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the forward
direction.

: This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the reverse
direction.

e
Press this key to actuate I/O device.
READ ( ) key
Pressing a key activates the corresponding I/O device.

WRITE ( ) key
nt
Be careful not to press the wrong key.
ce
(3) Caution on using the DPL/MDI
If the DPL/MDI, CRT (PDP, LCD)/MDI, and handy operator’s panel
are connected at the same time, the DPL/MDI takes precedence. The
CRT (PDP, LCD)/MDI and handy operator’s panel are disabled, and
their functions are restricted to position display.
nc
.c
w
w
w

18
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.2 Both the CRT/MDI (PDP, LCD) and DPL/MDI can be used with the
Power Mate–D. Only the DPL/MDI can be used with the Power Mate–F.
CONFIGURATION
DISPLAY OF
SOFTWARE

1.2.1
CRT/MDI 1) Upon normal start

om
Power Mate
8834–01

r.c
control software

SERVO : 9060–01 Digital servo

PMC : zzzz–zz software

PMC

e
nt
2) When the CRT/MDI has started normally, but cannot communicate
with the controller
ce
*** INTELLIGENT CRT/MDI 8813/03 ***

ROM PARITY CHECK OK

WAITING FOR CRT DATA
nc
.c
w

NOTE
w

If nothing appears on the screen, it indicates that the

CRT/MDI has failed to start.
w

19
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.2.2
DPL/MDI 1) Upon normal start

Power Mate–D
Power Mate
8834–01 control software

2) When the DPL/MDI has started normally, but cannot communicate

with the controller

om
ROM PARI. OK
RAM CHECK OK

r.c
NOTE
If nothing appears on the screen, it indicates that the
DPL/MDI has failed to start.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

20
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.3 After the system has been installed correctly, you can not display the
system configuration screen. However, you can find the PCBs installed
SYSTEM and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.
CONFIGURATION The Power Mate–F cannot display its system configuration.
SCREEN

1.3.1
Display Method

om
(1) Press key.
(2) Press soft key [system],then the system configuration screen is
displayed.
(3) The system configuration screen is composed of two screens and each
of them can be selected by the page key .

r.c
1.3.2
Kind of software

e
Software Configuration Software series
Screen
nt SYSTEM CONFIG(SOFTWARE)

SYSTEM 8834
F81G
0007 Software version
ROM contents
ce
F01G
SERVO 9060 0001
PMC 4075 0001
Character written on
LADDER PMD 0001 PMC title screen
nc
.c

EDIT **** *** *** 16:53:44

[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
w
w
w

21
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.3.3 Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.

Module Configuration
Screen SYSTEM CONFIG(MODULE)

MODULE TYPE
RAM 256KB
2.5MB
___
PMC BIT
SCA (CRT) 9”CRT

om
SERVO 1/2 MOUNTED (2)
POS LSI MOUNTED
(SUB BOARD BUILT IN I/O) Information of
sub PCB

(1)

r.c
EDIT **** *** *** 16:53:44
[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]

Contents of display

e
(1) Type of mounted module, unit, or hardware
(2) Mounted or not, or type of module or unit
ntPressing the PAGE key displays the system configuration screen of
other PCBs.
*Refer to ”2.4.8 Location of Modules and Internal Printed Boards”
for correspondence with each module and display.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

22
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.4
ALARM HISTORY
SCREEN

1.4.1 Alarms generated in the Power Mate are recorded. The latest 25 alarms
General generated are recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted.
DPL/MDI can not display the alarm history screen.
The Power Mate–F is not provided with an alarm history function.

om
1.4.2
Screen Display (1) Press MESSAGE
key .
(2) Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed.

r.c
PAGE
(3) Other pages are displayed by PAGE
or key.

ALARM HISTORY O0100 N00001

e

90. 02. 14 16:43:48
 010  IMPROPER G–CODE
nt 90. 02. 13 8:22:21
500 OVER TRAVEL : + X
90. 02. 12 20:15:43
417 SERVO ALARM : X AXIS DGTL PARAM
ce
nc

AUTO **** *** *** 19:47:45

[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTORY ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

The date the alarm was issued

.c

 Alarm No.
 Alarm message (some contains no message)
w

1.4.3 (1) Press soft key [(OPE)].

w

Clearing Alarm History (2) Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.
w

1.4.4
Display of Special
Alarms
D Alarms generated by Alarm numbers are 3000s and the messages are all ”MACRO ALARM”.
custom macro (Ex) #3000=1(ERROR)⇒”3001 MACRO ALARM”.
D Alarms generated by Alarms of 1000s and the message is all ”EXTERNAL ALARM”.
DISP or DISPB (Ex) DISP instruction A000.0 1000 ERROR1⇒”1000 EXTERNAL
instruction of PMC. ALARM”

23
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.5
HELP FUNCTION
1.5.1
General The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a
table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.
DPL/MDI can not use the help function.
The Power Mate–F is not provided with a help function.

om
1.5.2
Display Method

D Display of help screen Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen

r.c
appears.

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345

e
***** HELP *****
1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD
nt 3. PARAMETER TABLE
ce
nc

EDIT * * * * * * * *** 00:00:00

[1 ALAM] [2 OPE] [3 PARA] [ ] [ ]

(However, it is not available when PMC screen or CUSTOM screen is

.c

displaying)
D Help for alarm (1) When an alarm is generated, press soft key [1 ALAM], then a help
message of the alarm is displayed.
w

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345

w

NUMBER : 010
M’SAGE : IMPROPER G CODE
FUNCTION :
w

ALARM :
A G CODE NOT LISTED IN G–CODE TABLE
IS BEING COMMANDED
ALSO G–CODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDED
IS BEING COMMANDED

>
EDIT * * * * * * * * * * 00:00:00
[1 ALAM] [2 OPE] [3 PARA] [ ] [ OPRT ]

24
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

(2) Pressing soft key [OPRT],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT] in
this order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number is
displayed.
D Help for operation (1) Press [2 OPR], then a menu for operation method is displayed.

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345

1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET

om
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR

r.c
>
EDIT * * * * * * * * * * 00:00:00
[1 ALARM] [2 OPR] [3 PARA] [ OPRT ]

e
(2) Press [OPRT], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then an
operation method of the item is displayed.
nt
Pressing PAGE key PAGE
or
PAGE
displays another pages.
ce
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345
<<1.PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4 Current
page/ Total
DELETE ALL PROGRAMS page
MODE :EDIT
SCREEN :PROGRAM
nc

OPR :(0–9999) – (DELETE)

DELETE ONE PROGRAM

MODE : EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
.c

OPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>

w

>
EDIT * * * * *** *** 00:00:00
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [SELECT]
w
w

25
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

D Parameter table Press soft key [3 PARA], then a parameter table is displayed.

HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N12345

1/3 Current
page/ Total
·SETTING (NO.0000~ ) page
·READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100~ )
·AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000~ )
·COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200~ )
·STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300~ )
·FEED RATE (NO.1400~ )
·ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600~ )

om
·SERVO RELATED (NO.1800~ )
·DI/DO (NO.3000~ )

EDIT * * * * * * * * * * 00:00:00
[1 ALAM ] [2 OPR ][ 3 PARA ] [ ][SELECT]

r.c
PAGE
Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key PAGE
or .

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

26
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.6
DISPLAYING
DIAGNOSTIC PAGE

1.6.1 The Power Mate–D uses the CRT/MDI for diagnosis display, while the
Displaying of CRT/MDI Power Mate–F uses the DPL/MDI.

(1) Press SYSTEM key on the CRT/MDI.

om
(2) Press soft key [DGN], then a diagnostic screen is displayed.

1.6.2

r.c
Displaying of DPL/MDI (1) Press the key to select the diagnosis screen.

When PMC data is displayed, operate

Number
in turn.

e
> @0001 0
nt @0002 1

Following are display methods in the diagnostic screen of PMC data.

ce
(2) Press the key of the PMC address to be displayed.
(Use the bottom left address of the key.)

> @0001 0
Example: Display the address
nc

D_ 0
data for D0100

(3) Enter the number of the PMC address to be displayed.

.c

> @0001 0
D0100
w

(4) Press the key.

w

> D0100 000000000

D0100 000001010
w

By pressing the and keys, the cursor can be moved within the
PMC address being displayed.

27
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.6.3
Contents Displayed
(Common)

D Causes when the 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An M/S/T function is being
machine does not travel executed.
in spite of giving a 001 MOTION Travel command of cycle
command operation is being executed.
002 DWELL Dwell is being executed.

om
003 IN–POSITION CHECK In–position check is being done.
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.
005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK Interlock is input.
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK The unit is waiting for spindle
speed signal SAR (G029#4) to

r.c
become ”1”.
007 WAITING FOR CHASER OPEN OR The unit is waiting for the chaser
CLOSE tool to be opened or closed.
010 PUNCHING Data is being output through

e
reader/puncher interface.
011 READING Data is being input through
reader/puncher interface.
nt
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0%
014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF
Jog override is 0%.
Power Mate is in reset state.
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH External Program Number
ce
Search

D Cause of the cycle start

LED turned off
nc

020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

021 RESET BUTTON ON
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
.c

024 RESET ON
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL
1 1 1 1 0 0 0
w

1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Input of emergency stop signal

Input of external reset signal
w

Reset button On of MDI

Input of reset & rewind
w

Servo alarm generation

Switching to other mode, Feed hold
Single block stop

D State of TH alarm 030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM Position of the character that
caused TH alarm. The position
is counted from the head.
031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused
TH alarm.

28
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Detail of Alarm 350 of

serial pulse coder Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH

#6(CSA): Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal

#5(BLA): Battery voltage is low (warning)
#4(PHA): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is erroneous.
#3(RCA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#2(BZA): Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.

om
#1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal clock stopped.
#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
D Detail of Alarm 351 of

r.c
serial pulse coder Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0203 DTE CRC STB

#7(DTE): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.

There is no response for communication.

e
#6(CRC): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.

D Details of digital servo

nt
#5(STB): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
ce
alarm 414 Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

#7(OVL): Overload alarm (Refer to DGN 201)

#6(LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm
nc

#5(OVC): Over current alarm

#4(HCA): Abnormal current alarm
#3(HVA): Overvoltage alarm
#2(DCA): Discharge alarm
.c

#1(FBA): Disconnection alarm (Refer to DGN 201)

#0(OFA): Overflow alarm
w

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD EXP
w

Overload 0 – – – Motor overheat

alarm
l 1 – – – Amplifier overheat
w

Disconnec- 1 – – 0 Built–in pulse coder (hard)

ti alarm
tion l 1 – – 1 Disconnection of separated type
pulse coder (hard)
0 – – 0 Disconnection of pulse coder
(software)

29
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 OFS MCC LDA PMS

#6(OFS): Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital

#5(MCC): Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
#4(LDA): Serial pulse coder LED is abnormal
#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or
feedback cable.
D Position error amount

om
Address
DGN 0300 Position error of an axis in detection unit

Feed rate [mm/min] _ 1

Position error=
60 servo loop gain [1/sec] Detection unit

D Machine position

r.c
Address
DGN 0301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit

D Serial spindle

e
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0400 SAI SSR POS SIC

#4(SAI)
nt
This data indicates the offset data received by the CNC while it is
calculating the machine coordinates.
0 : Spindle analog control is not used.
ce
1 : Spindle analog control is used.
#2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control is not used.
1 : Spindle serial control is used.
nc

#1 (POS) A module required for spindle analog control is

0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
#0 (SIC) A module required for spindle serial control is
.c

0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
w

Address
DGN 0401 Serial spindle alarm state of 1st spindle
w

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
w

#0 (CRE): A CRC error occurred. (Warning)

#1 (FRE): A framing error occurred. (Warning)
#2 (SNE): The transmission/reception target is invalid.
#3 (CER): An error occurred during reception.
#4 (CME): No response was returned during automatic scanning.
#5 (SCA): A communication alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.
#7 (SSA): A system alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.
(These problems cause spindle alarm 749. Such problems are mainly
caused by noise, disconnection, or instantaneous power–off).

30
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0409 SPE S1E SHE

Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated.

#3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters
0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit
1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit
#1 (S1E) 0 : 1st spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1 : 1st spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.

om
#0 (SHE) 0 : The module needed for spindle serial control on the CNC side is
normal.
1 : An abnormal condition occurred in the module needed for spindle
serial control on the CNC side.

r.c
DGN 0410 Load meter of 1st spindle [%]

DGN 0411 Speed meter of 1st spindle [%]

e
DGN 0417 Feedback information of 1st spindle position coder

DGN 0418 Position error of 1st spindle position loop mode

D Diagnostic data related

nt
ce
to rigid tapping

DGN 450 Spindle position error during rigid tapping

[Data type] Word

nc

[Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping

.c

[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Detection units
w

DGN 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping

w

[Data type] Two–word

[Unit of data] Detection units
w

31
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.6.4 The system configuration screen and the state display etc. are not prepared
Contens Displayed on the DPL/MDI.
(DPL/MDI) With the CRT/MDI, the following numbers cannot be used for reference.
Therefor, see the following diagnostic number.

Diagnostic No. Unit

800 Relative coordinates Least input increment
801 Skip position Least input increment

om
802 Remaining travel (Least input increment)/2
803 Acceleration/deceleration Detection unit
accumulation
804 Ending position of previous (Least input increment)/2
block
810 Number of program being

r.c
executed
811 Number of sequence being
executed
820 Group 01 G–code

e
821 Group 02 G–code
822 Group 03 G–code
nt
823 Group 05 G–code
824 Group 06 G–code
825 Group 08 G–code
ce
826 Group 09 G–code
827 Group 10 G–code
830 F–code being executed Unit: 0.001 mm/min or
0.00001 inch/m
nc

(When no decimal point is

entered, units are 1 mm/min
or 0.01 inch/min.)
831 Actual feedrate Unit: mm/min, deg/min, or
0.01 inch/min
.c

832 Actual spindle speed Unit: rpm

833 Corrected version of a value in- Unit: 10mV
put using the analog input
w

function
840 Number of registered blocks Unit: Blocks
841 Amount of memory used by Unit: Characters
w

program
850 ROM series No. of NC system
(Example) 8834
w

851 ROM version No. of NC system

(Example) 01, 02, etc.
852 Operation mode
(Example) AUTO, JOG, STEP, EDIT, etc.
853 Servo system series No.
(Example) 9060
854 Servo system version No. (Ex-
ample) 09, 10, etc.
855 PMC system series No.
(Example) 4075

32
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

856 PMC system version No. (Ex-

ample) 01, 02, etc.
857 Ladder program No.
(Example) FL01
858 Ladder program version No.
(Example) 01, 02, etc.
859 System RAM size
(Example) 256K, 512K
860 PMC module
(Example) BIT (PMC–PA1 compatible),
PMP (PMC–PA3 compatible)

om
861 Sub PCB
(Example) BIN (built–in I/O card)

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

33
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.7 See the diagnostic screen for the DPL/MDI of the Power Mate–D or
Power Mate–F.
POWER MATE STATE
DISPLAY
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010

X 217.940
Y 363.233

om
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000MM/M

MDI STRT MTN ***

r.c
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

MDI STRT MTN ***

ALM/BAT (Alarm state/

e
Low battery)
FIN (Waiting for M/S/T fun-
citon finish)
nt MTN/DWL( Axis travelling/dwelling)

– –EMG– –/–RESET–/–WAIT–(Emergency
ce
stop/reset state/MCC ON wating)
STRT/STOP/HOLD
(Start/Stop/Hold state)

Mode display
EDIT/AUTO/MDI/INC
nc

STP/JOG/REF/THND/TJOG
EDIT: Edit mode
AUTO: Memory mode
MDI: MDI operation mode
STP: Handle feed mode
.c

JOG: Jog feed mode

ZRN: Reference position
return mode
THND: TEACH IN HANDLE
w

mode
TJOG: TEACH IN JOG mode
w
w

34
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.8 This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the NC
operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an NC alarm,
OPERATION HISTORY together with the corresponding NC alarms.
Operation history information cannot be displayed on the DPL/MDI. The
Power Mate–F is not provided with an operation history function.
This function records the following data:
(1) MDI key operations performed by the NC operator
(2) Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected
signals only)

om
(3) Details of NC alarms
(4) Time stamp (date and time)

r.c
1.8.1
Screen Display
D Displaying the operation
(1) Press the function key.

e
SYSTEM

history
(2) Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] (operation
nthistory) soft key are displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen is
displayed.
ce
OPERATION HISTORY O1234 N12345
Page : 123
No.DATA No.DATA No.DATA
nc

01 92/06/03 11 F0000.7↑ 21 F0001.0↓

02 08:40:00 12 F0000.5↑ 22 <POS>
03 <DELETE> 13 F0001.0↑ 23 <PROG>
04 F0000.6↑ 14 F0000.5↓ 24 <RESET>
05 MEM 15 P/S0010 25 EDIT
.c

06 G0009.0↑ 16 92/06/03 26 O
07 G0009.1↑ 17 09:27:49 27 1
08 G0009.2↑ 18 <PROG> 28 2
09 ST↑ 19 <RESET> 29 3
w

10 ST↓ 20 F0000.7↓ 30 4

EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

w

[ TOP ][ BOTTOM ][ ][ ][PG.SRH]

w

On the operation history screen, the soft keys are configured as shown
below:
⇒[ ] [ PARAM ] [DGNOS] [PMC] [SYSTEM] [(OPRT)][ ]
ãpush
[ ] [W.DGNS] [ ] [ ] [OPEHIS] [(OPRT)][ ]
ã push
[ ] [ OPEHIS ] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [(OPRT)][ ]
ãpush
[ ] [ TOP ] [BOTTOM] [ ] [ ] [PG.SRH] [ ]

35
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

(4) To display the next part of the operation history, press the page down
PAGE

key . The next page is displayed.

To display the interface between two pages, press cursor key or

. The screen is scrolled by one row.

These soft keys can also be used:
1) Pressing the [TOP] soft key displays the first page (oldest data).
2) Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latest
data).

om
3) Pressing the [PG.SRH] soft key displays a specified page.
Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG.SRH] key, page 50 is
displayed.
Data displayed on the operation history screen

r.c
(1) MDI keys
Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space.
Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([]).
Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in angle

e
brackets (<>).
A key pressed at power–on is displayed in reverse video.
nt
1) Function key: <POS>, <PROG>, <OFFSET>, etc.
2) Address/numeric key: A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, –, (, etc.
3) Page/cursor key: <PAGE ↑>, <CUR↓>, <CUR←>
ce
4) Soft key: [SF1], [SF2], etc.
5) Other key: <RESET>, <CAN>, etc.
6) Key pressed at power–on: <RESET>
nc

(2) Input and output signals

General signals are displayed in the following format:
G0000.7↑
.c

The ↑ mark indicates that the signal is

turned on.
The ↓ mark indicates that the signal is
turned off.
Indicates the bit.
w

Indicates the address.

w

Some signals are indicated by their symbol names.

SBK ↑ (Indicates that the single block switch is turned on.)
w

36
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals

are displayed as indicated below:
Input signal
Name displayed
MD1 ND2 MD4 ZRN DNCI

0 0 0 0 0 MDI

1 0 0 0 0 MEM

1 0 0 0 1 RMT

om
0 1 0 0 0 NOMODE

1 1 0 0 0 EDT

0 0 1 0 0 H/INC

1 0 1 0 0 JOG

r.c
1 0 1 1 0 ZRN

0 1 1 0 0 TJOG

1 1 1 0 0 THND

e
Input signal
nt
RV1

0
RV2

0
Name displayed

R 100%
ce
1 0 R 50%

0 1 R 25%
nc

1 1 R F0%

(3) NC alarms
NC alarms are displayed in reverse video.
.c

P/S alarms, system alarms, and external alarms are displayed together
with their numbers.
For other types of alarms, only the alarm type is displayed. (No details
w

are displayed.)
Example) P/S0050, SV_ALM
w

(4) Time stamp (date and time)

The following time data (date and time) is recorded:
1) Date and time of power–on
w

2) Date and time of power–off

3) Date and time when an NC alarm occurs
(a) The power–on time is displayed as shown below:
92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day
09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second
(b) The power–off time and the time when an NC alarm occurred are
displayed in reverse video.
92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day
09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second
If a system alarm occurs, the date and time are not recorded.

37
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

D Input signal or output

(1) P ress the SYSTEM function key.
signal to be recorded in
the operation history (2) Press the continue menu key . The [OPEHIS] (operation
history) soft key is displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key, then press the [SG–SEL] soft key. The
operation history signal selection screen is displayed.

OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000

No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL

01 X0000 00001000 11 G0000 00000001

om
02 X0004 10000000 12 G0004 00000011
03 X0008 00001100 13 G0008 00000111
04 X0009 00111000 14 G0003 00001111
05 X0012 00001111 15 G0043 01100000
06 Y0000 01000000 16 ********
07 Y0004 00110000 17 ********

r.c
08 Y0007 00011100 18 ********
09 Y0008 00011100 19 ********
10 Y0010 00011100 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** * * * 00:00:00

e
[OPEHIS] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

1.8.2
Setting the Input Signal
nt
(1) On the operation history signal selection screen, press the [(OPRT)]
ce
or Output Signal to be soft key.
Recorded in the OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
Operation History
No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL
nc

01 G0004 00000010 11 ********

02 ******** 12 ********
03 ******** 13 ********
04 ******** 14 ********
05 ******** 15 ********
.c

06 ******** 16 ********
07 ******** 17 ********
08 ******** 18 ********
w

09 ******** 19 ********
10 ******** 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** *** *** 00:00:00
w

[ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ ]

w

(2) Press the cursor key or to position the cursor to a desired

position.
(3) Key in a signal type (X, G, F, or Y) and an address, then press the INPUT

key.
Example) G0004 INPUT

Signal address G0004 is set in the ADDRES column. The

corresponding position in the SIGNAL column is initialized to
000000000.

38
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

(4) Select the bit to be recorded.

To select all bits of the specified signal address, press the [ON:1] soft
key while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 .
To select a particular bit, position the cursor to that bit by pressing the
cursor key or , then press the [ON:1] soft key. To cancel
a selection made by pressing the [ON:1] soft key or to cancel a
previously selected signal, press the [OFF:0] soft key.
(5) Up to 20 addresses can be specified by means of this signal selection.
These addresses need not always be specified at consecutive

om
positions, starting from No.1.
(6) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. If
the [ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by
pressing the [CAN] key.
(7) To delete a selected signal address, position the cursor to the

r.c
corresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] soft
keys. In the SIGNAL column, asterisks ******** are displayed in
place of the deleted data. In the ADDRES column, the corresponding
position is cleared.
If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by

e
pressing the [CAN] key.
(8) Pressing the return menu key [ ] causes the [OPEHIS] (operation

D Input signals and output

signals to be recorded in
nthistory) soft key to be displayed again.
ce
the history NOTE
1 A cross (×) indicates that a signal will not be recorded. Also,
any signal for which an address is not specified will not be
recorded, either.
nc

2 A circle (f) indicates that a signal can be recorded.

3 A signal indicated by its symbol name will also be displayed
by its symbol name.
.c
w
w
w

39
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1. M/T addresses
MT→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 f f f f f f f f

∼∼
X127 f f f f f f f f

PMC→CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 f f f f f f f f

om
∼∼
G003 f f f f f f f f

G004 f f f f FIN f f f

G005 f f f f TFIN SFIN f MFIN

r.c
G006 f f f f f *ABS f f

G007 RLSOT f *FLUP f f ST f f

e
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP f f f *IT

G009
nt f f f f f f f f
∼∼

f f f f f f f f
ce
G018

G019 RT f f f f f f f

G020 f f f f f f f f
nc ∼∼

G042 f f f f f f f f

G043 f × f × × f f f
.c

G044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1

w

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

f f
w

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G047 f f f f f f f f
w
∼∼

G060 f f f f f f f f

G061 f f f f f f f RGTA

G062 f f f f f f f f
∼∼

G099 f f f f f f f f

G100 f f f f f f +J2 +J1

40
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G101 f f f f f f f f

G102 f f f f f f –J2 –J1

G103 f f f f f f f f

∼∼
G105 f f f f f f f f

om
G106 f f f f f f MI2 MI1

G107 f f f f f f f f

G108 f f f f f f MLK2 MLK1

r.c
G109 f f f f f f f f

G110 f f f f f f +LM2 +LM1

e
G111 f f f f f f f f

G112

G113
f

f
nt f

f
f

f
f

f
f

f
f

f
–LM2

f
–LM1

f
∼∼

ce
G125 f f f f f f f f

G126 f f f f f f SVF2 SVF1

nc

G127 f f f f f f f f
∼∼

G129 f f f f f f f f
.c

G130 f f f f f f *IT2 *IT1

G131 f f f f f f f f
w

G132 f f f f f f +MIT2 +MIT1

w

G133 f f f f f f f f

G134 f f f f f f –MIT2 –MIT1

w

G135 f f f f f f f f
∼∼

G255 f f f f f f f f

41
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

PMC→MT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y000 f f f f f f f f

∼∼
Y127 f f f f f f f f

CNC→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 f f f f f f f f

∼∼

om
F255 f f f f f f f f

1.8.3
Notes (1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can

r.c
be recorded to the history.
(2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not
recorded in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history.
(3) Once the storage becomes full, old data is deleted, starting from the

e
oldest record. Up to about 8000 key information items can be
recorded.
nt
(4) The recorded data is retained even after the power is turned off. A
memory all clear operation, however, erases the recorded data.
(5) Set the date and time on the setting screen.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

42
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.9
LIST OF
OPERATIONS
(CRT/MDI)
Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation
cation SW PWE = 1 key
Reset Resetting the _ POS [(OPRT)] [TIME: 0] → [EXEC]
operating time
Resetting the number _ POS [(OPRT)] [TIME: 0] → [EXEC]

om
of machined parts

Resetting the OT When the _ and

alarm power is on
Resetting alarm 100 _ _ and
Data in- Inputting parameters f MDI or emer- SYSTEM Parameter No. → [NO.SRH] → Data

r.c
put from gency stop (PARAM) → → PWE = 0 →
the MDI
Inputting offset data f _ OFFSET Offset No. → [NO.SRH] → Offset
value →
Inputting setting data f MDI SETTING Setting No. → [NO.SRH] → Data →

e
Inputting PMC f MDI or emer- SYSTEM [PMCPRM] → [COUNTR] → Data
parameters (for the gency stop (PMC) [DATA]
counter and data
table)
Inputting PMC
parameters (for the
timer and keep relay)
f
nt →

[PMCPRM] → [TIMER] → Data

[KEEPRL]
ce
→
Data input Inputting parameters f EDIT or SYSTEM [(OPRT)] → [ ] → [READ] → [EXEC]
from ex- emergency (PARAM)
ternal I/O stop
units
Inputting PMC f Emergency SYSTEM [ ] → [I/O]→ (CANNEL NO)
nc

parameters or ladder stop (PMC) → (DEVICE NAME) [FDCAS] →

program
(KIND OF DATA) [PARAM] → [READ] →
(FILE NO) File No . → [EXEC]
.c

Inputting offset data f EDIT OFFSET [(OPRT)] → [ ] → [READ] → [EXEC]

Inputting programs f EDIT PROG [(OPRT)] → [ ] → [READ] → [EXEC]
Data out- Outputting EDIT SYSTEM [(OPRT)] → [ ] → [PUNCH] → [EXEC]
w

put to I/O parameters (PARAM)

units
Outputting PMC EDIT SYSTEM [Continuous menu key] → [I/O]→
parameters (PMC) (CANNEL NO) →
w

(DEVICE NAME) [FDCAS] → (KIND OF

DATA) [PARAM] → [WRITE] → (FILE NO)
[EXEC]
w

Outputting ladder pro- EDIT SYSTEM [Continuous menu key] → [I/O]→

gram (PMC) (CANNEL NO) →
(DEVICE NAME) [FDCAS] → (KIND OF
DATA) [LADDER] → [WRITE] → (FILE NO)
[EXEC]
Outputting offset data EDIT OFFSET [(OPRT)] → [ ] → [PUNCH] → [EXEC]

43
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation

cation SW PWE = 1 key
Data out- Outputting all the EDIT PROG → –9999 → [ ] → [PUNCH] →
put to I/O programs [EXEC]
units
Outputting one EDIT PROG → Program No. → [ ] → [PUNCH] →
program [EXEC]
Search Searching for a AUTO or PROG → Program No. → [O SRH]
program number EDIT
Searching for a AUTO PROG Program No. search → →
sequence number
Sequence No. → [N SRH]

om
Searching for an EDIT PROG Data to be searched for → [SRH↑ ] or
address word [SRH ↓]
Searching for an EDIT PROG Address to be searched for → [SRH↑ ] or
address only [SRH ↓]
Searching for an _ OFFSET Offset No. → [NO.SRH]
offset number

r.c
Searching for a _ SYSTEM Diagnosis No. → [NO.SRH]
diagnosis number (DGNOS)
Searching for a _ SYSTEM Parameter No. → [NO.SRH]
parameter number (PARAM)

e
Edit Displaying the EDIT PROG [LIBRARY]
amount of memory
used
Deleting all the
programs
Deleting one program
f

f
nt EDIT

EDIT
PROG

PROG
→ –9999 →

→ Program No. →
ce
Deleting some blocks f EDIT PROG → Sequence No. →
Deleting one block f EDIT PROG →
Deleting a word f EDIT PROG Searching for the word to be deleted
→
nc

Changing a word f EDIT PROG Searching for the word to be changed

→ New data →
Inserting a word f EDIT PROG Searching for the word immediately before
the word to be inserted → New data →
.c

Verify Verifying the memory EDIT PROG [(OPRT)] → [ ] → [READ] → [EXEC]

Input/out- Ladder program input/ – SYSTEM [ ] → [I/O] →(CHANEL NO)
w

put with output (PMC) → (DEVICE NAME) [HOST] →

the PMC
[EXEC] →Manipulation on the HOST side
off–line
program- Input/output is discriminated automatically by
w

mer (P–G, manipulation on the HOST side.

P–G Mate,
personal
computer
w

FAPT
LADDER)
Input/ Searching a file for its EDIT PROG → FILE No. → [ ] → [F SRH] →
output to/ beginning
[EXEC]
from the
FANUC Deleting a file f EDIT PROG → FILE No. → [ ] → [F DELETE]
Cassette
→ [EXEC]
Inputting a program f EDIT PROG → FILE No. → [ ] → [READ] →
[EXEC]

44
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation

cation SW PWE = 1 key
Input/ Outputting all the EDIT PROG → –9999 → [ ] → [PUNCH] →
output to/ programs
[EXEC]
from the
FANUC Outputting one EDIT PROG → Program No. → [ ] → [PUNCH] →
Cassette program
[EXEC]
Verifying a program EDIT PROG Searching a file for its beginning →
→ Program No. → [(OPRT)] → [ ]→
[READ] → [EXEC]
Playback Creating NC program TEACH-IN PROG

om
Move the machine. → , , →
JOG/
HANDLE → NC data → →

Input/out- Output to the memory EDIT PRGRM Emergency stop→ →[ ]→ [PUNCH]

put with card
the →[EXEC]
memory Input of all data f EDIT or MDI PRGRM Emergency stop→ →[ ]→ [READ]

r.c
card
→[EXEC]
Input of all data (for a f EDIT or MDI PRGRM Emergency stop→ → → →
2–path Power for both Power
Mate–D) Mate–D units [ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]

Input of individual f EDIT PRGRM Emergency stop→ → [Data type] →

e
data items [ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
Clear Memory all clear When the _ AND

Parameters/offset
clear
f
nt power is on
When the
power is on
_
ce
Program clear f When the
power is on
Alarm P/S 101 clear _ _ AND
nc

Ladder program end When the _ AND

PMC parameter clear power is on
Memory all clear When the _ AND
(for 1st path) power is on
Memory all clear When the _ AND
.c

(for 2nd path) power is on

Parameters/offset f When the _ AND
clear (for 1st path) power is on
w

Parameter/offset clear f When the _ AND

(for 2nd path) power is on
Program clear When the _ AND
w

(for 1st path) power is on

Program clear When the _ AND
(for 2nd path) power is on
w

NOTE
1 After completion of ladder program input the power must be turned on again because the
Ladder program is in halt state.
2 The above operating procedure also applies to the LCD, PDP, detachable LCD/MDI, and handy
operator’s panel. Note, however, that the handy operator’s panel does not support some
functions.

45
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

1.10
LIST OF OPERATION
(DPL/MDI)
Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation
cation SW PWE = 1 key
Clear All memory clear Power ON __ AND
Parameter/offset clear f Power ON __

Program clear f Power ON __

om
Alarm clear __ __ or Power OFF/ON
Alarm P/S101 clear __ __ AND
Ladder program and Power ON __ AND
PMC parameter clear

r.c
Memory all clear When the _ AND
(for 1st path) power is on
Memory all clear When the _ AND
(for 2nd path) power is on
Parameter/offset clear f When the _ AND

e
(for 1st path) power is on

Parameter/offset clear f When the _ AND

(for 2nd path)
Program clear
(for 1st path)
Program clear
nt power is on
When the
power is on
When the
_

_
AND
ce
AND
(for 2nd path) power is on

Reset OT alarm reset Power ON __ AND

Registra- Parameter input f __ PARAM screen → → Number
nc

tion from
→ → Data → →PWE=0 →
MDI
PMC parameter input SETTING __ DGNOS screen → PMC address
DWE=1
→ Number → → Data →

Pitch error com- f __ Pitch error correction data screen →

.c

pensation data input → Data number → →Data→

Setting data input __ Setting data screen →
Cursor movement → Data →
w

Offset data input f __ Offset data screen → →

Data number → → Data→
w

Macro variable data f __ Macro variable screen → →

input
Data number → → Data →
Search Program number EDIT/AUTO → Program number →
w

search
Sequence number AUTO After program number search; →
search Sequence number →
Address word search EDIT Word to be searched for →
Search address only EDIT Address to be searched for →
Parameter search __ PARAM screen → → Number
→

46
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation

cation SW PWE = 1 key
Search PMC parameter __ DGNOS screen → PMC address
search
→ Number →
Pitch error __ Pitch error correction data screen →
compensation → Data number →
data search
Offset data search __ Offset screen → → Data number →

Macro variable data __ Macro variable screen → →

search Data number →

om
Diagnosis search __ DGNOS screen → → Number→

Editing All program delete f EDIT → –9999 →

One program delete f EDIT → Program number →

Multiple block delete f EDIT → Sequence number →

r.c
One block delete f EDIT →
Word delete f EDIT Search for word to be deleted →
Word change f EDIT After searching for word to be deleted; New
data →

e
Word insertion f EDIT After searching for word after which word is
to be inserted; New data →
Collation

Registra-
Program collation

Parameter input f
nt EDIT

EDIT or PARAM screen →

ce
tion from emergency
external stop
I/O
Program input f EDIT

Pitch error f EDIT Pitch error correction data screen →

compensation data
nc

input
Offset data input f EDIT Offset data screen →
Macro variable data f EDIT → Mode AUTO →
input
Execute the loaded program.
.c

Output to Parameter output EDIT PARAM screen →

external
I/O All program output EDIT → –9999 →
w

One program output EDIT → Program number →

Pitch error EDIT Pitch error correction data screen →
compensation data
w

output
Offset data output EDIT Offset screen →
w

Macro variable data EDIT Macro variable screen →

output
Input/out- Output to memory EDIT Emergency stop → →
put to and card
from
All data item input f EDIT or MDI Emergency stop → →
memory
card
d f
One data item input EDIT Emergency stop → → Data type →
All data item input f EDIT or MDI Emergency stop → → →
(when 2–path Power (Path 1 and
Mate–D) path 2)

47
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62835EN/01

Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation

cation SW PWE = 1 key
Input/out- Ladder program __ DGNOS screen → or
put with input/output → Operation on host
the PMC
off–line Input/output is automatically identified with
program- operation on host.
mer (P–G, (The baud rate is fixed to 9600 bps.)
P–G Mate,
personal
computer
FAPT
LADDER)

om
Input/out- Program registration f EDIT → File number → →
put
ut to and
from All program output EDIT → –9999 →
FANUC
cassette One program output EDIT → Program number →
Search for beginning EDIT → Program number, –9999, or

r.c
of file
–9998 →
File delete f EDIT → File number →
Program collation EDIT → File number → →

e
PMC parameter f Emergency DGNOS screen → →
Ladder program stop
input File number → →
(Only when
nt
PMC
parameter
is input)
Data type is automatically identified.
(The baud rate is fixed to 4800 bps.)

PMC parameter EDIT PMC parameter display → →

ce
output
File number →
Ladder program __ DGNOS screen → →
output
File number →
nc

NOTE
After completion of ladder program input, the power must be turned on again because the
ladder program is in halt state.
.c
w
w
w

48
B–62835EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.11 This warning message is not displayed on either the DPL/MDI or the
Power Mate–F.
WARNING SCREEN
DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS
CHANGED
D Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the
options using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the function
indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned on.

om
WARNING

r.c
YOU SET THE PARAMETER No. jjjj # j

ALL FILES WILL BE CLEARED IN THE PART

PROGRAM STORAGE AREA.

*1

e
PLEASE PRESS ”DELETE” OR ”CAN” KEY.
nt ”DELETE”: CLEAR ALL FILES
”CAN” : CANCEL
ce
NOTE (*1)
This line varies with the parameter settings. Two or more
nc

function names may be displayed.

.c
w
w
w

49
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2 HARDWARE

This chapter describes structure of CNC control section, connection of

units and the functions of PCBs and modules mounted on PCBs.

om
2.1 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
2.2 INSTALLATION
2.3 INTER–MACHINE CONNECTION
2.4 LED DISPLAY/SETTING AND MODULE

r.c
CONFIGURATION OF UNIT
2.5 LIST OF PRINTED BOARD AND UNIT
2.6 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES

e
2.7 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES
2.8 REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND UNIT
nt 2.9 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT
EXCHANGER
2.10 REPLACING THE FUSE
ce
2.11 ADJUSTING THE PLASMA DISPLAY
2.12 7.2–INCH MONOCHROME LCD ADJUSTMENT
2.13 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT
nc
.c
w
w
w

50
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.1
TOTAL CONNECTION a) 1–path Power Mate–D (servo interface type A)
DIAGRAM
Upper control unit

Power supply P.C. board

+24VDC power
supply

Base P.C. board Battery 3V for

RAM battery backup

om
Memory
card Emergency stop
1st axis servo
amplifier
100VAC, 1φ
200VAC, 3φ

1st axis servo motor

(Built–in type serial
pulse coder)

Separate type

r.c
pulse corder

2nd axis servo amplifier/2nd axis servo motor/built–

in type serial pulse coder/separate type pulse coder

Battery 6V for ab-

e
solute pulse coder

Analog spindle
controled circuit

nt Serial spindle
controled circuit

Position coder
ce
Manual pulse
generator
Relay connector

Built–in I/O
card
Power
nc

magnetic
I/O card
Power
magnetic
.c

Power
magnetic
w

CRT/MDI unit
Switch for selec-
w

Terminal unit tion mode

(PCR connec-
tor)
w

Next Power Mate

Note 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
H50 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (50 pins) BN3 : Burndy, brown (3 pins)
H20 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (20 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) Y34 : Yamaichi (34 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins) M3 : M3 screw terminal
D25 : D–sub connector (25 pins) CH : Varies with the AC motor
P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
Note 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
Note 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.

51
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

b) 
  
  
  

Upper control unit

Power supply P.C. board

+24VDC power
supply
Base P.C. board
Battery 3V for
RAM battery backup

Memory
card Emergency stop
1st axis servo

om
amplifier
100VAC, 1φ

200VAC, 3φ

1st axis servo motor

(Built–in type serial
pulse coder)

Separate type
pulse corder

r.c
2nd axis servo amplifier/2nd axis servo motor/built–
in type serial pulse coder/separate type pulse coder

Battery 6V for ab-

solute pulse coder

e
Analog spindle
controled circuit

Serial spindle
nt Manual pulse
controled circuit

Position coder
ce
generator
Relay connector

Built–in I/O
card
Power
magnetic
nc

I/O card
Power
magnetic
.c

Power
magnetic
w

CRT/MDI unit
w

Switch for selec-

Terminal unit tion mode
(PCR connec-
tor)
w

Next Power Mate

Note 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
H50 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (50 pins) BN3 : Burndy, brown (3 pins)
H20 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (20 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) Y34 : Yamaichi (34 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins) M3 : M3 screw terminal
D25 : D–sub connector (25 pins) CH : Varies with the AC motor
P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
Note 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
Note 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.

52
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

c) 
  
  
  

Upper control unit

Power supply P.C. board

+24VDC power
supply
Base P.C. board
Battery 3V for
RAM battery backup

Memory
card Emergency stop
1st axis servo
amplifier

om
100VAC, 1φ
200VAC, 3φ

1st axis servo motor

(Built–in type serial
pulse coder)

Separate type
pulse corder

r.c
2nd axis servo amplifier/2nd axis servo motor/built–
in type serial pulse coder/separate type pulse coder

Battery 6V for ab- 1st path analog spindle

solute pulse coder controled circuit

e
2nd path analog spindle
controled circuit

Serial spindle con-

nt Manual pulse
generator
troled circuit

1st path position

coder
ce
Relay connector

Built–in I/O
card
Power
magnetic
nc

I/O card

Power
magnetic
.c

Power
magnetic
w

CRT/MDI unit
Switch for selec-
w

Terminal unit tion mode

(PCR connec-
tor)
w

Next Power Mate

Note 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
H50 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (50 pins) BN3 : Burndy, brown (3 pins)
H20 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (20 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) Y34 : Yamaichi (34 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins) M3 : M3 screw terminal
D25 : D–sub connector (25 pins) CH : Varies with the AC motor
P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
Note 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
Note 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.

53
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

d)     
  

Upper control unit

Power supply P.C. board

+24VDC power
supply

Base P.C. board

Battery 3V for
RAM battery backup

Memory
card Emergency stop
1st axis servo

om
amplifier
100VAC, 1φ
200VAC, 3φ

1st axis servo motor

(Built–in type serial
pulse coder)

Separate type
pulse corder

r.c
2nd axis servo amplifier/2nd axis servo motor/built–
in type serial pulse coder/separate type pulse coder

Battery 6V for ab- 1st path analog spindle

solute pulse coder controled circuit

e
2nd path analog spindle
controled circuit

Serial spindle con-

nt Manual pulse
troled circuit

1st path position

coder
ce
generator

Relay connector

Built–in I/O
card
Power
magnetic
nc

I/O card
Power
magnetic
.c

Power
magnetic
w

CRT/MDI unit
w

Switch for selec-

Terminal unit
(PCR connec- tion mode
tor)
w

Next Power Mate

Note 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
H50 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (50 pins) BN3 : Burndy, brown (3 pins)
H20 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (20 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) Y34 : Yamaichi (34 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins) M3 : M3 screw terminal
D25 : D–sub connector (25 pins) CH : Varies with the AC motor
P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
Note 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
Note 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.

54
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

e)     
  

Upper control unit

Power supply P.C. board

+24VDC power
supply
Base P.C. board
Battery 3V for
RAM battery backup

Memory

om
card
Emergency stop
1st axis servo
amplifier
100VAC, 1φ
200VAC, 3φ

1st axis servo motor

(Built–in type serial
pulse coder)

r.c
Separate type
pulse corder

Analog spindle
controled circuit

e
Serial spindle
controled circuit

nt Manual pulse
generator
Position coder
ce
Battery 6V for abso-
lute pulse coder

Relay connector
nc
.c

Built–in I/O
w

card
Power
magnetic
w
w

Next Power Mate

Note 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins) M3 : M3 screw terminal
D25 : D–sub connector (25 pins) CH : Varies with the AC motor
Y50 : Yamaichi (50 pins)
P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
Note 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
Note 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.

55
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

f)     
 

Upper control unit

Power supply P.C. board

+24VDC power
supply
Base P.C. board
Battery 3V for
RAM battery backup

Memory

om
card
Emergency stop
1st axis servo
amplifier
100VAC, 1φ
200VAC, 3φ

1st axis servo motor

(Built–in type serial
pulse coder)

r.c
Separate type
pulse corder

Analog spindle
controled circuit

e
Serial spindle
controled circuit

nt Manual pulse
generator
Position coder
ce
Battery 6V for abso-
lute pulse coder

Relay connector
nc
.c

Built–in I/O
w

card
Power
magnetic
w
w

Next Power Mate

Note 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins) M3 : M3 screw terminal
D25 : D–sub connector (25 pins) CH : Varies with the AC motor
Y50 : Yamaichi (50 pins)
P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
Note 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
Note 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.

56
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.2
INSTALLATION

2.2.1 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
Environmental designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
this manual ”cabinet” refers to the following:
Requirement
D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing
the control unit or peripheral units;
D Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by

om
FANUC ;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder,
for housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall

r.c
conform to the following table.
Outer of Cabinet :
0_C to 45_C
In operation
o eration
Room temperature Inter of Cabinet :
0_C to 55_C

e
In store or transportation –20_C to 60_C
Change in
1.1°C/minute max.
nt
temperature
Relative humidity
Vibration
30% to 95%
(no condensation)
In operation: 0.5G or less
ce
Outer of cabinets: If the cabinet is to be placed in an environ-
ment where there are relatively large amounts of pollutants
(such as dust, coolant, organic solvents, acid, corrosive gas,
and salt), special care should be taken.
Environment Inter of units: Each unit should be placed in a cabinet to keep
nc

it from pollutants such as those described above.

Heat sink of outer of cabinet: The heat sinks should be pro-
tected from direct exposure to coolant, lubricant, and metal
chips.

Radiation If a unit is to be used in an environment where it is likely to be

exposed to radiations (such as microwave, ultraviolet rays,
.c

(ionizing or nonion- laser beams, and X–rays), a shielding provision should be

izing) available for it.
Height above sea
Up to 1,000 m
w

level

2.2.2 The units listed below require an external regulated supply voltage of 24
w

Power Capacity VDC +10% (including an instantaneous value).

 2.2.2 (a) Power supply capacity
w

Unit Power supply capacity

Power Mate–D control unit 1.8A (another 1 A required for the RS–232–C inter-
face) (*)
Power Mate–F control unit 1.6A (another 1 A required for the RS–232–C inter-
face) (*)
CRT/MDI unit 1.0A
Picture display CRT/MDI unit
Separate type CRT unit 0.8A
Separate type MDI unit 0.2A
Picture display separate type
MDI unit

57
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

Unit Power supply capacity

Separate type PDP unit 2.0A
Separate type LCD unit 0.8A
Detachable LCD/MDI unit 1.0A
Handy operator’s panel 0.2A
External I/O card 500 +7.3 x n (mA) where n is the number of input
points that are turned on simultaneously (*)
I/O Unit–A The required current varies depending on the number
of modules. Refer to the I/O Unit–MODEL A Connec-
tion and Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).
I/O Link connection unit 0.2A

om
DPL/MDI switching circuit 0.2A

NOTE
With the Power Mate–D/F, it is necessary to externally
supply 24 V power to external and built–in I/O cards having

r.c
source–type DO points.

e
2.2.3 The motion controller has been steadily reduced in size using
Action Against Noise surface–mount and custom LSI technologies for electronic components.
nt
The motion controller also is designed to be protected from external noise.
However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of noise
quantitatively, and noise has many uncertain factors. It is important to
ce
prevent both noise from being generated and generated noise from being
introduced into the motion controller. This precaution improves the
stability of the motion controller machine tool system.
The motion controller component units are often installed close to the
parts generating noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise
nc

sources into the motion controller are capacitive coupling,

electromagnetic induction, and ground loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.
.c

D Separating signal lines The cables used for the machine are classified as listed in the following table:
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
w

Group Signal line Action

Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separately
(Note 1) from groups B and C C, or
w

Secondary AC power line cover g g

group A with an electromag-
AC/DC power lines (containing the netic shield (Note 2).
A power lines for the servo motors or Connect spark killers or diodes with
spindle motors) the solenoid and relay.
w

AC/DC solenoid
AC/DC relay
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
and relay
relay.
DC relay (24VDC)
Bind the cables in grou
group B separately
se arately
DC power line from group A, or cover group B with
B an electromagnetic shield.
shield
DI/DO cable between the motion con-
troller and power magnetics cabinet Separate group B as far from Group
C as possible.
oss b e
DI/DO cable between the motion con- It is more desirable to cover group B
troller and machine with the shield.

58
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

Group Signal line Action

Cable between the motion controller Bind the cables in group C separate-
and servo amplifier ly from group A, or cover group C
shield
with an electromagnetic shield.
Cable for position and velocity feed-
back Separate group C as far from Group
B as possible.
ossible.
Cable between the motion controller
Be sure to perform shield proces-
and spindle amplifier
g
sing.
Cable for position coder
C
Cable for manual pulse generator
Cable for battery

om
Cable between the motion controller
and the CRT/MDI
RS–232–C interface cable
Other cables to be covered with the
shield

r.c
NOTE
1 The groups must be 100mm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between

e
groups with grounded steel plates.

nt Cabinet
ce
Servo Spindle Control
amp. amp. unit
nc

Cable of group B, C

Duct
To operator’s
panel,
.c

motor, etc.

Cable of group A Section

w

Group A Group B, C

Cover
w

D Ground The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
D Signal ground system (SG)
w

The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system.
D Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames,
cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between
the units are connected.
D System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.

59
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

Cabinet Unit
Signal ground system
Frame ground system
Power Servo CNC System ground system
magnet- amplifier control
ics unit
unit Operator’s
Cable panel
Machine
tool

Power
magnetics

om
cabinet

PC board

Distribution board

r.c
 



  D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at only one

   place in the power motion controller control unit.

e
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
nt
D The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to
safety carry the accidental current flow into the system ground when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
ce
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power cable
or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system ground
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.
nc
.c
w
w
w

60
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

D Connecting the Frame Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
Ground (FG) of the ground plate of the cabinet via the frame ground (FG) terminal.
Control Unit The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
control unit.

Cabinet Air goes out.

om
e r.c
nt Air comes in.
ce
FG terminals
(Faston terminals at
the controller)
To the other grounded plates
See the note below. Distribution
nc

switchboard
in the cabinet

Grounded plate for Grounded plate for

clamping cables clamping cables
.c

To the cabinet

External distribution
w

switchboard
w

Class 3 grounding or
more strict grounding
w

Most Importable Item

Use the Faston terminals (A65L–0001–0148/2) for the frame ground. Also use 100 to 300 mm
stranded wire with a cross–section of 2 mm2 or more. Be sure to connect the FG terminals of
the Power Mate to the grounded plates in the cabinet as shown above.

61
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

D Noise Suppressor The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
  
  D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
  

 type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)

(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)

om
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2

r.c
2) Capacitance (C) : to (µF)
10 20

I : Current at stationary state of the coil

e
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
nt AC Spark killer
relay
ce
Motor
nc

Spark killer
.c

Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.

NOTE) Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminators

w

clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp

rising edge.

D Diode is used for direct–current circuits

w

– +
Diode
w

Use a diode which can withstand a

voltage up to two times the applied
DC relay voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.

62
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

D Cable Clamp and Shield The power motion controller cables that require shielding should be
Processing clamped by the method shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for
both cable support and proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable
CNC system operation, follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :

Ground plate

om
r.c
Cable

Metal fittings
for clamp

e
nt
ce
40mm to 80mm
nc
.c

Cable clamp (1)

w
w
w

63
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

ÇÇ
Machine side
installation
Control unit
ÇÇ board

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ

om
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate

ÇÇ
ÇÇ

r.c
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover

e
Cable clamp (2)
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

64
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.3
INTER–MACHINE
CONNECTION

2.3.1 This device–to–device connection method also applies when the separate
CRT/MDI Unit MDI unit is used in combination with the separate CRT unit, separate PDP
unit, or separate LCD unit. The Power Mate–F is not provided with a
CRT/MDI interface.
D Connection of Power

om
(1) When there is only one unit of Power Mate–D
Mate–D
Power Mate CRT/MDI unit

J45 J48
JD14 JD13 CPD1

r.c
#0 JN1 FG DC+24V
(Note1) Terminal unit power source
JD15
"10%1.0A
(Stabilized power
(Note2) source)

e
(Note1) Device number 0 is set using the rotary switch.
Refer to the section of 2.4.1 Rotary switch and constract of control
nt unit for place of rotary switch.
(Note2) Mount a terminal unit (A02B–0124–D001)
ce
(2) When multiple power Mates share one CRT/MDI Max.16 Power
Mate–D units

Power Mate–D CRT/MDI unit

nc

J45 J48
JD14 JD13 CPD1
#0
(Note1) JN1 FG
JD15
+24V DC power
source "10%,
.c

J46
J47 1.0A
Power Mate–D Machine operator’s
JD14 panel selection
w

switch
#1 #1...
(Note1) #0 #2
JD15
w

J46 #3
Common
Power Mate–D
JD14 (Note 1) Device numbers are set using the
w

#2 rotary switch RSW. If the same device

(Note1) number is used for two or more units,
JD15 the information is not correctly shown
on the CRT/DPL unit.
J46
(Note 2) Attach a terminal unit
Power Mate–D (A02B–0124–D001) to the last Power
Mate.
JD14
(Note 3) For connection to use simaltaneous
#n (Note2) block start refer to connection manual.
(Note1) Terminal unit
JD15

65
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

D Cable connection
Separate type MDI unit
Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
JD14 JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
J45
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 RXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *RXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)

om
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SIO) 19 9 (SI0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SI0)

Cable connection (J45)

r.c
JD14 JD13
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
*RXD *TXD
3 3

e
TXD RXD
4 4
*TXD *RXD
11 11
nt 0V
0V
12

Shield
12
0V
0V
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

66
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

Power Mate Next Power Mate

JD15 JD14
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J46
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 TXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *TXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)

om
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SI0) 19 9 (SO0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SO0)

Cable connection (J46)

r.c
JD15 JD14
1 1
RXD RXD
2 2
*RXD *RXD
3 3
TXD TXD

e
4 4
*TXD *TXD
11 11
0V 0V
nt 0V
12

Shield
12
0V
ce
CRT/MDI unit (Separate type MDI unit)
CPD1
nc

(AMP)
External power source
1 +24V
2 0V
J48
3 +24VDC power source
(Stabilized power source)
.c

+24VDC "10% 1.0A

FG
w

A stud is provided on the rear of the unit for connection to a frame ground.

Cable connection (J48)

w

CPD1
1
+24V +24VDC "10% 1.0A
2
0V 0V
w

67
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

Separate type MDI unit

CRT/MDI unit
JN1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Machine operator’s panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J47
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Device No. selection switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V

om
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7 – Separate LCD unit

connect *SEL6 (15) and 0V (16).
8 0V 18 0V
9 19 – CRT link exceeding 50 m

connect *SEL5 (13) and 0V (14).
10 20

r.c
Cable connection (J47) Device No. selection switches

JN1 #0 #1
1 #2 #3
*SEL0 3 #4 #5

e
*SEL1 5 #6 #7
*SEL2 7 #8 #9
*SEL3 11 #10 #11
*SEL4 13 #12 #13
nt *SEL5
*SEL6
*SEL7
15
17

2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18

#14
Common
#15
ce
0V

Relationship between selection

switches and device numbers

Device No. *SEL7 *SEL4 *SEL3 *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0

nc

#0
#1 Ę
#2 Ę : Switch open
#3 Ę Ę : Switch closed
.c

#4 Ę * : Either will do
#5 Ę Ę
#6 Ę Ę
#7 Ę Ę
w

#8 Ę
#9 Ę Ę
#10 Ę Ę
w

#11 Ę Ę
#12 Ę Ę
#13 Ę Ę Ę
w

#14 Ę Ę Ę
#15 Ę Ę Ę
Common
display Ę – – – – –

68
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.3.2
Reader/Puncher
Interface
D Connection
Power Mate RS–232–C (JD5)
Punch panel etc

om
D Cable connection

r.c
JD5 Punch panel

RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR

e
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
nt CD (07)
0V (08)
+24V (10)
SD (11)
(08) CD

(02) SD
ce
0V (12)
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
(07) SG
nc

0V (16)

+24V (19) (25) +24V

(20)
.c

(01) FG
Shield
Connector : Half–pitch Connector DBM–25S
20 pins (PCR)
w

Recommended cable material:

A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 Pairs)
w

NOTE
Do not connect JD5 (10) and JD5 (19) if +24 V is not to be
w

supplied from the Power Mate main unit.

69
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.3.3 Up to two manual pulse generators can be connected to a 1–path Power

Manual Pulse Generator Mate–D. In a 2–path Power Mate–D, one manual pulse generator can be
connected to each path. In the Power Mate–F, only one manual pulse
generator can be connected.
D Connection

Power Mate MPG(JA13)

1st manual pulse
#1 generator

om
2nd manual pulse
#2 generator

r.c
D Cable connection
MPG(JA3) Manual pulse generator

HA1 (01) (05) HA1 1st/

e
HB1 (02) (06) HB1 1st path/
+5V (09) (03) +5V Power
nt 0V (12)

HA2 (03)
(04)

(05)
0V

HA2
Mate–F

2nd/
ce
HB2 (04) (06) HB2 2nd path
+5V (18) (03) +5V
0V (14) (04) 0V
Shield
nc

Connector : Half–pitch
20–pins(Hirose)
Connect HA1 (01) and HB1 (02) to HA2 (03) and HB2 (04), respectively, if one manu-
al pulse generator is shared by the 2–path Power Mate–D.
.c

D Voltage drop by cable Restrict voltage drop by cable to less than 0.2V in accordance with
w

length +5V/0V.
A R 2L
Voltage drop V =
m
w

Where A : manual pulse generator’s current (0.1A)

R : Registance per cable length
w

L : Cable length
m : No. of cables

70
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

D Electrical characteristics
Parameter Symbol Standard Units Test conditions

Min. Max.

Output V OH V CC –0.2 V RL = R

voltage
4.4 V RL = 4 k

V OL 0.3 V RL = 200

om
Timing conditions Recommended circuit

T1 T2 T3 T4 VCC

300

r.c
HA1
to CNC

e
HA2

T1, T2, T3, T4 > 82.5s

Period > 330 s nt 0V
ce
D Signal logics

[Forward movement command] [Backward movement command]

nc

HA1 HA1

HB1 HB1
.c

[The following two cases are not assumed as command pulses.]

w

HA1 HA1
w

HB1 HB1
w

71
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.3.4 The Power Mate–D is provided with one I/O Link master channel and one
I/O Link I/O Link slave channel, while the Power Mate–F is provided with only
one I/O Link slave channel.
D Connection
Master Slave
Power Mate JD1B Group #0 · I/O Unit–A
IO LINK · I/O card
JD1A1
· Power Mate ,etc.
JD1A

om
JD1B
Optical I/O link Group #1
adapter

r.c
(For I/O
JD1A unit A)
O/E Base #0 Base #1

Optical I/O link

e
Terminator
Optical fiber adapter
(Note) JD1B
Group #2
O/E
nt JD1A

Expanded up to 16 Groups
ce
D Cable connection within
group
nc

IOLINK (JD1A/JD1A1) JD1B

SIN (01) (01) SIN

*SIN (02) (02) *SIN
Twist pair
SOUT (03) (03) SOUT
.c

*SOUT (04) (04) *SOUT

0V (11) (11) 0V
w

0V (12) (12) 0V

0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
w

(+5V) (09) Shield (09) (+5V)

(+5V) (18) (18) (+5V)
w

(+5V) (20) (20) (+5V)

Connector : Connector :
Half–pitch 20 pins(PCR) Half–pitch 20 pins(PCR)

CAUTION
Connect +5V when optical I/O link adapter is used. Do not
connect when metal cable is used. Otherwise, the two +5V
lines will be short–circuited, leading to damage to the unit.

72
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

NOTE
When metal cable is used, cable length between units is
extended by 10 m.
When optical I/O link adapter is used, cable length between
units is extended by 200m.

D Connection between
bases (with I/O unit–A) From the last

om
Group
Base #0 Base #1

AIF01A AIF01A

JD1B

r.c
JD1A

JD2 JD3 JD2

e
Terminator
To next Group

nt
JD2

S1 (01)
*S1 (02)
JD3

(01)
(02)
S1
*S1
ce
S2 (03) (03) S2
*S2 (04) (04) *S2
S3 (05) (05) S3
*S3 (06) (06) *S3
S4 (07) (07) S4
nc

*S4 (08) (08) *S4

S5 (11) (11) S5
*S5 (12) (12) *S5
S6 (13) (13) S6
*S6 (14) (14) *S6
.c

ID1 (09) (09) ID1

ID2 (17) (17) ID2
ID3 (18) (18) ID3
0V (15) (15) 0V
w

0V (16) (16) 0V
Shield
Connector : Connector :
w

Half–pitch 20–pins (PCR) Half–pitch 20–pins (PCR)

D Cable connection in the

w

terminator JD2

TRM1 (04)
TRM1 (10)
TRM2 (12)
TRM2 (19)
TRM3 (14)
TRM3 (20)

Connector :
Half–pitch 20–pins (PCR)

73
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

NOTE
If there is more than I/O unit A in the same group, a
terminator is connected to the JP2 connector of the last
AIF01B. No terminator is needed for the JD1A connector
of the last unit on the I/O Link line.

2.3.5

om
Servo Interface
D Inter face type B

Power Mate Servo amplifier

Battery for ab-

r.c
solute pulse
coder
AMPx JSxB
(JSx)
Power line

ÈÈ
JFx

e
Linear scale, etc

nt ÈÈ
Servo
PC motor
SCALEx
(JF2x)
ce

D Interface type A
nc

Power Mate Servo amplifier

.c

AMPx JVxB
(JVx)
Power line
w

ÈÈ
Linear scale, etc

ENCx
w

(JFx)
SCALEx
(JF2x) PC
Servo
Battery for ab- motor
APCBAT solute pulse
w

(JA14) coder

74
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

D Connection to servo
amplifier of interface Power Mate
AMPn (JSn) Servo amplifier (JSnB)
type B
IRn (01) (01) IRn
GDRn (02) (02) GDRn
*PWMAn (03) (03) *PWMAn
0V (04) (04) 0V
*PWMCn (05) (05) *PWMCn
0V (06) (06) 0V
*PWMEn (07) (07) *PWMEn
0V (08) (08) 0V

om
*DRDYn (09) (09) *DRDYn
*MCONn (10) (10) *MCONn
ISn (11) (11) ISn
GDSn (12) (12) GDSn
*ENBLn (13) (13) *ENBLn
0V (14) (14) 0V
PDn (15) (15) PDn

r.c
*PDn (16) (16) *PDn
PREQn (17) (17) PREQn
*PREQn (18) (18) *PREQn
0V (19) (19) 0V
*0V (20) (20) *0V

e
Shield
Connector : Connector : Half–pitch 20–pin
Half–pitch 20–pin

D Connection to servo
amplifier of interface
type A
nt
Power Mate
AMPn (JVn)
Servo amplifier
(JVnB)
ce
IRn (01) (01) IRn
GDRn (02) (02) GDRn
*PWMAn (03) (03) *PWMAn
0V (04) (04) 0V
nc

*PWMBn (05) (05) *PWMBn

0V (06) (06) 0V
*PWMCn (07) (07) *PWMCn
0V (08) (08) 0V
.c

(09) (09)
*MCONn (10) (10) *MCONn
ISn (11) (11) ISn
GDSn (12) (12) GDSn
w

*PWMDn (13) (13) *PWMDn

0V (14) (14) 0V
*PWMEn (15) (15) *PWMEn
w

0V (16) (16) 0V
*PWMFn (17) (17) *PWMFn
0V (18) (18) 0V
(19) (19) 0V
w

*DRDYn (20) (20) *DRDYn

Shield
Connector : Connector : Half–pitch 20–pin
Half–pitch 20–pin

75
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

D Connection of serial
pulse coder
α3/3000 to α40/2000
ENCx(JFx) Serial pulse coder
α3/2000 to αC22/1500
SD (01) (F) REQ
*SD (02) (G) *REQ

REQ (05) (A) SD

*REQ (06) (D) *SD
+6V (07) (R) +6V

om
+5V (09)
+5V (18)
+5V (20) (J, K) +5V
0V (12)
0V (14) (N) 0V
0V (16) (T) 0VA

r.c
(H) SHLD (Shield)

Connector:
Half–pitch 20–pin

D Connection of serial

e
pulse coder
α1/3000 to α2/3000 nt
ENCx(JFx) Serial pulse coder

SD (01) (5) REQ

*SD (02) (6) *REQ
ce
REQ (05) (12) SD
*REQ (06) (13) *SD
+6 V (07) (14) +6V
nc

+5V (09)
+5V (18)
+5V (20) (8,15) +5V
0V (12) (1) 0V
0V (14) (2) 0V
.c

0V (16) (3) 0VA

(4) SHLD (Shield)

Connector:
w

Half–pitch 20–pin

NOTE
w

Voltage drop caused by the cable resistance must be taken

into consideration (0.5 Ω or less, total for both ways).
w

76
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

D Separate type pulse

coder interface
Separate type pulse
Power Mate coder
JF21–JF22
(PCR–EV20MDT)
01 PCA 11
02 :PCA 12 0V
03 PCB 13
04 :PCB 14 0V
05 PCZ 15

om
06 :PCZ 16 0V
07 (+6V) 17
08 (REQ) 18 +5V
09 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

r.c
+6V and REQ are for separate absolute pulse coders.

Cable wiring

e
1
PCA PCA
2
nt :PCA
PCB
:PCB
PCZ
3
4
5
:PCA
PCB
:PCB
PCZ
6
ce
:PCZ :PCZ
9
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
nc

14
0V 0V
16
0V 0V
Shield
.c
w
w
w

77
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

D Connection to battery for

absolute pulse coder
Power Mate Battery case

JA14
(PCR–EV20MDT)
(M3 terminal)
01 11
02 12
+ –
03 0V 13
+6V 0V
04 14
05 15

om
06 16
07 +6V 17
08 18
09 19
10 20

r.c
Cable connection
JA14 Battery case

e
7 + +6V
nt+6V
0V
3 – 0V
ce

2.3.6
nc

Connection to Serial
Spindle Amplifier P/C
.c

SPINDL Spindle
Power Mate (JA11) Serial
JY2 spindle #1
amplifier
JA7B
w

JA7A
w
w

78
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

Power Mate Spindle amplifier module

JA11 JA7B
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20MDT)
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
2 :SIN 12 0V 2 :SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 :SOUT 14 0V 4 :SOUT 14 0V
5 15 0V 5 15 0V
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 8 18
9 19 9 19

om
10 20 10 20

r.c
JA7B
SPINDL (JA11)

SIN (01) (02) SIN

*SIN (02) (01) *SIN

e
SOUT (03) (04) SOUT
*SOUT (04) (03) *SOUT
nt +5V (09)
+5V (18)
+5V (20)
(09)
(18)
(20)
+5V
+5V
+5V
ce
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
0V (15) (15) 0V
nc

0V (16) (16) 0V
Shield
Connector:
Connector:
Half–pitch 20–pin
Half–pitch 20–pins
.c

CAUTION
It is necessary to connect +5V (09, 18, 20) only when an
w

optical adapter is used. Do not connect +5V (09, 18, 20)

when the position coder is connected directly to the serial
spindle amplifier.
w
w

79
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.3.7
Connection to Analog
Spindle Amplifier Power Mate Control signal
Analog
SPINDL (JA11) spindle 200VAC
amplifier

SP–ENC (JA12)
Spindle

om
Position coder motor
PC

Spindle

r.c
Power Mate

Signal name Description

e
JA11
(PCR–EV20MDT) SVCn, ESn Spindle command voltage
and common line
1 11
nt
2
3
4
12
13
14
5 15
ce
ES2
6 SVC2 16
7 SVC1 17
8 ES1 18
9 19
nc

10 20
.c

SPINDL (JA11) Analog spindle amplifier

SVC1 (07) DA2

w

ES1 (08) E

SVC2 (06) DA2

ES2 (05) E
w

Shield
Connector : Connector : MR20–pin
Half–pitch 20–pins
w

80
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.3.8
Position Coder
Power Mate
Interface
JA12 Name Description
(PCR–EV20MDT) SC, :SC Position coder C–phase
signal
1 SC 11
2 :SC 12 0V PA, :PA Positon coder A–phase
signal
3 (SOUT) 13
4 (:SOUT) 14 0V PB, :PB Position coder B–phase

om
PA signal
5 15
6 :PA 16 0V SOUT, Signals for serial spindle
7 PB 17 :SOUT (Note)
8 :PB 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

r.c
SP–ENC(JA12) Position coder

e
SC (01) (B) SC
nt *SC (02)
PA (05)
*PA (06)
PB (07)
(P)
(A)
(N)
(C)
*SC
PA
*PA
PB
ce
*PB (08) (R) *PB
+5V (09)
+5V (18)
+5V (20) (H) +5V
0V (12)
nc

0V (14)
0V (16) (K) 0V
Shield
Connector : Connector : CANON
Half–pitch 20–pins
.c

NOTE
w

1 The SOUT and *SOUT signals are not used for an analog
spindle but are used for a serial spindle. In other words,
w

position coder feedback and a serial spindle are mutually

exclusive.
2 In a 2–path Power Mate–D, the position coder interface is
w

provided by the 1st path. The 2nd path has no position

coder interface.

81
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.3.9
DPL/MDI Interface

D Connection
(1) Connection using no junction cable

Power Mate DPL/MDI

om
D15.M J6 D15.M
M4 CNPR

r.c
(2) Connection using junction cable J13

Power Mate Panel DPL/MDI

e
D15.M D15.F J6
M4 CNPR
J13 D15.M D15.M
nt Junction cable
ce
D Cable connection
Details of cable J6
nc

Power DPL/MDI
Mate
M4, CNPR
panel
.c

(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
w

(10) RXD TXD (12)

(11) *RXD *TXD (13)
(12) TXD RXD (10)
w

(13) *TXD *RXD (11)

(05) +5V +5V (05)
w

(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS CTS (15)
(14) *RTS *CTS (08)
(15) CTS RTS (06)
(08) *CTS *RTS (14)
Shell Shell
Shield

Male Always connect the shell of each connector to 0V. Female

82
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

Details of cable J13

Power Junction
Mate connector
M4

(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) RXD RXD (10)

om
(11) *RXD *RXD (11)
(12) TXD TXD (12)
(13) *TXD *TXD (13)
(05) +5V +5V (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)

r.c
(06) RTS RTS (06)
(14) *RTS *RTS (14)
(15) CTS CTS (15)
(08) *CTS *CTS (08)

e
Shell Shell

Shield
ntMale
Always connect the shell of each connector to 0V.
Female
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

83
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.3.10 Detachable LCD/MDI can not used at the Power Mate–F.

Detachable LCD/MDI See Connection Manual for details.
Interface
D Connection

Cabinet

om
Connector 24 VDC
J132
panel power
supply

Detach- Connection
able LCD/ panel Power
MDI unit Mate

r.c
J127 J128 J126
CA50 JD14

24VDC"10% Terminating
unit JD15
1.0A

e
D Cable connection
nt
ce
Cabinet
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector RXD JD14 (01) Power
nc

panel Mate
CA50 (02) *RXD panel *RXD JD14 (02)

CA50 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)

CA50 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)

.c

CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE1) 0V JD14 (11, 12)

CA50 (16) ATCH2 to DI
ATCH
w

+24V CA50 (09, 10) +24V

+24V External power supply
CA50 (19, 20) 0V
0V 24 VDC
w

CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield
CA50 (06) *SEL0
w

Device No. selec-

CA50 (07) *SEL1 tion switches on
CA50 (08) *SEL2 the machine oper-
ator’s panel
CA50 (14) *SEL3
CA50 (17) *SEL4
CA50 (18) *SEL7

84
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.3.11 Handy operator’s panel can not used at the Power Mate–F.
Handy Operator’s
Panel Interface
NOTE
1 If 24 V is not applied to emergency stop input EMGTP
(CRS10–11) of the handy operator’s panel, the handy
operator’s panel enters the emergency stop state.
2 The terminating unit connected to the JD15 connector of the
Power Mate is not a CRT link terminating unit. This is the

om
same as the touch panel terminating unit (2.3.12).
3 Set rotary switch MTSW of the Power Mate main unit to 3.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

85
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

Connection Allowing the

Handy Operator’s Panel
to be Detached
D Connection

Cabinet
Connection
panel

Connector Power
Handy panel Mate

om
operator’s J118
panel J122 J120
JD14
CRS10
Terminating
24VDC10% Handy operator’s JD15
unit
0.2A panel enable
switch

r.c
J135 24 VDC
power
supply

Emergency
J121 J119
stop on ma-

e
chine opera-
tor’s panel,
etc.
nt Safety
relay
ce
D Cable connection

The CE standard is not satisfied by this method.

Cabinet
nc

Handy operator’s panel Connection Connector

CRS10 (01) RXD panel panel RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate
CRS10 (02) *RXD *RXD JD14 (02)

CRS10 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)

.c

CRS10 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)

+5V CRS10 (15) ATCH1 ATCH1 JD14 (09)

w

CRS10 (16) ATCH2 ATCH2 JD14 (20)

0V JD14 (11, 12)

Emergency
w

stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP *ESP to DI

Deadman’s
switch enable (Separate emergency
switch EMGEN Emergency Operator’s
CRS10 (13) stop contact such as +24V
w

panel
door open limit switch) stop SB1
Deadman’s switch (right)
SQ1
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM (NOTE1)
+24V External power supply
+24V 0V 24VDC
CRS10 (09, 10) +24V SR1
KT1
CRS10 (19, 20) 0V Safety
relay +24V
CRS10 (05) FG Servo amplifier
(Plastic case Shield
with conductive ESP
coating)

86
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

Keeping the Handy

Operator’s Panel
Connected at All Times

D Connection

Cabinet

Connector Power

om
Handy panel
operator’s Mate
panel J118 J120
JD14
CRS10

24VDC" 10% Terminating JD15

0. 2A unit

r.c
J135 24 VDC
power
supply

Emergency stop

e
on machine op- J121 J119
erator’s panel,
etc.
nt Safety
relay
ce
D Cable connection

Cabinet
Handy operator’s panel
nc

CRS10 (01) RXD Connector panel RXD JD14 (01) Power

Mate
CRS10 (02) *RXD *RXD JD14 (02)

CRS10 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)

.c

CRS10 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)

+5V CRS10 (15) ATCH1 ATCH1 JD14 (09)

CRS10 (16) ATCH2 ATCH2 JD14 (20)

w

0V JD14 (11, 12)

Emergency
stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP *ESP to DI
w

Deadman’s
switch en- (Separate emergency
able switch Operator’s panel
CRS10 (13) EMGEN stop contact such as the Emergen-SB1 +24V
door open limit switch) cy stop
w

Deadman’s
switch (right)
SQ1
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM
+24V External power supply
+24V
CRS10 (09, 10) +24V 0V 24VDC

CRS10 (19, 20) 0V KT1

Safety
relay +24V
CRS10 (05) FG Servo amplifier
(Plastic case with Shield ESP
conductive coating)

87
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.3.12 Touch panel interface can not used at the Power Mate–F.
Touch panel Interface

D Connection

DPL/MDI

Touch panels Power Mate

om
manufactured by
Digital Corporation
SGP–450E
SGP–550T J123 JD14
SIO
SGP–550S (CRT/MDI
interface)

JD15

r.c
Terminating unit M4

D Cable connection

e
Cable J123
Touch panel
SIO
nt Power Mate
JD14
ce
15 01
SD B RD B
11 02
SD A RD A
16 03 #28AWG
RD B SD B twisted pair
nc

10 04
RD A SD A
07 11
SG 0V #28AWG
09 Shield
.c

TRMX
18
CS B
19
ER B
w

#28AWG
21
CS A
22
w

ER A

Power Mate
w

Terminating unit JD15

01
RD B
R 02 Direct resistor connection
RD A

88
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.4
LED DISPLAY/
SETTING AND
MODULE
CONFIGURATION OF
UNIT

2.4.1

om
LED Display of Control If an alarm occurred, an alarm message is usually displayed on the DPL
Unit CRT, PDP, LCD, or handy operator’s panel screen. However, it is
possible that no alarm appears, if the display function is in trouble.
In such a case, the alarm occurrence are displayed by LED on the
Controller.

r.c
LED
Contents Co ntermeas res
Countermeasures
No. Color
S0 Green No alarm
Blinks during automat-

e
ic operation.
Remains on or off
nt
S1 Red
while automatic opera-
tion is not being per-
formed.
Lights with all alarms An alarm No. is displayed in the
ce
DPL/MDI or CRT/MDI at the same
time.
Make a corrective measure by the
alarm No.
nc

EN Green This show to turn on

power.
WD Red Watch dog alarm When display unit is connected at
alarm is occured, it may be dis-
plaied the alarm number.
.c

Do some disposal of the alarm.

If the all–clear operation does not
release the alarm, replace the
base PCB
w
w
w

89
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.4.2
Connector and Signal
Name (a) 1–path Power Mate–D (servo interface type A)

om
Front Bottom face

r.c
Fuse (5.0A)
Left side M4 DPL/MDI
CB 128/CM29
Memory card Built–in I/O

e
+24VDC input Right side
CB 129/CM30
Built–in I/O
nt
LED display
Rotary switch
TEST Servo check

JD15 CRT/MDI common

ce
use from latter
Servo amplifier (1st axis) CRT/MDI
Terminal resistant
Pulse coder (1st axis) unit
Separate type pulse coder JD14 CRT/MDI
CRT/MDI common
(1st axis) use from former
nc

Servo amplifier (2nd axis) CRT/MDI

Pulse coder (2nd axis) FAS1 Frame ground
Separate type pulse coder (FG terminal)
(2nd axis)
APC battery
.c

Spindle
w

Position coder

Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C
w

I/O Link (master)

I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

w

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

90
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

(b)      
    

Front Bottom face

om
Fuse (5.0A)
Left side
M4 DPL/MDI
CB 128/CM29
Memory card Built–in I/O

+24VDC input Right side

CB 129/CM30

r.c
Built–in I/O
TEST Servo check
LED display
Rotary switch
JD15 CRT/MDI common
use from latter
CRT/MDI

e
Servo amplifier (1st axis)
Terminal resistant
unit
JD14 CRT/MDI
nt
Separate type pulse coder
(1st axis)
Servo amplifier (2nd axis)
CRT/MDI common
use from former
CRT/MDI
FAS1 Frame ground
ce
(FG terminal)
Separate type pulse coder
(2nd axis)
APC battery
nc

Spindle
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C
.c

I/O Link (master)

I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

w

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

w
w

91
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

(c) 
  
  
  

Front Bottom face

om
Fuse (5.0A)
Left side
CB 128/CM29 M4 DPL/MDI
Built–in I/O
Memory card
Right side
+24VDC input
CB 129/CM30

r.c
Built–in I/O
TEST Servo check
LED display
Rotary switch JD15 CRT/MDI common
use from latter
CRT/MDI

e
Servo amplifier (1st path)
Terminal resistant
Pulse coder (1st path) unit
JD14 CRT/MDI
nt
Separate type pulse coder
(1st path)
Servo amplifier (2nd path)
Pulse coder (2nd path)
CRT/MDI common
use from former
CRT/MDI
FAS1 Frame ground
ce
(FG terminal)
Separate type pulse coder
(2nd paht)
APC battery
nc

Spindle
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C
.c

I/O Link (master)

I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

w

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

w
w

92
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

(d) 
  
  
  

Front Bottom face

om
Fuse (5.0A)
Left side M4 DPL/MDI
CB 128/CM29
Memory card Built–in I/O
+24VDC input Right side
CB 129/CM30

r.c
Built–in I/O
TEST Servo check
LED display
Rotary switch
JD15 CRT/MDI common
use from latter
CRT/MDI

e
Servo amplifier (1st path)
Terminal resistant
unit
JD14 CRT/MDI
nt
Separate type pulse coder
(1st path)
Servo amplifier (2nd path)
CRT/MDI common
use from former
CRT/MDI
FAS1 Frame ground
ce
Separate type pulse coder (FG terminal)
(2nd paht)
APC battery
nc

Spindle

Position coder
Manual pulse generator

RS–232–C
.c

I/O Link (master)

I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit
w

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

w
w

93
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

(e)  
   
  

Front Bottom face

om
Fuse (5.0A)

Left side
Memory card CB130/CM43
Built–in I/O
+24VDC input

r.c
Right side
CB131/CM44 TEST Servo check
LED display Built–in I/O
Rotary switch

e
Servo amplifier (1st axis)
FAS1 Frame ground
Pulse coder (1st axis) (FG terminal)
nt
Separate type pulse
coder (1st axis)
Spindle
Position coder
ce
Manual pulse generator

APC battery
nc

RS–232–C
I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

.c

DPL/MDI
w
w
w

94
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

(f)  
   
  

Front Bottom face

om
Fuse (5.0A)

Left side
Memory card CB130/CM43
Built–in I/O
+24VDC input

r.c
Right side
CB131/CM44 TEST Servo check
LED display Built–in I/O
Rotary switch

e
Servo amplifier (1st axis)
FAS1 Frame ground
(FG terminal)
nt
Separate type pulse coder
(1st axis)
Spindle
ce
Position coder

Manual pulse generator

APC battery
nc

RS–232–C
I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit

I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit

.c

DPL/MDI
w
w
w

2.4.3
Fuse Ordering code Symbol Rating Individual code
A60L–0001–0046#5.0 or
A02B–0124–K101 F1 5.0A
A60L–0001–0046#5.0R

95
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.4.4 Lithium battery code : A20B–0118–K111

Battery of Controller

2.4.5 When CRT/MDI common functions and RSW simaltaneous block start
Setting the Rotary at the power Mate–D are used, set device numbers from 0 to 15 with the
rotary switch (RSW). Assign the number from the first Power Mate–D in
Switch RSW order.

Device No. RSW setting

om
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3

r.c
When CRT/MDI common functions and RSW simaltaneous block start
are not used, set device number to 0.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

Setting of rotary switch RSW

NOTE
The Power Mate–F is not provided with rotary switch RSW.

96
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.4.6 Set MTSW to 0 for general use.

Rotary Switch MTSW When handy operator’s panel is used, set MTSW to 3.
Normally, do not set other number except [0] and [3].

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

97
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.4.7
Location of Modules a) Power Mate–D (A02B–0166–B001)
and Internal Printed
Boards

NAME NUMBER USE

om
Memory card CNMC Memory card

(8)

S1 S0
LED WD EN LED display

r.c
Rotary switch RSW CRT common function

e
AMP1 JV1 Servo amplifier (1st axis)

(1) (3) F01 (5) (7) ENC1 JF1 Pulse coder (1st axis)
(10) nt SCALE1

AMP2
JF21

JV2
Separate type pulse coder (1st axis)

Servo amplifier (2nd axis)

ce
ENC2 JF2 Pulse coder (2nd axis)

F81 SCALE2 JF22 Separate type pulse coder (2nd axis)

(10)
nc

(2) (4) (6)

APCBAT JA14 APC battery

SPNDLE JA11 Spindle

.c

SP.ENC JA12 Position coder

MPG JA13 Manual pulse generator

w

RS232C JD5 RS-232-C

w

(9) I/O JD1A1 I/O Link (master)

I/O Link JD1B I/O Link (slave)from previous step

w

I/O Link JD1A I/O Link (slave) to latter

DPL/MDI M4 DPL/MDI

SVCHK TEST Servo check board

PM/TMNL JD15 CRT Link to latter

CRT/PM JD14 CRT Link from previous step

98
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

No. NAME Specification Function Display of system con-

figuration screen
Base PCB A16B–2201–0630 –
(1) PMC controled module A A20B–2900–0142 PMC–PA1 PMC BIT
PMC controled module B A20B–2901–0660, 0662 PMC–PA3 PMC PMP+SLC
(2) Memory module A A20B–2900–0531 RAM 128KB RAM 128KB
A20B–2902–0332
Memory module B A20B–2900–0530 RAM 256KB RAM 256KB
A20B–2902–0331

om
Memory module C A20B–2900–0541 RAM 512KB RAM 512KB
A20B–2902–0330
(3) CPU module A20B–2901–0500 CPU function –
(4) CRT controled module A20B–2901–0480 CRT, PDP SCA(CRT) 9”CRT
(5) Spindle module A20B–2900–0851 Analog spindle POS LSI

r.c
A20B–2900–0850 Serial spindle SIC
A20B–2901–0210 Analog input + Serial spindle ANALOG INPUT
SIC
(6) Digital servo module A20B–2900–0160 Servo function SERVO 1/2
(7) Digital servo interface module A20B–2900–0380 Servo interface function

e
(8) Power supply PCB A20B–1004–0960 Power supply –
(9) Sub PCB A20B–2000–0670 Built–in I/O (sink type) BLT I/O

(10) Basic ROM

nt
A20B–2001–0370
A02B–0166–H501
#8830
M–NET
Basic function
M–NET
8830
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

99
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

b) Power Mate–D (A02B–0166–B520)

For E series servo control (be able to controled α series servo)

NAME NUMBER USE

Memory card CNMC Memory card

(8)

om
S1 S0
LED WD EN LED display

Rotary switch RSW CRT common function

r.c
AMP1 JV1 Servo amplifier (1st axis)

(1) (3) F01 (5) (7) ENC1 JF1 Pulse coder (1st axis)
(10)

e
SCALE1 JF21 Separate type pulse coder (1st axis)

AMP2 JV2 Servo amplifier (2nd axis)

nt ENC2 JF2 Pulse coder (2nd axis)
ce
F81 SCALE2 JF22 Separate type pulse coder (2nd axis)
(2) (10) (4) (6)
APCBAT JA14 APC battery
nc

SPNDLE JA11 Spindle

SP.ENC JA12 Position coder

MPG JA13 Manual pulse generator

.c

RS232C JD5 RS-232-C

w

(9) I/O JD1A1 I/O Link (master)

I/O Link JD1B I/O Link (slave)from previous step

w

I/O Link JD1A I/O Link (slave) to latter

w

DPL/MDI M4 DPL/MDI

SVCHK TEST Servo check board

PM/TMNL JD15 CRT Link to latter

CRT/PM JD14 CRT Link from previous step

100
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

No. NAME Specification Function Display of system con-

figuration screen
Base PCB A16B–2201–0630 –
(1) PMC controled module A A20B–2900–0142 PMC–PA1 PMC BIT
PMC controled module B A20B–2901–0660, 0662 PMC–PA3 PMC PMP+SLC
(2) Memory module A A20B–2900–0531 RAM 128KB RAM 128KB
A20B–2902–0332
Memory module B A20B–2900–0530 RAM 256KB RAM 256KB
A20B–2902–0331

om
Memory module C A20B–2900–0541 RAM 512KB RAM 512KB
A20B–2902–0330
(3) CPU module A20B–2901–0500 CPU function –
(4) CRT controled module A20B–2901–0480 CRT, PDP SCA(CRT) 9”CRT
(5) Spindle module A20B–2900–0851 Analog spindle POS LSI

r.c
A20B–2900–0850 Serial spindle SIC
A20B–2901–0210 Analog input + Serial spindle ANALOG INPUT
SIC
(6) Digital servo module A20B–2901–0340 E series servo SERVO 1/2
(7) Digital servo interface module A20B–2900–0380 Servo interface function

e
(8) Power supply PCB A20B–1004–0960 Power supply –
(9) Sub PCB A20B–2000–0670 Built–in I/O (sink type) BLT I/O

(10) Basic ROM

nt
A20B–2001–0370
A02B–0166–H501
#8831
M–NET
Basic function
M–NET
8831
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

101
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

c) Power Mate–D (A02B–0166–B501, B502)

Conrresponding to 2–path (Interface type A)

NAME NUMBER USE

Memory card CNMC Memory card

(4)

om
S1 S0
LED WD EN LED display

Rotary switch RSW CRT common function

Rotary switch MTSW Maintenance function

r.c
(Base PCB Version 04C or later)

AMP1 JV1 Servo amplifier (1st axis)

(1) F01 (3) ENC1 JF1 Pulse coder (1st axis)

(6)

e
SCALE1 JF21 Separate type pulse coder (1st axis)

AMP2 JV2 Servo amplifier (2nd axis)

nt ENC2 JF2 Pulse coder (2nd axis)
ce
SCALE2 JF22 Separate type pulse coder (2nd axis)
F81 E81
(2)
(6) (7) APCBAT JA14 APC battery
nc

SPNDLE JA11 Spindle

SP.ENC JA12 Position coder

MPG JA13 Manual pulse generator

.c

RS232C JD5 RS-232-C

w

(5) I/O JD1A1 I/O Link (master)

I/O Link JD1B I/O Link (slave)from previous step

w

I/O Link JD1A I/O Link (slave) to latter

w

DPL/MDI M4 DPL/MDI

SVCHK TEST Servo check board

PM/TMNL JD15 CRT Link to latter

CRT/PM JD14 CRT Link from previous step

102
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

1– 2– Display of system
No. NAME Specification Function
path path configuration screen
Base PCB (B501) f f A20B–2100–0030 RAM 256KB RAM 256KB
Servo SERVO 1/2
Base PCB (B502) f f A20B–2100–0031 function
Servo
Base PCB (B501) f f A20B–2001–0610 interface
(1) PMC controled module A f A20B–2900–0142 PMC–PA1 PMC BIT
PMC controled module B f f A20B–2901–0660, 0662 PMC–PA3 PMC PMP+SLC
(2) Memory module CSA f A20B–2902–0230 RAM addition 512KB RAM 768KB
Analog spindlex2 POS LSI
Memory module BSA f A20B–2902–0231 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB

om
Analog spindlex2 POS LSI
Memory module ASA f A20B–2902–0232 Analog spindlex2 POS LSI
Memory module BSA f A20B–2902–0234 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB
Analog spindle POS LSI
Memory module ASA f A20B–2902–0235 Analog spindle POS LSI
Memory module C f A20B–2902–0236 RAM addition 512KB RAM 768KB

r.c
Memory module B f f A20B–2902–0237 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB
Memory module BSSA f A20B–2902–0221 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB
Serial spindle SIC
Analog input ANALOG INPUT
f

e
Memory module ASSA A20B–2902–0222 Serial spindle SIC
Analog input ANALOG INPUT
Memory module CSS f A20B–2902–0223 RAM addition 512KB RAM 768KB

Memory module BSS

Memory module ASS

f

f
f

f
nt
A20B–2902–0224

A20B–2902–0225
Serial spindle
RAM addition 256KB
Serial spindle
Serial spindle
SIC
RAM 512KB
SIC
SIC
ce
(3) CRT controled module f f A20B–2901–0480 CRT,LCD,PDP,Handy oper- SCA(CRT) 9”CRT
ator’s panel
Touch panel connection f f A20B–2902–0470 Touch panel connection –
module
f f
nc

HSSB module A20B–2902–0540 HSSB function –

(4) Power supply PCB f f A20B–1004–0960 Power supply –
(5) Sub PCB f f A20B–2000–0670 Built–in I/O (sink type) BLT I/O
f f A20B–2001–0902 Built–in I/O C (source type) BLT I/O SRC
f Profibus card PROFIBUS
.c

A20B–2100–0120
A20B–8001–0500
f A20B–8100–0060 Genius card GENIUS
f f
w

A20B–2100–0040 I/O Link–II I/O Link–2

f f A20B–2001–0370 M–NET M–NET
(6) Basic ROM f A02B–0166–H511 For 1–path control 8831
#8831 Basic function
w

f A02B–0166–H511 For 1–path control 8834

#8834 Basic function
f A02B–0166–H511 For 2–path control 8836
w

#8836 Basic function

f A02B–0166–H511 For 2–path control 8837
#8837 Basic function
(7) Option ROM f A02B–0166–H511 For 1–path control 8834
#8834
f A02B–0166–H511 For 2–path control 8837
#8837

103
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

d) Power Mate–D (A02B–0166–B531)

Corresponding to 2–path (Interface type B)

NAME NUMBER USE

Memory card CNMC Memory card

om
(4)

S1 S0
LED WD EN LED display

Rotary switch RSW CRT common function

r.c
Rotary switch MTSW Maintenance function

AMP1 JS1 Servo amplifier (1st axis)

e
(1) F01 (3)
(6)

nt SCALE1

AMP2
JF21

JS2
Separate type pulse coder (1st axis)

Servo amplifier (2nd axis)

ce
SCALE2 JF22 Separate type pulse coder (2nd axis)
F81 E81
(2)
(6) (7) APCBAT JA14 APC battery
nc

SPNDLE JA11 Spindle

SP.ENC JA12 Position coder

.c

MPG JA13 Manual pulse generator

w

RS232C JD5 RS-232-C

(5) I/O JD1A1 I/O Link (master)

w

I/O Link JD1B I/O Link (slave)from previous step

I/O Link JD1A I/O Link (slave) to latter

w

DPL/MDI M4 DPL/MDI

SVCHK TEST Servo check board

PM/TMNL JD15 CRT Link to latter

CRT/PM JD14 CRT Link from previous step

104
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

1– 2– Display of system
No. NAME Specification Function
path path configuration screen
Base PCB f f A20B–2100–0160 RAM 256KB RAM 256KB
Servo function SERVO 1/2
Ser o interface
Servo
(1) PMC controled module A f A20B–2900–0142 PMC–PA1 PMC BIT
PMC controled module B f f A20B–2901–0660, 0662 PMC–PA3 PMC PMP+SLC
(2) Memory module CSA f A20B–2902–0230 RAM addition 512KB RAM 768KB
Analog spindlex2 POS LSI
Memory module BSA f A20B–2902–0231 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB
Analog spindlex2 POS LSI

om
Memory module ASA f A20B–2902–0232 Analog spindlex2 POS LSI
Memory module BSA f A20B–2902–0234 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB
Analog spindle POS LSI
Memory module ASA f A20B–2902–0235 Analog spindle POS LSI
Memory module C f A20B–2902–0236 RAM addition 512KB RAM 768KB
Memory module B f f A20B–2902–0237 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB

r.c
Memory module BSSA f A20B–2902–0221 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB
Serial spindle SIC
Analog input ANALOG INPUT
Memory module ASSA f A20B–2902–0222 Serial spindle SIC
Analog input ANALOG INPUT

e
Memory module CSS f A20B–2902–0223 RAM addition 512KB RAM 768KB
Serial spindle SIC
Memory module BSS f f A20B–2902–0224 RAM addition 256KB RAM 512KB

(3)
Memory module ASS
CRT controled module
f
f
f
f
nt A20B–2902–0225
A20B–2901–0480
Serial spindle
Serial spindle
CRT,LCD,PDP,Handy op-
SIC
SIC
SCA(CRT) 9”CRT
ce
erator’s panel
Touch panel connection f f A20B–2902–0470 Touch panel connection –
module
HSSB module f f A20B–2902–0540 HSSB function –
(4) Power supply PCB f f A20B–1004–0960 Power supply –
nc

(5) Sub PCB f f A20B–2000–0670 Built–in I/O (sink type) BLT I/O
f f A20B–2001–0902 Built–in I/O C (source type) BLT I/O SRC
f A20B–2100–0120 Profibus card PROFIBUS
A20B–8001–0500
.c

f A20B–8100–0060 Genius card GENIUS

f f A20B–2100–0040 I/O Link–II I/O Link–2
f f A20B–2001–0370 M–NET M–NET
w

(6) Basic ROM f A02B–0166–H511 For 1–path control 8834

#8834 Basic function
f A02B–0166–H511 For 2–path control 8837
w

#8837 Basic function

(7) Option ROM f A02B–0166–H511 For 1–path control 8834
#8834
w

f A02B–0166–H511 For 2–path control 8837

#8837

105
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

e) Power Mate–F (A02B–0198–B501)

Interface type A

NAME NUMBER USE

Memory card CNMC Memory card

(2)

om
S1 S0
LED WD EN LED display

Rotary switch MTSW Maintenance function

r.c
(Base PCB Version 06 or later)

AMP1 JV1 Servo amplifier (1st axis)

F81 ENC1 JF2 Pulse coder (1st axis)

(4)

e
SCALE1 JF21 Separate type pulse coder (1st axis)

SPNDLE JA11 Spindle

(1)
nt SP.ENC JA12 Position coder
ce
MPG JA13 Manual pulse generator
F01
(5) APCBAT JA14 APC battery
nc

RS232C JD5 RS-232-C

I/O Link JD1B I/O Link (slave)from previous step

I/O Link JD1A I/O Link (slave) to latter

.c
w

(3) DPL/MDI M4 DPL/MDI

w
w

SVCHK TEST Servo check board

106
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

No. NAME Specification Function

Base PCB A20B–2001–0620 RAM 256KB
Servo function
Servo interface
(1) Spindle module (S ana- A20B–2902–0235 Analog spindle
log)
Spindle module (S serial) A20B–2902–0225 Serial spindle
(2) Power supply PCB A20B–1004–0960 Power supply
(3) Sub PCB A20B–2001–0630 Built–in I/O (sink type)
48/32
A20B–2001–0631 Built–in I/O (sink type)

om
32/24
A20B–2001–0900 Built–in I/O (source type)
48/32
A20B–2001–0901 Built–in I/O (source type)
32/24
A20B–2100–0040 I/O Link–II

r.c
A20B–2001–0370 M–NET
(4) Basic ROM A02B–0198–H501 Basic function
#8870
(5) Option ROM A02B–0198–H501 Basic function

e
#8870

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

107
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

f) Power Mate–F (A02B–0198–B531)

Interface type B

NAME NUMBER USE

Memory card CNMC Memory card

(2)

om
S1 S0
LED WD EN LED display

Rotary switch MTSW Maintenance function

r.c
AMP1 JV1 Servo amplifier (1st axis)

F81
(4)

e
SCALE1 JF21 Separate type pulse coder (1st axis)

SPNDLE JA11 Spindle

(1)
nt SP.ENC JA12 Position coder
ce
MPG JA13 Manual pulse generator
F01
(5) APCBAT JA14 APC battery
nc

RS232C JD5 RS-232-C

I/O Link JD1B I/O Link (slave)from previous step

I/O Link JD1A I/O Link (slave) to latter

.c
w

(3) DPL/MDI M4 DPL/MDI

w
w

SVCHK TEST Servo check board

108
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

No. NAME Specification Function

Base PCB A20B–2002–0370 RAM 256KB
Servo function
Servo interface
(1) Spindle module (S ana- A20B–2902–0235 Analog spindle
log)
Spindle module (S serial) A20B–2902–0225 Serial spindle
(2) Power supply PCB A20B–1004–0960 Power supply
(3) Sub PCB A20B–2001–0630 Built–in I/O (sink type)
48/32
A20B–2001–0631 Built–in I/O (sink type)

om
32/24
A20B–2001–0900 Built–in I/O (source type)
48/32
A20B–2001–0901 Built–in I/O (source type)
32/24
A20B–2100–0040 I/O Link–II

r.c
A20B–2001–0370 M–NET
(4) Basic ROM A02B–0198–H501 Basic function
#8870
(5) Option ROM A02B–0198–H501 Basic function

e
#8870

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

109
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.4.8
LED display of I/O Link
LED indications
Connection Unit

LED5 LED3 LED4 LED2

(GREEN) (RED) (GREEN) (RED)

om
DC–DC
CONVERTER

CP2

r.c
F +5V

LED1 (RED)

e
nt F 0V
ce
F : Check pin

Fig.2.4.8 LED Installation Positions

nc

LED status Description

LED1
Normal
j
1
LED1 A RAM parity error occurred.
.c

J The hardware is out of order.

LED4 LRD2
Normal
J j
w

LED4 LRD2 No voltage is applied to CP1.

2
j J The voltage applied to CP1 is insufficient.
w

LED4 LRD2 A communication error occurred in a

J J channel connected to CP1.
LED5 LRD3
Normal
J j
w

LED5 LRD3 No voltage is applied to CP2.

3
j J The voltage applied to CP2 is insufficient.
LED5 LRD3 A communication error occurred in a
J J channel connected to CP2.
J : Lit j : Not lit

110
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.5
LIST OF PRINTED
BOARD AND UNIT

2.5.1
Basic Unit NAME Specification Servo inter- Remarks
face
Power Mate–D Basic unit A02B–0166–B001 TYPE A

om
Basic unit A02B–0166–B520 TYPE A Corresponding to
E series servo
Basic unit A02B–0166–B501 TYPE A Corresponding to
2–path control
Basic unit A02B–0166–B502 TYPE A Corresponding to
2–path control

r.c
Basic unit A02B–0166–B531 TYPE B Corresponding to
2–path control
Power Mate–F Basic unit A02B–0198–B501 TYPE A
Basic unit A02B–0198–B531 TYPE B

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

111
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.5.2
Control Unit Printed
Board
D F
NAME Specification Remarks
B001 B520 B501 B502 B531 B501 B531
Base PCB f f A16B–2201–0630 TYPE A
f A20B–2001–0610 TYPE A, corresponding to
2–path

om
f A16B–2100–0030 TYPE A, corresponding to
2–path
f A16B–2100–0031 TYPE A, corresponding to
2–path
f A16B–2100–0160 TYPE B, corresponding to
2–path

r.c
f A20B–2001–0620 TYPE A
f A20B–2002–0370 TYPE B
Power supply PCB f f f f f f f A20B–1004–0960
Built–in I/O card f f f f f A20B–2000–0670 DI:32, DO:24 (sink type)

e
Built–in I/O card C f f f f f A20B–2001–0902 DI:32, DO:24 (source type)
Built–in I/O card A f f A20B–2001–0631 DI:32, DO:24 (sink type)
Built–in I/O card B
Built–in I/O card D1
Built–in I/O card D2
nt f
f
f
f
f
f
A20B–2001–0630
A20B–2001–0901
A20B–2001–0900
DI:48, DO:32 (sink type)
DI:32, DO:24 (source type)
DI:48, DO:32 (source type)
f f f
ce
Profibus card A20B–2100–0120
A20B–8001–0500
Genius card f f f A20B–8100–0060
I/O Link–II card f f f f f A20B–2100–0040
M–NET card f f f f f f f A20B–2001–0370
nc

I/O card A f f f f f A16B–2201–0071 DI:48, DO:32 (sink type)

I/O card B f f f f f A16B–2201–0070 DI:96, DO:64 (sink type)
I/O card D f f f f f A16B–2202–0733 DI:48, DO:32 (source type)
I/O card E f f f f f A16B–2202–0732 DI:96, DO:64 (source type)
.c
w
w
w

112
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.5.3
Module

D F
NAME Specification Remarks
B001 B520 B501 B531 B501 B531
PMC controled module A f f f f A20B–2900–0142 PMC–PA1
PMC controled module B f f f f A20B–2901–0660 PMC–PA3
f f f f A20B–2901–0662 PMC–PA3

om
Memory module A f f A20B–2900–0531 RAM 128KB
f f A20B–2902–0332 RAM 128KB
Memory module B f f A20B–2900–0530 RAM 256KB
f f A20B–2902–0331 RAM 256KB
Memory module C f f A20B–2900–0541 RAM 512KB
f f

r.c
A20B–2902–0330 RAM 512KB
CPU module f f A20B–2901–0500
CRT controled module f f f f A20B–2901–0480
Touch panel connection f f A20B–2902–0470 Touch panel connection
module

e
HSSB module f f A20B–2902–0540 HSSB function
Spindle module f f A20B–2900–0851 Analog spindle

Digital servo module

f
f
f
f
f
nt A20B–2900–0850
A20B–2901–0210
A20B–2900–0160
Serial spindle
Analog input\Serial spindle
Corresponding to S series
servo
ce
f A20B–2901–0340 Corresponding to E, α se-
ries servo
Digital servo interface mod- f f A20B–2900–0380
ule
f f
nc

Memory module CSA A20B–2902–0230 RAM addition 512KB

Analog spindlex2
Memory module BSA f f A20B–2902–0231 RAM addition 256KB
Analog spindlex2
Memory module ASA f f A20B–2902–0232 Analog spindlex2
.c

Memory module BSA f f A20B–2902–0234 RAM addition 256KB

Analog spindle
Memory module ASA f f f f A20B–2902–0235 Analog spindle
Spindle module S analog
w

Memory module C f f A20B–2902–0236 RAM addition 512KB

Memory module B f f A20B–2902–0237 RAM addition 256KB
Memory module BSSA f A20B–2902–0221 RAM addition 256KB
w

Serial spindle
Analog input
Memory module ASSA f f A20B–2902–0222 Serial spindle
w

Analog input
Memory module CSS f f A20B–2902–0223 RAM addition 512KB
Serial spindle
Memory module BSS f f A20B–2902–0224 RAM addition 256KB
Serial spindle
Memory module ASS f f f f A20B–2902–0225 Serial spindle
Spindle module S serial

113
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.5.4
CRT/MDI, DPL/MDI Unit
Name D F Specifications Remarks
CRT/MDI unit f A02B–0166–C001 English key
f A02B–0166–C003 English key, In–line connection type
f A02B–0166–C201#R English key
f A02B–0166–C203#R English key, In–line connection type
f A02B–0166–C201#S Symbol key

om
f A02B–0166–C203#S Symbol key, In–line connection type
Separate type MDI unit f A02B–0166–C010 English key
f A02B–0166–C210#R English key
f A02B–0166–C213#R English key, In–line connection type
f A02B–0166–C210#S Symbol key

r.c
f A02B–0166–C213#S Symbol key, In–line connection type
Picture display CRT/MDI unit ∆ A02B–0166–C221#R English key For 32 screen
∆ A02B–0166–C221#S Symbol key For 32 screen
∆ A02B–0166–C222#R English key For 64 screen

e
∆ A02B–0166–C222#S Symbol key For 64 screen
Picture display separate type MDI ∆ A02B–0166–C231#R English key For 32 screen
unitit
∆
∆
∆
ntA02B–0166–C231#S
A02B–0166–C232#R
A02B–0166–C232#S
Symbol key For 32 screen
English key For 64 screen
Symbol key For 64 screen
ce
Separate type CRT unit f A02B–0120–C111
Separate type PDP unit f A02B–0120–C113 200V AC input
f A02B–0200–C100 24V DC input
Separate type LCD unit f A02B–0166–C251
nc

Detachable LCD/MDI unit f A02B–0166–C271#R English key

f A02B–0166–C271#S Symbol key
DPL/MDI unit f f A02B–0168–K010 Table mount/FANUC English key
f f A02B–0168–K011 Wall mount/FANUC English key
.c

f f A02B–0168–K012 Table mount/GE Fanuc English key

f f A02B–0168–K013 Wall mount/GE Fanuc English key
Long distance type DPL/MDI unit f f A02B–0118–C030 Table mount/FANUC English key
w

f f A02B–0118–C031 Wall mount/FANUC English key

f f A02B–0118–C032 Table mount/GE Fanuc English key
f f A02B–0118–C033 Wall mount/GE Fanuc English key
w

Dust protected type DPL/MDI unit f f A02B–0118–C130#R English key

Table mount/FANUC
f f A02B–0118–C130#S Symbol key
f f A02B–0118–C131#R English key
w

Wall mount/FANUC
f f A02B–0118–C131#S Symbol key
f f A02B–0118–C132#R English key
Table mount/GE Fanuc
f f A02B–0118–C132#S Symbol key
f f A02B–0118–C133#R English key
Wall mount/GE Fanuc
f f A02B–0118–C133#S Symbol key
Position display unit f A02B–0118–C020
DPL/MDI switch circuit f f A16B–2600–0080
CRT link terminal unit f A02B–0124–D001 For CRT, PDP, LCD
CRT link intermediate unit f A02B–0124–D002

114
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

Name D F Specifications Remarks

Handy operator’s panel ∆ A02B–0211–C020#R English key
∆ A02B–0211–C020#S Symbol key
Touch panel end terminal unit ∆ A02B–0166–D003 For touch panel and handy operator’s panel
HSSB adaptor ∆ A02B–0211–C220
I/O link–II terminal board f f A08B–0048–C331

NOTE
∆ indicates a unit that can be used with the
A02B–0166–B501, –B502, and –B531 in the Power

om
Mate–D.

2.5.5

r.c
CRT/MDI, DPL/MDI
Printed Board
Name D F Specifications Remarks

e
CRT Control printed board f A20B–2000–0840
f A20B–2000–0841 In–line connection type

DPL/MDI printed board

∆
∆
f
nt f
A20B–2100–0061
A20B–2100–0060
A20B–8000–0141
For picture display 32 screen
For picture display 64 screen
ce
Long distance type DPL/MDI for f f A20B–8000–0490
printed board
Dust protected DPL/MDI P.C.B f f A20B–8001–0310
DPL/MDI switch board f f A16B–2600–0080
Handy operator’s panel ∆ A20B–2002–0200
nc

HSSB adaptor ∆ A20B–8001–0510

Position display unit f A20B–1004–0360
A20B–1004–0370
.c

NOTE
∆ indicates a printed–circuit board that can be used with the
A02B–0166–B501, –B502, and –B531 in the Power
w

Mate–D.
w
w

115
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.6
HOW TO REPLACE WARNING
THE BATTERIES 1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the
power to the machine (CNC) switched on, and hold the
machine at an emergency stop. Because this work must be
carried out while the power is kept switched on and the
cabinet is open, only the personnel who have been trained
for safety are allowed to engage in the work. When

om
replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

r.c
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the
power to the machine (CNC) switched on, and hold the
machine at an emergency stop. Because this work must be
carried out while the power is kept switched on and the

e
cabinet is open, only the personnel who have been trained
for safety are allowed to engage in the work. When
nt
replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
ce
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.
nc
.c
w
w
w

116
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.6.1
Replace the Battery
for Memory Back Up

Procedure for replacing the battery for memory back up.

1 Lithium battery (Order number is *A02B–0118–K111) is required.
2 Replace battery in the status that Power Mate power supply is ON.

om
3 The battery used for memory back up is located in the front door.
4 Open the door of controller and remove the battery from folder.
5 Pinch and remove the connector in the side of battery towards you.
6 Connect the connector of new battery to the connector.

r.c
7 Mount a battery to folder and close the cover in side of cable.

CAUTION
Ensure that the power to the CNC is turned on before
attempting to replace the battery. Replacing the battery

e
while the power is turned off will result in the loss of stored
data such as programs and parameters.
nt
ce
Control unit front panel

ÂÂ
nc

Battery
.c

Battry (ordering infomation : A02B–0118 K111)

w

BATTERY
w

Connector on the cable

w

Connector on the
printed circuit
board

Battery

Control unit

117
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.6.2 Prepare lithium battery A06B–6073–K001(*) in advance.

Replacing Batteries for
(*) FANUC specification: A98L–0001–0902
Absolute Pulse Coder
(α Series Servo
Amplifier/Built–in Type
Battery)
Procedure for replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder

om
Procedure 1 Turn machine (NC) power ON.
2 Remove the battery case on the front panel of α series Servo Amp
Module (SVM).
The battery case can be removed by holding the top of the case and

r.c
pulling the case towards you.

Battery case
Connector CX5X Connector

e
CX5X
nt
ce
α series
SVM
Battery
compartment
nc

Battery
A06B–6073–K001

3 Remove the connector the battery.

.c

4 Replace the battery, and connect the connector.

5 Attach the battery case.
w

6 Turn machine (NC) power OFF.

CAUTION
w

1 Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when NC

power is ON.
Replacing the batteries with power OFF causes the
w

absolute position stored in memory to be lost.

2 If your machine is equipped with a separate battery case,
follow the instructions in 2.6.4

118
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.6.3 Prepare lithium battery A02B–0168–K111(*) in advance.

Replacing Batteries for
Absolute Pulse Coder
(*) FANUC specification: A98L–0031–0011
(β Series Servo Amp
Module/Built–in Type
Battery)

om
Procedure for replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder

Procedure 1 Turn machine (NC) power ON.

2 Remove the battery case from under the β series servo amplifier

r.c
module by holding the case at both sides and pulling downwards.

e
nt
ce
6V litium battery for
absolute pulse coder
A98L–0031–0011

Battery cover
nc

A230–0533–X003
.c
w

3 Remove the connector the battery.

4 Replace the battery, and connect the connector.
w

5 Attach the battery case.

6 Turn machine (NC) power OFF.
w

CAUTION
1 Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when NC
power is ON.
Replacing the batteries with power OFF causes the
absolute position stored in memory to be lost.
2 If your machine is equipped with a separate battery case,
follow the instructions in 2.6.4

119
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.6.4 Prepare 4 alkaline batteries (UM–1type) commercially available in

Replacing Batteries for advance.
Absolute Battery
Procedure for replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder

Procedure 1 Turn machine (NC) power ON.

2 Loosen screws on the battery case to remove the cover. For placement

om
of the battery case, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
3 Replace the batteries in the case. Insert 2 batteries each in the opposite
direction as illustrated below.

r.c
Screw

Ç
Ç
e
Ç Cover
nt Ç
ce
4 After replacement, install the cover.
nc

5 Turn machine (NC) power OFF

CAUTION
Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when NC
.c

power is ON.
Replacing the batteries with power OFF causes the
absolute position stored in memory to be lost.
w
w
w

120
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.7
HOW TO REPLACE
THE MODULES

2.7.1 1 Check that the power supply is not off.

Removing 2 Pull the latches of the module socket outwards. (Fig.(a))
3 Pull out the module upward. (Fig.(b))

om
2.7.2 1 Check that the power supply is off.
Insertion 2 Insert the new module board diagonally with B–SIDE outward
(Fig.(b))
3 While pushing on the upper edge of the module board, raise it until
it is locked (Fig.(c)).

e r.c
nt (a)
ce
No.1 pin
nc

(b)
.c
w
w

(c)

CAUTION
w

1 Replacing the memory module results in the loss of stored

data such as programs, parameters, and ladder. Before
attempting to replace the memory module, therefore, make
a backup copy of the stored data.
2 Make sure that the latches at both ends of the socket are
correctly engaged with the module. If either latch is not
engaged securely, it will not be possible to establish a
satisfactory electrical contact, possibly leading to a
malfunction of the NC unit.

121
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.8
REPLACING
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD AND UNIT

2.8.1 1 Make sure that the power supply unit is turned off.
The Base Printed 2 Disconnect all cables connected to the printed circuit board in the
control unit. Pinch the 20–pin half–pitch connector to release the
Circuit Boards latch. Draw out the connector.

om
3 Remove the control unit from the wall.
4 Place the control unit with its left face upward, and press the two
points shown in Fig. 2.8.1 (a) to remove the cover of the case.
5 Remove the battery.

r.c
6 Release the three latches shown in Fig. 2.8.1 (b), and remove the PC
board.
7 Mount a new base PC board by following the steps above in reverse
order.

e
8 Reconnect the cables to their original positions.

ntCAUTION
Replacing the base printed circuit board results in the loss
of stored data such as programs and parameters. Before
attempting to replace the memory module, therefore, make
ce
a backup copy of the stored data.
nc
.c
w
w
w

122
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

How to remove the plastic cover at the left side of the case How to remove the base printed circuit board
D Pull the cover in the direction of arrows as shown D Remove the 3 V dry cell for backing up the RAM
below while holding down two portions marked with battery.
PUSH. D There are three claws which hold the base printed
D When mounting the cover, insert the cover in the circuit board. While moving one at a time to the left (in
direction opposite to that of the arrows while holding the direction of arrows shown below) in the order of
down the two portions marked with PUSH. (1), (2), and (3), pull the left side of the board to release
the hold. When releasing the claws, be careful not to
bend the pins of components on modules adjacent to
the base printed–circuit board.
D Move the board to the left to remove it from the case.

om
(3)

F1
Power supply printed
circuit board

r.c
CP1

e
(2)

Base printed circuit

nt board
ce
(1)
nc

(Left side view) (Left side view)

.c

Fig. 2.8.1 (a) Fig. 2.8.1 (b)

w

2.8.2
The Power Supply 1 Make sure that the power supply unit is turned off.
w

Printed Circuit Boards 2 As in 2.8.1 above, remove the base PC board.

and Sub Printed Board 3 Remove the screws from the base PC board or sub printed board that
w

are securing the power PC board, and replace the power PC board.
4 Put the base PC board in the case, and return it to the original position.
5 Reconnect the cables to their original positions.

123
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.8.3
The Fan motor 1 Remove the power PC board as in 2.8.2 above.
2 Remove the two screws from the fan motor on the power PC board,
and replace the fan motor with a new one.
3 Mount the power PC board on the base PC board as in 2.8.2 above,
and return the base PC board to the case.
4 Reconnect the cables.

om
2.8.4
The CRT Control 1 Turn off the power to the CRT/MDI, separated type CRT/MDI unit
Printed Circuit Board and controller.
2 The CRT control PCB is located behind the MDI.

r.c
Remove all cables connected to the PCB.
3 Remove the square screws from the CRT control board, and replace
the PCB.
4 Reconnect the cables.

e
CAUTION
nt When the picture display CRT/MDI unit or separate picture
display MDI unit is being used, reload the picture screen
data.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

124
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.8.5
The MDI Keyboard 1 The CRT control board that is behind the MDI keyboard can be seen
from the rear of the CRT/MDI unit and separate type MDI unit.
Remove the CRT control board as in 2.8.4 above.
2 Remove the two connectors from the back of the keyboard.
3 Remove the four studs from the back of the keyboard.
4 Since the MDI keyboard has no setscrews, the keyboard can be
removed at this point.

om
5 Mount a new keyboard, and secure it with four studs.
6 Reconnect the two cables of the CRT control board.

e r.c
nt
ce
Screw
CRT/MDI control board
Stud
MDI keyboard
nc

2.8.6
.c

The CRT Display 1 Check that the power supply is off.

2 Disconnect the CRT unit power cable and the video signal cable.
w

3 Remove the chloridized veneer cover and the four screws from the
front of the CRT unit.
4 Install the new CRT unit.
w

5 Reconnect the CRT power supply cable and video signal cable to their
original positions.
w

9” monochrome CRT

Fig.2.8.6 Replacing the CRT Display

125
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.9 It is necessary to regulary clean the heat transformer, because the heat
transformation ability will be reduced by the accumulation of dust. The
MAINTENANCE OF frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation
HEAT PIPE TYPE environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment
HEAT EXCHANGER accordint to the degree of dirt.
Air filter cleaning and
replacement
WARNING
The heat pipe–based heat exchanger section is applied
with a high voltage.

om
When maintaining the heat pipe–based heat exchanger,
keep the power to the machine (CNC) switched off.
When replacing the heat pipe–based heat exchanger with
the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage
circuit section (marked and shielded with a shock
hazard prevention cover).

r.c
If you touch the high–voltage circuit section when it is
uncovered, you will get an electric shock.

e
Air filter cleaning and replacement method
nt
1 When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fan’s
electric power source.
ce
2 Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.

Detach the cover by pressing, the flanges

which are in the grooves of both sides
towards the inside by minus screwdriver, etc.
nc
.c

3 Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both sides.
w
w
w

4 When dirt is conspicuous, press wash with a neutral detergent, rinse

with fresh water, and the washing, allow to dry naturally. When
replacing with the same product.
5 Insert the filter in the cover, align the flange in the groove, and install
by pressing. Confirm that the cover will not come loose even if it is
pulled.

126
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

Cleaning heat exchanger

Cleaning heat exchanger

1 When cleaning, be sure to cut off the fan power source.

2 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.

Heat exchanger main unit

om
Power cable for fan
(detach the connector)

External fan unit

e r.c
nt Installation screws B (1) Installation screws A (2)
Earth cable (if the installation screw on the fan
side is detached, it can be taken out)
ce
Detach the two installation screws (A) of the external fan unit, and detach the unit
from the main unit by sliding it down. Detach the power source cable to the fan and
the earth cable. Also detach installation screws (B).

D Cleaning fan unit

nc

Method of cleaning fan unit

.c

1 Wipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fan
motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth, etc. When the
condensation, etc. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult to remove,
w

soak a cloth in neutral detergent, lightry sqeeze it and wipe away the
dirt.
w

However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical
sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.
w

127
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

D Cleaning heat exchanger

fan
Method of cleaning heat exchanger fan

1 Detach the heat exchanger format the unit and either blow off with air,
wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt, condensation,
etc.

When the dirt is especially severe

om
1 Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cable from the
main unit.

r.c
Main unit

Terminal unit and cable

e
nt
ce
nc

2 Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fan
section by brushing. At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the
element.
.c

3 After cleaning, dry well.

D Installation
w

Method of installation after cleaning

w

After completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer.

1 Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position.
w

2 Install the fan unit in the original position. At this time, do not forget
to connect the fan power cable and the earth cable.

128
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.10
REPLACING THE
FUSE WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the
cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel
who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety
are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse
with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the

om
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.

r.c
2.10.1 This section describes the replacement of the Power Mate controller fuse.
The Power Mate The controller contains a +24 V power input fuse, F1. If LED EN does not light
Controller Fuse when +24 V power is supplied, fuse F1 may have blown. In such a case, remove

e
the fuse from its socket, then check its continuity using a multimeter (or visually
check whether it has blown). If the fuse has blown, investigate the cause, take
nt
appropriate action, then replace the fuse. The capacity, part number, and
location of the fuse are as follows:
ce
 2.10.1 Capacity and part number of Power Mate controller fuse

Name Capacity Part number

F1 5.0A A60L-0001-0046#5.0R or
nc

A60L-0001-0046#5.0
.c

Fuse F1
w
w

Power supply
connector
w

EN

Fig.2.10.1 Location of Power Mate controller fuse

129
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.10.2 This section describes the replacement of the CRT/MDI controller PCB
The CRT/MDI Control fuse of the Power Mate–D. The table below lists the drawing number of
the CRT/MDI control PCB. The CRT/MDI control PCB is mounted on
PCB Fuse the back of the CRT/MDI unit or separate MDI unit.

 2.10.2(a) CRT/MDI control PCB drawing number

Name Drawing number

CRT/MDI control PCB A20B-2000-0840
A20B-2000-0841

om
A20B-2100-0061
A20B-2100-0060

The CRT/MDI control PCB contains a +24 V power input fuse, FU1. If
nothing appears on the screen when +24 V power is supplied to the

r.c
CRT/MDI control PCB, fuse FU1 may have blown. In such a case,
remove the fuse from its socket, then check its continuity using a
multimeter (or visually check whether it has blown). If the fuse has
blown, investigate the cause, take appropriate action, then replace the
fuse. The capacity, part number, and location of the fuse are as follows:

e
 2.10.2(b) Capacity and part number of CRT/MDI control PCB fuse
nt Name
FU1
Capacity
3.2A
Part number
A60L-0001-0175#3.2A
ce
nc
.c
w

Fuse FU1 (3.2 A)

w

Fig.2.10.2(a) Location of CRT/MDI fuse

w

130
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

om
Fuse FU1 (3.2 A)

r.c
Fig.2.10.2(b) Location of separate MDI unit fuse

e
2.10.3 This section describes the replacement of the Power Mate–D external I/O
The I/O Card Fuses card fuses. The table below lists the names and drawing numbers of the
nt
I/O cards.

 2.10.3(a) I/O card drawing numbers

ce
Name Drawing number
I/O card A DI: 48 points, DO: 32 points A16B-2201–0071
I/O card B DI: 96 points, DO: 64 points A16B-2201–0070
nc

I/O card D DI: 48 points, DO: 32 points A16B-2202–0733

I/O card E DI: 96 points, DO: 64 points A16B-2202–0732

The I/O card contains a +24 V power input fuse, FU1, and +5 V power
output fuse, FU2. If +5 V is not output, fuse FU1 or FU2 may have blown.
.c

In such a case, remove the fuses from their sockets, then check their
continuity using a multimeter (or visually check whether they have
blown). If a fuse has blown, investigate the cause, take appropriate action,
w

then replace the fuse. The capacity, part number, and location of the fuses
are as follows:
w

 2.10.3(b) Capacity and part number of I/O card fuses

Name Capacity Ordering specification

w

FU1 3.2A A60L-0001-0175#3.2A

FU2 5.0A A60L-0001-0290#LM50

131
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

Fuse FU1

Fuse FU2

om
Fig.2.10.3 Location of I/O card fuses

r.c
2.10.4 Each of the following modules contains a fuse. If the fuse has blown,
The I/O Unit–MODEL A eliminate the cause, then replace the fuse.
Fuses Module
Indication of Ca-
Part number

e
blown fuse pacity
Interface module AIF01A PWR does not 3.2A A60L-0001-0290#LM32
nt
Interface module AIF01B

Output module (DC, 8 points)

light.
PWR does not
light.
F lights.
3.2A

5A
A60L-0001-0290#LM32

A60L-0001-0260#5R00
ce
OD08C
Output module (DC, 8 points) F lights. 5A A60L-0001-0260#5R00
OD08D
Output module (AC, 5 points) F lights. 3.15A A60L-0001-0276#3.15
nc

AOA05E
Output module (AC, 8 points) F lights. 3.15A A60L-0001-0276#3.15
AOA08E
Output module (AC, 12 points) F lights. 3.15A A60L-0001-0276#3.15
AOA12F
.c

The fuse is mounted on the internal PCB of each module. For details, refer
to the I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual.
w
w
w

132
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.10.5 This section describes the replacement of the DPL/MDI switcher fuses of
Replacing the DPL/MDI the Power Mate. The table below lists the drawing number of the
DPL/MDI switcher.
Switcher Fuses
 2.10.5(a) Drawing number of DPL/MDI switcher

Name Drawing number

DPL/MDI switcher A16B-2600-0080

The DPL/MDI switcher contains a +24 V power input fuse, F2, and +5

om
V power output fuse, F1. If the +5 V pilot lamp (green LED) does not light
when +24 V power is supplied to the DPL/MDI switcher, fuse F1 or F2
may have blown. In such a case, remove the fuses from their sockets,
check their continuity using a multimeter (or visually check whether they
have blown). If a fuse has blown, investigate the cause, take appropriate

r.c
action, then replace the fuse. The capacity, part number, and location of
the fuses are as follows:

 2.10.5(b) Capacity and part number of the DPL/MDI switcher fuses

e
Name Capacity Ordering specification
F1 2.0A A60L-0001-0175#2.0A
nt F2 2.0A A60L-0001-0175#2.0A
ce
Fuse F1 (2 A)
nc

Fuse F2 (2 A)
.c
w
w

Fig.2.10.5 Location of DPL/MDI switcher fuses

w

133
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.10.6 This section describes the location and replacement of the LCD fuse.
Replacing the LCD
WARNING
Fuse Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the
cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel
who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety
are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse
with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the

om
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.

D Location of the LCD fuse

e r.c
Fuse FS1

nt LCD Unit (Rear view)

ce
D Replacing the fuse (1) If the fuse blows, first find and eliminate the cause. Then, replace the
fuse.
nc

(2) Pull the old fuse up.

(3) Push a new fuse into the fuse holder.

D Ordering information
.c

Ordering code : A02B–0200–K104*

Rating : 1.0 A
w

*In–house code: A60L–0001–0290#LM10

w
w

134
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

2.11 Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with
plasma displays. This adjustment is necessary to compensate for errors
ADJUSTING THE resulting from the combination of NC devices and cables.Adjustment of
PLASMA DISPLAY the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the display unit, cable,
or a hardware component of the display circuit in the NC, either as part
of regular field maintenance or the correct a failure.

Locations of switches
and jumper pins

om
SW1 TM1

r.c
Plasma display (real view)

Adjustment

e
D Eliminating flicker Switch TM1
nt
If flicker occures, change the TM1 setting to another setting.
Normally one of these settings will eliminate flicker.
ce
D Adjusting the horizontal Switch SW2
position
(1) The screen can be shifted horizontally in units of dots.
(2) Adjust the horizontal position such that the entire screen is visible.
Only one setting can successfully realize this positioning.
nc

CAUTION
1 Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than
those described above.
.c

If any controls or settings other than those described above

are changed, the appearance of the display will be
abnormal.
w

2 The plasma display unit cannot be switched between the

Power Mate and other NC units, because its cable length
requires careful adjustment.
w
w

135
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.12 The 7.2–inch monochrome LCD is provided with a contrast adjustment

potentiometer and video signal adjustment switches.
7.2–INCH The contrast is adjusted when the LCD adapter or panel is replaced.
MONOCHROME LCD Otherwise, it should not be necessary to use the adjustment switches.
ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment points

om
VR1

r.c
VRP1
SW1

e
nt 7.2–inch monochrome LCD (rear view)
ce
Adjustment procedure
(1) Contrast adjustment
Potentiometer VRP1
nc

This adjustment is made to compensate for variations between,

individual LCD adapters and LCD panels. When an LCD adapter or
panel is replaced, the following adjustment must be made. If the
entire LCD unit is replaced, however, no adjustment is needed.
.c

(a) First, adjust potentiometer VRP1 until the displayed characters

(all black areas) appear white.
(b) Rotate the potentiometer in the opposite direction until the
w

characters appear clear and black.

(2) Flicker adjustment
w

Potentiometer VR1
This potentiometer is factory–set and normally need not be adjusted
by the user. If the setting is changed by mistake, re–adjust it
w

according to the following procedure. Note that some versions of this

printed–circuit board do not have this potentiometer; adjustment is
performed automatically.
(a) Using the check pins, observe HS and CLK on an oscilloscope.
(b) Over part of the range of potentiometer VR1, the positive–going
edge of HS will be almost in phase with the positive–going edge
of the CLK. Rotating the potentiometer a little does not change
the phase difference. Set the potentiometer to the midpoint of this
range.
(c) After completing the adjustment, confirm that the display does
not flicker.

136
B–62835EN/01 2. HARDWARE

HS

CLK

om
(3) Horizontal position adjustment
Switch SW1
This switch is factory–set and normally need not be adjusted by the
user. If the setting is changed by mistake, re–adjust it according to
the following procedure.

r.c
(a) Switch SW1 is used to move the display horizontally in units of
dots.
(b) Set the switch to the point between 8 and B where the entire
display is visible.

e
(c) The default setting is 9.

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

137
2. HARDWARE B–62835EN/01

2.13 The LCD backlight must be replaced periodically. Replace the unit in
which the LCD backlight is mounted.
REPLACING THE The LCD backlight has a life of about 10,000 hours (54 hours guaranteed).
LCD BACKLIGHT (During its lifetime, the backlight should maintain a brightness exceeding
50% of that when new.)
Upon reaching the end of its service life, the LCD backlight unit must be
replaced. The unit can be replaced either by the user or by a FANUC
service engineer.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

138
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

Data must be re–set if the base printed–circuit board is replaced or the

memory module is replaced (or removed then mounted again).
This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters,

om
the part programs and the tool offset values.

3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR

INPUT/OUTPUT
3.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA

r.c
With the Power Mate–F, the CRT/MDI cannot be used for parameter
setting or data input/output.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

139
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

3.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS
FOR INPUT/OUTPUT

D Setting procedure of 1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.

parameters (CRT/MDI)
2. Press key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display
SETTING (HANDY) screen.

om
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press and
keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.
4. Press key several times to display the following screen.

r.c
PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234N12345
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

e
0012 MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
nt Y 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL
0 0 0 0 0 0
ce
ZRN **** *** *** 00:00:00
nc

[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]

To make the cursor display in bit unit,
press the cursor key or .
.c

5. Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is

displayed.
1) Soft key [NO. SRH] : Searched by number.
w

Examination) Parameter number → [NO. SRH].

2) Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1
(bit parameter)
w

3) Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0

(bit parameter)
4) Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor
w

(word type)
5) Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at cursor
(word type)
6) Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher
interface.
7) Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher
interface.
6. After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on
the SETTING screen to 0. Press RESET to release alram 100.

140
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

7. Convenient method
1) To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or ,then
the cursor becomes bit length and you can set parameters bit by bit
(Bit parameter only).
2) To set data consecutively, use EOB key.

(Ex.1)

om
0 1234
0 ⇒ 4567
0 9999
0 0

r.c
(Ex.2)
0 1234
0 ⇒ 0

e
0 9999
0 0
nt
3) 3 To set the same data use

(Ex.)
.
ce
0 1234
0⇒ 1234
0 1234
0 0
nc

4) 4 For bit parameters,

(Ex.)
0000 0000 00011000
00000000 ⇒ 00011000
.c

00000000 0001 1000

00000000 00000000
w

8. After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to

0.
w
w

141
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

D Setting parameters 1. Set MDI mode or emergency stop.

procedare (DPL/MDI)
2. Press the key to display the settings screen.

3. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at PWE, then press the
key and the key, in that order, to enable parameters to be written.
The Power Mate will generate P/S alarm 100.
4. Press the key several time to display the parameter screen.

om
> &0001 00000000
&0002 00000000

5. Move the cursor to the number of the parameter to change.

Method 1
Use the cursor keys. The cursor will continue to move while a cursor

r.c
key is being pressed.
Method 2
Press the following keys and enter data in the order shown :
[(parameter No.)]

e
6. Enter a parameter value with the data input keys.
nt
7. Press the key. The parameter value is input and displayed.
8. After all parameters have been set and confirmed, retum to the settings
screen and set PWE to 0.
ce
9. Normally, in order to release the alarm state, press the key.
However, in order to release alarm No. 000, the power needs to be
turned off and then on again.
nc
.c
w
w
w

142
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.2 Power Mate memorized the following data.

Outputting the newest data I/O device while the CNC is rurnning
INPUTTING/ normally
OUTPUTTING DATA (1) CNC paramter
(2) PMC parameter
(3) Custom macro variable values
(4) Tool compensation amount (offset data)
(5) Part program (Machining program, custom macro program)
(6) Ladder program

om
(7) Pitch error compensation value

3.2.1 Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.

Confirming the Parameters required for output are as follows :

r.c
(To change parameters, set MDI mode or emergency stop status)
Parameters Required
for Data input/Output Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO

e
#1 (ISO) 0 : Output with EIA code
1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
nt
Address
0020 Selection of I/O channel
ce
0 : Channel 1 (JD5 of connector)
1 : Channel 1 (JD5 of connector)
1) I/O channel=0
Both I/O CHANNEL = 0 and I/O CHANNEL = 1 indicate channel
nc

1. Separate parameters are, however, provided for each I/O

CHANNEL, for setting the baud rate, stop bit, etc.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c

0101 NFD ASI SB2

#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when data is output.

1 : Feed is not output when data is output.
w

#3 (ASI)l0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input data.

1 : ASCII code is used.
#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
w

l1 : No. of stop bits is 2.

(l : Standard setting)
Address
w

0102 pecification number of input/output device

0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 used)

1 Not used
2 FANUC Floppy cassette adapter F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate. FANUC Handy File ,FANUC Floppy
cassette adapter, FSP–H
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 FSP–G, FSP–H

143
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

Address
0103 Baud Rate

7: 600 9: 2400 11:9600

8: 1200 l10: 4800 12:19200 [BPS]
2) I/O cahnnel=1
Set parameters to 0111, 0112, 0113.
Seeting contens are same as 0101, 0102, 0103.

om
3.2.2
Outputting CNC
Parameters
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.

r.c
2. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] ,and soft key .

e
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are started
to be output.

D Procedure (DPL/MDI)
nt
1. Select EDIT mode.
2. Select the parameter display screen by key.
ce
3. Press the key.
4. Execute file heading when required.
For which file the parameter is output to refer to item Explanations
nc

(Output to a floppy).
5. While parameter, is being output, the display appears as below.
>#0100
.c

WRITE

6. In order to stop output of data from a tape before it has finished, turn
on external reset signal ERS (bit 7 of G008).
w

Once data output from a tape has been stopped, it cannot be restarted.
w

Explanations
(Output to a floppy)
D File output location When output is conducted to the floppy, the program is output as the new
w

file after the files existing in the floppy. New files are to be written from
the beginning with making the old files invalid, use the above output
operation after the N0 head searching.
D An alarm while a When P/S alarm (No.086) occurs during program output, the floppy is
program is output restored to the condition before the output.
D Outputting a program When program output is conducted after N1 to N9999 head searching, the
after file heading new file is output as the designated n–th position. In this case, 1 to n–1
files are effective, but the files after the old n–th one are deleted. If an
alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n–1 files are restored.

144
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

D Efficient use of memory To efficiently use the memory in the cassette or card, output the program
by setting parameter NFD (No.0101#7 or, No.0111#7) to 1. This
parameter makes the feed is not output, utilizing the memory efficiently.
D On the memo record Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from the
CNC to the floppy is again input to the CNC memory or compared with
the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, immediately after a file is
output from the CNC to the floppy, record the file No. on the memo.

3.2.3

om
Outputting PMC
Parameters
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.

r.c
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen.

3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input and . At

this time, alarm 100 will be generated.

e
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].

nt
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.
× × × × × × ×
ce
Where, mark x is a former value

Thus, data input/output screen

has been selected.
nc

7. Press soft key then key .

8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O.
Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item
is set.
.c

9. In CHANNEL NO item, input to select I/O channel 1.

10.In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette.
w

It is also [FDCAS] for Handy File.

11.In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM].
w

12.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE].

13.Press soft key [EXEC]. Then PMC parameters are started to be output.
14.After the PMC parameters have been output, set PARAMETER
w

WRITE to 0.
15.Press RESET to release alarm 100.

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.

2. Press key several time then select a setting screen.

3. Set the cursor to PWE and input and . At this time, alarm 100
will be generated.

145
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

4. Press key several time to select diagnosis screen.

5. Press and key.

6. Set the first bit to 1.
× × × × × × ×
Where, mark x is a former value

7. Display the PMC parameter press key then set file number.

om
8. Press . Then PMC parameters are started to be output.
9. After the PMC parameters have been output, set PWE to 0.
10.Reset Power Mate to release alarm 100.

r.c
3.2.4
Outputting Custom
Macro Variable Values

e
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.
2. Press OFFSET
key.
nt
3. Press
SETTING

key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro

variable screen.
ce
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key .
5. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro variable
values are output.
nc

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.

2. Select the tool offset data display screen by pressing key.
.c

3. Press the key.

4. While common variable is being output, the display appears as below.
w

>#0100
WRITE
w

5. In order to stop output of data from a tape before it has finished, turn
on external reset signal ERS (bit 7 of G008).
Once data output from a tape has been stopped, it cannot be restarted.
w

3.2.5
Outputting Tool
Compensation Amount
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.

146
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .

4. Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensation
amount is started to be output.

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.

2. Select the offset data display screen by pressing key.

3. Press the key.

om
4. While offset, is being output, the display appears as below.
>#0100
WRITE

5. In order to stop output of data from a tape before it has finished, turn
on external reset signal ERS (bit 7 of G008).

r.c
Once data output from a tape has been stopped, it cannot be restarted.

3.2.6

e
Outputting Part
Program
D Procedure (CRT/MDI)
nt
1. Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set to the EDIT mode
and set it to 0.
ce
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8

#4(NE9)l0 : Programs of 9000s are edited.

nc

1 : Programs of 9000s can be protected.

#0(NE8)l0 : Programs of 8000s are edited.
1 : Programs of 8000s can be protected.
.c

2. Select EDIT mode.

3. Press key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program text.
w

4. Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key .

5. Input a program number to be output. To output all programs input as:
w

O – 9 9 9 9
6. Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.
w

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) A program registered in memmory can be punched using the procedure
below.
1. Confirm parameter as like above 1.
2. Select EDIT mode.
3. Press to display the program screen.

4. Key in address .

147
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

5. Key in a desired program number.

Entering causes all programs in memory to
be output.
6. The number of input program is punched with pushing .

3.2.7
Outputting Ladder

om
Programs
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen.

r.c
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input and . At
this time, alarm 100 will be generated.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].

e
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.
nt× × × × × × ×
Where, mark x is a former value
ce
Thus, data input/output screen
has been selected.
7. Press soft key then key .
nc

8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O.

Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item
is set.
9. In CHANNEL NO item, input to select I/O channel 1.
.c

10.In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette.
It is also [FDCAS] for Handy File.
w

11.In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM].

12.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE].
w

13.Press soft key [EXEC]. Then ladder programs are started to be output.
14.After the ladder programs have been output, set PARAMETER
WRITE to 0.
w

15.Press RESET to release alarm 100.

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.

2. Press key several time to select diagnosis screen.

3. Press key in the diagnosis screen then set file number.

4. Press , then ladder programs are started to be output.

148
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.2.8
Outputting Pitch Error
Compensation Data
Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
2 Specify the punch code system (ISO or EIA) using a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.

4 Press function key .

om
SYSTEM

5 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) and press chapter
selection soft key [PITCH].
6 Press soft key [(OPRT)].

r.c
7 Press rightmost soft key (next–menu key).
8 Press soft keys [PUNCH] and [EXEC].
All parameters are output in the defined format.

e
Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Select the EDIT mode.

nt
2 Press the

3 Press the
key to display the pitch error compensation data screen.

key.
ce
4 When necessary, perform a file head search.

3.2.9
nc

Inputting CNC
CAUTION
Parameters
For a system using an absolute pulse coder, zero point
setting is required once all parameters have been input.
.c

D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Set to the emergency stop state.

w

2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.

1) Press key several times, and press [SETING] to display
w

SETTING screen.
2) Parameters can be rewritten when PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
w

is 1.
3) Press key to select the parameter screen.
4)
Address
0020 Selectionof I/O channel

l0 : Channel 1 (JD5 of connector)

1 : Channel 1 (JD5 of connector)
I/O channel=0 Set parameters 0101, 0102, 0103
I/O channel=1 Set parameters 0111, 0112, 0113.

149
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

5)
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2

#7(NFD) 0: Feed is output when punching out.

1 : Feed is not output when punching out.
#3(ASI) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used.
1 : ASCII code is used.
#0(SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
6)

om
Address
0102 Specification number of I/O device

0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.)

1 Not used

r.c
2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate, Handy File, FANUC Floppy casette
adapter, FSP–H
4 Not used

e
5 Not used
6 FSP–G, FSP–H
7)nt
Address
0103 Baud rate
ce
7: 600 9: 2400 11: 9600
8: 1200 l10: 4800 12: 19200 [BPS]
3. Press soft key
nc

4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are
started.
5. After the parameters have been input, turn off the power once then turn
it on because P/S alarm 000 is occured.
.c

6. For a system using an absolute pulse coder, alarm 300 is issued.

Perform zero point setting.
w

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side.
2. The parameter screen is selected by pressing the key.
w

3. Set PWE on the setting screen to 1. Alarm PS100 is displayed at this

time.
4. Perform the same operation as for program input.
w

5. NC parameters are input to the memory by this operation. Normally,

alarm PS000 will activate after completion of parameter reading.
Nomally, P/S alarm 000 is generated after parameters have finished
being read in.
6. Set PWE on the setting parameter to 0.
7. Turn on the Power Mate power again.
8. For a system using an absolute pulse coder, alarm 300 is issued.
Perform zero point setting.

150
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.2.10
Inputting PMC
Parameters
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Set the emergency stop state.
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING
screen.

om
3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.

r.c
× × × × × × 1 × INPUT .
× means the setting value which is before input.
7. Press key and key.

e
8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O.
Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set.
nt
9. In CHANNEL item , press 1 INPUT to select channel 1.
10.In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette.
ce
11.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data
12.Press soft key [EXEC] and the PMC parameters are started to be input.
13.After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.
nc

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Set the emergency stop state.

2. Press key several times and soft key to select the SETTING
screen.
.c

3. Confirm that PWE=1.

4. Press key several times and set diagnosis screen (@).
w

5. Press then set the file number.

w

6. Press and the PMC parameters are started to be input.

7. After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.
w

151
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

3.2.11
Inputting Custom
Macro Variable Values
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Confirm that EDIT mode is selected.
2. Turn off the program protect key (KEY2=1).
3. Press PROG key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.

4. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key .

om
5. Press address , a program number (0001 for example), soft key
[READ] and [EXEC] key, then custom macro variable values are
started to be input.
Input a program number that is not used.

r.c
6. Select AUTO mode on the machine operator’s panel and press cycle
start button.
When the program is executed, macro variables are set.
7. Press key, key and soft key [MACRO] to select the custom

e
OFFSET
SETTING

macro variable screen.

nt
8. Press and soft key [NO SRH] to display variable
number 500 and confirm the custom macro variables are set correctly.
Of the data displayed, 0 and vacant differ in meaning.
ce
Vacant is an undefined variable. To set vacant, press soft key
[INPUT].
9. Select EDIT mode again.
nc

10.Press PROG key to select the program display screen.

11.Press address and a program number (0001 for example) ,then

.c

press DELETE to delete the program.

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.
2. Perform the same operation as for program input and read in the
w

custom macro statements like a program.

3. After reading is finished, select AUTO mode. By executing the
w

program that was read in, the values of the common variables will be
stored in memory.
w

3.2.12
Inputting Tool
Compensation Amount
D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Select the EDIT mode.
2. Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).
3. Press PROG key, and press soft key[PRGRM] to display the program
contents screen.

152
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

4. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
6. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select the EDIT mode.

2. Display the data display screen by pressing key.

om
3. Perform the same operation as for program input.
4. The input offset data will be displayed on the screen after completion
of input operation.

r.c
3.2.13 Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set it to 0.
Inputting Part (Change it in Emergency stop or MDI mode).

e
Programs
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
nt
#6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area,
M02,M30 and M99 are:
ce
0 : regarded as the end of program.
l 1 : not regarded as the end of porgram.
#1 (RAL) When programs are registered:
l 0 : All programs are registered.
nc

1 : Only one program is registered.

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
.c

#4 (NE9)l0 :Programs of 9000s can be edited.

#4 (NE9)l1 :Programs of 9000s are protected.
w

#0 (NE8)l0 :Programs of 8000s can be edited.

#0 (NE8)l1 :Programs of 8000s are protected.
w

D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.

2. Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).
w

3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program
file.
4. Press soft key ,[(OPRT)] and key.
5. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode.

2. Press to display the program screen.

153
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62835EN/01

3. When the controller tape does not have a program number or a program
number is to be changed, enter a desired program number. (When the
controller tape has a program number and a program number is not
changed, this operation is not necessary.)
i) Key in address .
ii) Key in a desired program number.
4. Press the key.

om
3.2.14
Inputting PMC Ladder

D Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Set the emergency stop state.

r.c
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING
screen.
3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.

e
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].

nt
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.
× × × × × × 1 × INPUT .
ce
× means the setting value which is before input.
7. Press key and key.
8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O.
nc

Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set.
9. In CHANNEL item , press 1 INPUT to select channel 1.
.c

10.In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette.
11.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data. In DATA
KIND item, not set the data.
w

12.Press soft key [EXEC] and the PMC ladder are started to be input.
13.After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.
w

D Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Set the emergency stop state.

2. Press key several times and soft key to select the SETTING
w

screen.
3. Confirm that PWE=1.
4. Press key several times and set diagnosis screen (@).

5. Press then set the file number.

6. Press and the ladder programs are started to be input.

7. After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.

154
B–62835EN/01 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.2.15
Inputting Pitch Error
Compensation Data

Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1. Make sure the input device is ready for reading.
2. When using a floppy, search for the required file according to the
procedure.
3. Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s

om
panel.
4. Press function key OFFSET
SETTING .
5. Press the soft key [SETING] for chapter selection.
6. Enter 1 in response to the prompt for writing parameters (PWE).

r.c
Alarm P/S100 (indicating that parameters can be written) appears.
7. Press soft key SYSTEM .

e
8. Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key)and press chapter
selection soft key [PITCH].
nt
9. Press soft key [(OPRT)].
10.Press the rightmost soft key
11.Press soft keys [READ] and [EXEC].
(next–menu key).
ce
Parameters are read into memory. Upon completion of input, the
“INPUT” indicator at the lower–right corner of the screen disappears.
12.Press function key OFFSET
SETTING .
nc

13.Press soft key [SETING] for chapter selection.

14.Enter 0 in response to the prompt for writing parameters.
15.Turn the power to the NC back on.
.c

16.Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s

panel.
w

Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select the EDIT mode.

2. Press the key to display the pitch error compensation data screen.
w

3. Perform the same operation as for program input.

4. By performing this operation, pitch error compensation data is read
w

into memory.

155
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

4 INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

This chapter describes the signals between the machine operator’s panel,
magnetics cabinet and the PMC, connection of the signals between PMC
and Power Mate, and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals.

om
The chapter also describes how to display the PMC system configuration,
parameters, and ladders on the CRT or DPL.
Note that the CRT/MDI cannot be used with the Power Mate–F.
It also describes a method of inputting/outputting PMC parameters to an
external device.

r.c
4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE
4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC
4.3 OPERATION ON THE CRT/MDI

e
4.4 OPERATION ON THE DPL/MDI
4.5
nt LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE
4.6 ADDRESS LIST
4.7 SIGNAL AND SYMBOL CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

156
 4.1
B–62835EN/01

PMCDGN Input Contacts

w
HIgh–speed processing signal
*DEC
, *ESP,SKIP,ESKIP,SKZP2,SKZP3,SKZP4,*RILK
[0] ...0V Open
[1] ...24V Close
INTERFACE
GENERAL OF

w
PMCDGN PMCDGN *
NC PMC DI/DO MT (Machine Tool builder)
X0000 to
G0000 to 0255
w 0127
ST1 DOOR ST
G X RV ST1
X0.1 X0.0 G007.2 ST2
ST2
.c
0V
X5.7 +24E


STL STL 24V Power
supply
F0.5 Y0.1 Load
nc

157
F Y 
PMCDGN PMCDGN *
0V
ce
F0000 to 0255 Y0000 to
0127

PMCDGN Tr Input Load

PMC address
nt
[ 0 ]...........Off 0V Off
FANUC decides
addresses
Internal relay
Variable timer
R0.0 to R999.7
T0.0 to T079.7
e
MTB decides
addresses and
[ 1 ]...........On 24V On

and signals cor

respondence Counter C0.0 to C079.7 signals
Data table D0.0 to D1859.7
Message display A0.0 to A 024.7 *1) If Builtin I/O card is added : *2) When Power Mate–F is used :
K0.0 to K016.7 X1000.0 to X1003.7 X1000.0 to X1004.7 and
r.c
System reserve R9000.0 to R9099.7 Y1000.0 to Y1002.7 Y1000.0 to Y1003.7 only
area K17.0 to K19.7
om
4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

4.2
SPECIFICATION OF
PMC

4.2.1
Model PMC–RA3 PMC–RA1
Specification
Programming method language Ladder Ladder
Number of ladder level 2 2

om
Level–1 Cycle Time 8 ms 8 ms
Basic Instruction Execution Time 0.15 4.5
(µs/step) (µs/step)
Program capacity
S Ladder (step) Approx. 5,000 (Basic) Approx. 3,000
Approx. 12,000 (Option)

r.c
S Symbol/comment (Note) 1 to 128KB 1 to 128KB

e
S Message 0.1 to 64KB 0.1 to 64KB
S Language only – –
Instruction nt
Internal relay
(Basic)
(Function)
(R)
14 kinds
64 kinds
1118 byte
12 kinds
47 kinds
1110 byte
ce
Message request (A) 25 byte 25 byte
Non–volatile
S Var. Timer (T) 80 byte 80 byte
S Counter (C) 80 byte 80 byte
nc

S Keep relay (K) 20 byte 20 byte

S Data table (D) 1860 byte 1860 byte
Fixed timer Timer No. 100 Timer No. 100
devices specified devices specified
.c

Input/output
S I/O Link (I) 1024 points max. 1024 points max.
(master) (O) 1024 points max. 1024 points max.
S I/O Link (I) 256 points max. 256 points max.
w

(slave) (O) 256 points max. 256 points max.

S Built–in I/O card (I) 32 point max. 32 point max.
w

(O) 24 point max. 24 point max.

Sequence program storage media Back–up SRAM Back–up SRAM
w

NOTE
1 Normal size of a symbol, a comment, and a message are
1KB, and 0.1KB, respectively. Max. size of a symbol and a
comment are each 64KB.
2 In the case of the Power Mate–F, a ladder program can
contain a maximum of only about 5,000 steps. In addition,
the Power Mate–F is not provided with an I/O Link (master).
The built–in I/O card supports a maximum of 48 and 32 input
and output points, respectively.

158
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.2.2
Address Type Byte Address Explanation
G PMC⇒CNC 256 G000.0 to G255.7

F CNC⇒PMC 256 F000.0 to F255.7

Y PMC⇒MT 168 Y000.0 to Y127.7 FANUC I/O Link (master)

Y1000.0 to Y1002.7 Built–in I/O card<Power Mate–D>

Y1000.0 to Y1003.7 Built–in I/O card<Power Mate–F>

om
Y1020.0 to Y1051.7 FANUC I/O Link (slave)

X MT⇒PMC 167 X000.0 to X127.7 FANUC I/O Link (master)

X1000.0 to X1003.7 Built–in I/O card<Power Mate–D>

Y1000.0 to Y1004.7 Built–in I/O card<Power Mate–F>

r.c
X1020.0 to X1051.7 FANUC I/O Link (slave)

A Massege display 25 A000.0 to A024.7

R Internal relay 1100 R000.0 to R999.7

R9000.0 to R9117.7 Operation result, system re-

e
serve area

T Variable timer 80 T000.0 to T079.7

C
ntKeep relay

Counter
20

80
K000.0 to K016.7

K017.0 to K019.7

C000.0 to C079.7
System reserve area
ce
D Data table 1860 D0000.0 to D1859.7
nc

4.2.3
Built–in Debug Function Contents
Function Display of sequence pro- Dynamic display of ladder diagram
gram * This function is not provided by the Power
.c

Mate–F, handy operator’s panel, or DPL/MDI.

Diagnostic function STitle data display

S signal status (symbol can be displayed in the
w

CRT/MDI)
S PMC alarm display
w

Setting and displaying data S Timer

S Counter
S Keep relay
S Data table
w

Sequence program edit Ladder diagram editing

function (A ladder edit module for memory card is re-
quired)
* In the case of the Power Mate–F, ladder charts
are edited using mnemonics on the DPL/MDI.
* Ladder chart editing and mnemonic editing are
not supported by the handy operator’s panel.

159
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

4.2.4
System Reserve Area
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
of Internal Relay
R9000 V N Z Operation result
register

Zero
Sign is minus
Overflow

om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

R9002

R9003

r.c
Register for
remainder
R9004 (used by DIVB
instruction)
R9005

e
4.2.5
Execution Period of
nt
ce
PMC
Sequence program
1st level
From NC (High–speed sequence)
nc

(1)
END1
2nd level
(Normal sequence)
.c

(2)–1

Synchronized
w

buffer
(2)–2
w

Head of 2nd level

(2)–n
END2
w

From MT

8msec

Period
(1) (1) (1) (1)
1st level
(2)–1 (2)–2 (2)–n (2)–1
2nd level

160
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.3
OPERATION ON THE
CRT/MDI

4.3.1 1. Press SYSTEM .

Display Method
2. Press soft key [PMC], then PMC screen is displayed and the following
soft keys are displayed:

om
PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU MONIT RUN

SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS

PMCLAD : DYNAMIC LADDER DISPLAY

r.c
PMCDGN : DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
PMCPRM : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D)
RUN/STOP : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM When
EDIT : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM built–in
program-
I/O : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM
mer is run-

e
SYSPRM : SYSTEM PARAMETER ning.

nt PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM

ce
System parameter screen
Status display of PMC I/O signal
Dynamic display of sequence program

STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM

nc

System parameter screen

Input/output of sequence pro-
gram
.c

Editing sequence program

RUN/STOP of sequence

The no. of menus to be displayed changes depending on

w

presence/absence of built–in programmer.

PMC–PA3 PMC–PA3
w

(Without memory card for (With memory card for

editing) editing)

RUN/STOP f f
w

EDIT f

I/O f f

SYSPRM f

: Cannot be displayed nor used.

161
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

4.3.2 Press soft key [PMCLAD], and a sequence program is displayed

PMCLAD SCREEN dynamically and operation monitoring can be confirmed :

Number of net displayed

Ladder display RUN/STOP status

LADDER NET 0001–0004 MONIT RUN

Comment
LOG1 LOG1

om
ALWAYS1
LOG1

X008.4 *ESP
EMERGENCY
STOP

r.c
END1
PORD POR
POWER ON
RESET

e
TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH

nt
Other soft keys
F–SCRH ADRESS
Switched each
ce
time pressed
SYMBOL

D Contents displayed 1. Low brightness display Contacts : open Relay : off

2. High brightness display Contacts : closed Relay : on
nc

D Search method 1. Use the page keys and cursor keys to change display positions.
2. [TOP]:Searches top of ladder.
3. [BOTTOM]:Search bottom of ladder.
.c

4. Address.bit,[SRCH] or Signal name, [SRCH]

5. Address.bit,[W–SRCH] or Signal name ,[W–SRCH]
6. Net no.[N–SRCH]:Ladder is displayed from the specified net.
w

7. Functional instruction no. [F–SRCH] or Functional instruction

name[F–SRCH]
w

8. [ADRESS]:Signal is displayed by address and bit no.

9. [SYMBOL]:Signal is displayed by signal name (symbol).
(If symbol is not registered at program preparation time, the address
w

of the signal is displayed).

[Remarks]
D The search function searches a signal in the forward direction and
displays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. Because there
may exist plural contacts, repeat the search operation to find plural
locations, repeat the search operation to find plural locations with the
specified signal.
D If a specified signal is not found up to the end of the program (ladder),
execution returns to the head of a program and search continues.

162
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.3.3 Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMC’s diagnostic screen is displayed.
PMCDGN SCREEN

D TITLE screen The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.
Page number

PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN

om
PMC PROGRAM NO. :
EDITION NO. :
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : 4075 EDITION : 01

MEMORY USED : KB

r.c
LADDER : KB
SYMBOL : KB
MESSAGE : KB
SCAN TIME : MSEC

e
TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE
nt
Other soft keys

M.SRCH ANALYS

ÄÄÄ
ÄÄ
ce
ÄÄ
1st page PMC PROGRAM NO. : Set when PMC
EDITION NO. : is

ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ
prepared
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : EDITION : Series and edition of PMC
nc

ÄÄ
control software
MEMORY USED : KB

ÄÄ
LADDER : KB Memory used and
SYMBOL : KB execution time is

ÄÄ
MESSAGE : KB displayed.
SCAN TIME : MSEC
.c

2nd page MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

MACHINE TOOL NAME :
CNC & PMC TYPE NAME :
w

PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : Set when PMC

is prepared.
3rd page DATE OF DRAWING :
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
w

ROM WRITTEN BY :
REMARKS :
w

163
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

D STATUS screen On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.

PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN

ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal
G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 name
ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 Signal state
G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0:Off
1:On
ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

om
Signal state
G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 reverses for
FIN signals with *.
G0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: On
1: Off

SEARCH

r.c
[Search Method]
• Page key :Forward and Backward by screen
• Cursor key :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number

e
• To search a specified address or signal name, input an address number
or signal name and press [SEARCH].
D Alarm screen
nt
Displays an alarm generated in PMC.
ce
PMC ALARM MESSAGE MONIT RUN
Alarm dis-
play
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
For details
of alarms,
refer to Ap-
nc

pendix B
List of
Alarms.
.c

ALM Blinked
w

TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE

w
w

164
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

D TRACE screen Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized in
the trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittent
troubles.
(1) Trace parameter screen

PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

TRACE MODE :
(0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD)
1ST TRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)

om
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
2ND TRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :

r.c
T.DISP EXEC

e
Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen on
the next page)

nt
a. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode
0=Records changes of 1–byte signals
Select each item by cursor key
ce
1=Records changes of independent 2–byte signals
2=Records changes of consecutive 2–byte signals
b. ADDRESS TYPE:
0=PMC address is used for tracing address.
nc

1=Physical address is used for tracing address.

(Mainly used for C–language program)
c. ADDRESS:Set a tracing address.
d. MASK DATA: The bits to be traced are specified by a hexadecimal
.c

number (2 digits).
For example, to trace the signals at bit 7,6,5 and 0, set E1
(hexadecimal) to MASK DATA.
w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
E1% 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
However, even if bit 4,3,2 and 1 changes, tracing (memory
w

registration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when a

tracing is executed.
w

[Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number]

00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316
01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716
10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16
11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16

165
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

(2) Trace memory contents display screen

PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace
address
NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 and mask
0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data
0001 I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0002 I I * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0003 * I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Latest status
0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I mark : 1
0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * mark : 0

om
0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRCPRM STOP

r.c
10″LCD/14″CRT is displayed
by 1 and 0.

a. Soft key [TRCPRM]: Return to the trace parameter setting screen

e
(screen of previous page)
b. Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing.
nt Trace memory is cleared and each time a
specified signal changes, its status is recorded.
Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing is
executed 128 times by 2–byte tracing, tracing
ce
is executed again from the head of memory.
c. Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing.
*The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off.
nc

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
k017

#5 0 : Tracing starts by [EXEC].

.c

1 : Tracing starts automatically after power on

w
w
w

166
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.3.4
PMCRAM Screen

D Inputting PMC
parameters from the MDI
(1) Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
(2) Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program
protect signal (KEY4) to 1.

om
PWE KEY4

Timer f –
counter f f Either one
Keep relay f –
f f

r.c
Data table Either one

(3) Press a soft key and select a required screen.

[TIMER] :Timer screen
[COUNTR] :Counter screen

e
[KEEPRL] :Keep relay screen
[DATA] :Data table screen
nt
(4) Press cursor key and move the cursor to a desired number.

(5) Input a numeric key and press INPUT key and data is input.
ce
(6) After the data is input, set PARAMETER WRITE or KEY4 on setting
screen to 0.
D TIMER screen This screen is used for setting timer time of the functional instruction
(SUB 3).
nc

Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)

Timer no. specified by functional instruction
Address specified by ladder
.c

PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA

w

01 T00 480 11 T20 0 Timer

02 T02 960 12 T22 0 delay
03 T04 0 13 T24 0 time
(msec)
04 T06 0 14 T26 0
w

05 T08 0 15 T28 0
06 T10 0 16 T30 0
07 T12 0 17 T32 0
w

08 T14 0 18 T34 0
09 T16 0 19 T36 0
10 T18 0 20 T38 0

TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA

Timer set time : Timer no. 1–8 is max. 1572.8 sec and its accuracy is
48ms.
Timer no. 9–40 is max. 262.1 sec and its accuracy is
8ms.

167
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

D COUNTER screen This screen sets and displays max. value of counter and current value of
the counter instruction (SUB 4).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)
Max. value of counter (Minimum
value is specified by counter ins.)
Current value of counter

PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER)#001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT

om
01 C00 100 1 PRESET
02 C04 50 2 and CUR-
03 C08 0 0 RENT
can be set
04 C12 0 0 up to
05 C16 0 0 9999, re-
06 C20 0 0 spectively.
07 C24 0 0

r.c
08 C28 0 0
09 C32 0 0
10 C36 0 0

TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA

e
Address specified by ladder

D KEEP RELAY screen

nt Counter number specified by func-
tional instruction
ce
Address specified by ladder

PMC PARAMETER (KEEP REALAY) #001 MONIT RUN

nc

NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA

01 K00 00000000 11 K10 00000000
02 K01 00000000 12 K11 00000000
03 K02 00000000 13 K12 00000000
.c

04 K03 00000000 14 K13 00000000

05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000
06 K05 00000000 16 K15 00000000
w

07 K06 00000000 17 K16 00000000

08 K07 00000000 18 K17 00000000
09 K08 00000000 19 K18 00000000
w

10 K09 00000000 20 K19 00000000

TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA
w

Address specified by ladder Used by PMC system

168
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

(1) Nonvolatile memory control

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
k016

#7(MWRTF2): For checking the writing status in nonvolatile memory

#6(MWRTF1): Writing status in nonvolatile memory

(2) PMC system parameter

The following keep relays are used by the system, therefore they
cannot be used in the sequence program.

om
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
k017

#5 TRCSTAT
0 : Signal tracing starts by soft key [EXEC] in signal trace

r.c
function.
1 : Signal tracing starts automatically by power on in signal
trace function.
#4 MEMINP

e
0 : Data input cannot be done in memory contents display
function.
1 : Data input can be done in memory contents display
nt
#2 AUTORUN
function.

0 : A sequence program is executed automatically after the

ce
power is turned on.
1 : A sequence program is executed by sequence program soft
key.
#1 PRGRAM
nc

0 : Built–in programmer is not used.

1 : Built–in programmer is used.
#0 LADMASK
0 : Dynamic display of ladder is executed.
.c

1 : Dynamic display of ladder is not executed.

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w

k018

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w

k019

These bits are used by system. Do not change the values.

w

Usually all the bits are 0.

169
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

D DATA TABLE screen (1) Data table setting screen

No. of screen

PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN

GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 No. of

data table
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO.OF DATA groups
001 D0000 00000000 0 10
002 D0020 00000011 1 20
003

om
004 No. of
005 data table
006 Data length
Table
007 parameter
008 Data table
head ad-
dress

r.c
G.DATA G.CONT NO.SRH INIT
Group no. of
data table

a. Soft key [G.DATA] : Select data display screen of data table.

(Next screen)

e
b. NO. OF GROUPS [G.CONT] : Set the no. of groups of data table.
c.
nt Group No. [NO.SRH]: Move the cursor to a specified group.
d. Soft key [INIT]: Initializes the setting of data table.
ce
No. of groups is 1, ADDRESS is D0000, PARAMETER is 0000000,
TYPE is 0, NO. OF DATA is 1860.
This operation is done usually when a sequence program is prepared.
When PMC parameters are set, internal parameters are not affected.
nc

PARAMETER
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
k019
.c

0 : Binary format
1 : BCD format
w

0 : Without protection for input

1 : With protection for input

TYPE
w

0 : 1–byte length 1 : 2–byte length 2 : 4–byte length

e. Using the page key, next screen/previous screen can be selected.

w

170
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

(2) Data display screen

Group number
Page number

PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS DATA
000 D0000 0
001 D0001 0
002 D0002 0
003 D0003 0

om
004 D0004 0
005 D0005 0
006 D0006 0
007 D0007 0
008 D0008 0
009 D0009 0

r.c
C.DATA G–SRCH SEARCH

a. Soft key [C.DATA] :Returns to the data table setting screen.

e
(Previous screen)
b. Group No. [G–SRCH] : Head of the specified group is selected.

c.
nt Address

selected.
[SEARCH]: Searches an address in a group currently
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

171
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

4.4 The DPL/MDI panel is used to set PMC system parameters and create and
execute the sequence program.
OPERATION ON THE
(1) Setting and displaying PMC system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM)
DPL/MDI – The type of counter data (BCD or binary) can be selected.
(2) Editing the sequence program (EDIT)
– The sequence program can be edited (input, addition, search, and
deletion) by using the ladder mnemonics display.
(3) Executing the sequence program (RUN/STOP)
– The execution of the sequence program can be started and
stopped.

om
NOTE
1 The indication at the bottom left of each key applies to the
PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) function.
2 For keys such as the key, the indication on the left

r.c
applies when the key is pressed once and that on the right
applies when the key is pressed twice.
(Example) Pressing the key once enters ”D” and
pressing it twice enters ”R.”

e
nt
The screen configuration for the PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) function
is as follows:
ce
PMC programmer menu Sequence program start and stop
or
PMC PRG MENU 1/3 LADDER RUN/STOP
>RUN/STOP MONITOR (STOP)
nc

or
.c

PMC editing menu Editing ladder mnemonics

or or
PMC PRG MENU 2/3 PMC EDIT 1/1 N0001
>EDIT >LADDER RD X0000.0
w

or or
w

Setting and displaying PMC system parameters

or
PMC PRG MENU 3/3 CTR TYPE=BCD
w

>SYSTEM PARAM (BINARY=0/BCD=1)

or

172
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.4.1 To operate the PMC programmer, set K17#1 of the keep relay area for
Selectingthe PMC PMC parameters to 1, then press the key two times on the DPL/MDI
Programmer Menu (press the key further when the program screen is selected), thus
causing the PMC programmer menu to be displayed.

Program screen PMC programmer menu screen

<O0001> N010 G90 PMC PRG MENU 1/3

om
G01 G43 X10 ; >RUN/STOP

Can be switched only when K17#1 = 1.

To return to the CNC screen, press the , , , , or key.

r.c
Current
Position screen

Program screen

e
PMC programmer screen (K17#1=1)
(PMC programmer menu)
(PMC editing menu)
nt Alarm/Message screen
ce
Parameter/Diagnostic screen

Offset/Setting/Macro
nc

Variable screen
.c

4.4.2 Selecting SYSTEM PARAM on the PMC programmer menu displays the
Setting and Displaying system parameter screen. If the sequence program is running, selecting
this function automatically stops the program.
System Parameters
w

1 Display the PMC programmer menu.

(SYSTEM PARAM)
2 Display the SYSTEM PARAM item by pressing the or key.
w

PMC PRG MENU 3/3

>SYSTEM PARAM
w

3 Press the or key. The system parameter screen appears.

CTR TYPE = BIN

(BINARY=0/BCD=1)

4 The current counter data type is displayed on the screen.

(a) Specify the type of the counter value to be used for the CTR
functional instruction, as binary or BCD (enter for binary or
for BCD).

173
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

(b) Press the key.

The counter data type is set.

5 Pressing the or key displays the PMC programmer menu.

4.4.3 Selecting EDIT on the PMC programmer menu displays the editing
Editing the Sequence menu.
1 Display the PMC programmer menu.

om
Program (Edit)
2 Display the EDIT item by pressing the or key.

PMC PRG MENU 2/3

>EDIT

r.c
3 Press the or key. The PMC editing menu appears.

PMC EDIT 1/1

>LADDER

e
To end editing and display the PMC programmer menu, press the or
nt key.
ce
4.4.4
(1) Starting ladder mnemonics editing
Editing Ladder
Selecting LADDER on the PMC programmer menu displays the
nc

Mnemonics ladder mnemonics editing screen. If the sequence program is

running, selecting this function automatically stops the program.
1 Display the PMC programmer menu.
.c

2 Display the LADDER item by pressing the or key.

PMC EDIT 1/1

w

>LADDER

3 Press the or key. The sequence program is displayed.

w

Step number
w

> N0001
RD X0000.0

Instruction

(2) Confirming the ladder mnemonics

1 Cursor scroll (scroll per step)
Pressing the cursor key displays the instruction one step before
that currently displayed. Pressing the cursor key displays the
instruction one step after that currently displayed.

174
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

2 Specifying the step number

Entering , <step number>, then displays the instruction
having the entered step number.
(The cursor key can be used instead of the key.)
(Example) , ,

N0123
SUB 50 PSGNL

om
3 Relay search
Entering <address number> then searches for the relay
including the entered address.
(Example) ,

r.c
N0105
AND X0000.2

4 Relay coil search

e
Entering , <address number>, then searches for the relay
nt coil including the entered address.
(Example) , ,
ce
N0187
WRT. NOT Y0033.5
nc

5 Functional instruction search

Entering , <functional instruction number>, then searches
for the entered functional instruction.
(Example) , ,
.c

N0123
SUB 50 PSGNL
w
w

NOTE
1 Relay search, relay coil search, and functional instruction
search are started from the current screen. If the relay, relay
w

coil, or instruction is not found by the end of the ladder

program, search is performed from the beginning of the
ladder program to the step at which search was started. If
still not found, ”NOT FOUND” is displayed.
N0105 NOT FOUND
AND X0000.2

2 Display of some instructions may differ from that for FAPT

LADDER.

175
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

P–G, personal–computer FAPT LADDER Ladder mnemonics editing

(a) RD.NOT.STK RD.N.STK

(b) TMR timer–number SUB 03 TMR

P001 timer–number

(c) DEC code–signal–address SUB 04 DEC

(PRM) decode–instruction P001 code–signal–address
P002 decode–instruction

The above also applies when modifying the ladder mnemonics.

(3) Modifying the ladder mnemonics

om
1 Changing an instruction
(a) Display the instruction to be changed.
(b) Enter a new instruction.
(c) Press the key.

r.c
(Example) , ,

N1234
AND R0123.4

e
Before change

nt N1234
OR

After change
Y0032.4
ce
NOTE
If changing the instruction causes the memory capacity to
be exceeded, the key is ignored without changing the
nc

instruction.

2 Deleting an instruction
.c

(a) Display the instruction to be deleted.

(b) Press the key.
The instruction is deleted and the next instruction is displayed.
w

3 Inserting an instruction
(a) Display the instruction after which an instruction is to be inserted.
w

(b) Enter the instruction to be inserted.

(c) Press the key.
w

(Example) , ,

N1234
AND R0123.4

Before insertion

N1234
AND.STK

After insertion

176
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

NOTE
If inserting the instruction causes the memory capacity to be
exceeded, the key is ignored without inserting the
instruction.

4 Deleting the ladder program

(a) Enter .

(b) Press the key.

om
The whole ladder program is deleted.
(4) Ending ladder mnemonics editing
1 Press the or key.

r.c
2 ”EXECUTING” is displayed.
N0001
EXECUTING

e
3 The PMC editing menu appears.

ntNOTE
1 If the sequence program contains an error, the PMC editing
menu is not displayed but an error message appears on the
screen.
ce
(Example) Error message
END FUNCTION
MISSING
nc

Pressing the or cursor key displays the ladder

mnemonics editing screen.
.c

2 Pressing the , , , , or key during the

editing of the sequence program displays the CNC screen
by forcibly terminating editing even if the program contains
w

an error.
w
w

177
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

4.4.5 Selecting RUN/STOP on the PMC programmer menu displays the

Starting and Stopping sequence program start/stop screen.
the Sequence Program 1 Display the PMC programmer menu.
(Run/Stop) 2 Display the RUN/STOP item by pressing the or key.

PMC PRG MENU 1/3

>RUN/STOP

om
3 Press the or key. The sequence program start/stop screen
appears.
LADDER RUN/STOP
MONITOR [RUN]

r.c
4 The current execution state of the sequence program is displayed on
the screen.
Pressing the or key switches the state between running and
stopped.

e
5 Pressing the or key displays the PMC programmer menu.

4.4.6
nt
ce
Displayed error message Error description (operator action)
Error Messages
1 COIL NOTHING No coil is specified for a functional instruction
(for Ladder Mnemonics using a coil.
Editing) 2 COM FUNCTION MISSING The use of the COM (SUB9) functional
instruction is incorrect.
nc

3 END FUNCTION MISSING The END1 or END2 functional instruction is

missing (or ERROR NET).
4 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The use of the JMP (SUB10) functional
instruction is incorrect.
.c

5 LADDER BROKEN The ladder program is corrupted.

6 OBJECT BUFFER OVER The user program RAM is full.
(Note) (Perform condensation or reduce the
size of the ladder program.)
w

7 PLEASE CLEAR ALL The sequence program has become unrecov-

erable due to power–off during editing.
w

8 1ST LEVEL EXEC TIME OVER The ladder first level is too great.

NOTE
w

Use a memory card for ladder diagram editing or the

CONDENSE function of FAPT LADDER (for personal
computers). These methods may, however, not be effective.

178
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.5
LIST OF SIGNALS BY
EACH MODE

D Automatic operation
MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE,
ETC

EDIT [PMC ⇒ CNC]

KEY3(Program protect key)

om
[PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC]
ST (Cycle start) *FV0 to 7
*SP (Feed hold) (Feed rate over-
A SBK (Single block) ride)
U DRN (Dry run) OVC
T BDT1 to 9(Block delete) (Override can-

r.c
O MIα (Mirror image) cel)
M PN1 to 8 (External program no. search)
A DNCI (DNC input mode) ROV1,ROV2,
T HSα1A to B HROV,
I (Handle interrupt axis select) *HROV0 to 6,
C AFL (Auxiliary function neglect) (Rapid traverse

e
MEM FIN (Auxiliary function complete) override)
O MFIN, SFIN, TFIN SOV0 to 7
MDI
P (High speed M/S/T function complete) (Spindle speed
E
R
A
T
I
ntRMT *SSTP (Spindle stop)
SAR
SOR
(Spindle speed arrival)
(Spindle orientation)

[CNC ⇒ PMC]
override)
ce
O STL (Cycle start LED)
N SPL (Feed hold LED)
MF, M00 to M31 (Miscellaneous function)
SF, S00 to S31 (Spindle speed function)
TF, T00 to T31 (Tool function)
nc

DEN (Distribution end)

OP (automatic operating)
GR1O ot GR3O (Gear selection)
.c

D Manual operation
MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE,
w

ETC

Handle/ [PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC]

w

incremental HSnA to B MP1, MP2

M (Axis selection) n:1 to 2(No. of (Multiplier)
A MPGs)
N +α,– α (Jog feed)
U
w

A JOG [PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC]

L RT (Rapid traverse) *JV0 to 15
(Manual fee-
O [PMC ⇒ CNC] drate override)
P ZRN(Reference position return mode)
E +α, –α (Man
R [MT ⇒ CNC] ual feed move
Z *DECα (Reference position deceleration) command)
A
R
T ROV1, ROV2
ROV1
N [CNC ⇒ PMC]
I (Rapid traverse
O ZPα override)
N ZP2α, ZP3α
(Reference position return completion)

179
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

D Others
[PMC ⇒ CNC]
MD1 to 4 (Mode selection)
*ESP (Emergency stop)
KEY1 to 4(Memory protection key)
MLK (All axes machine lock)
*IT,*ITα (All axes each axis machine lock)
*"MITα (interlock per axis and direction)
*ABSM (Manual absolute)
SVFα (Servo off)
*FLWP (Follow up)
ERS (External reset)
Others RRW (Reset & Rewind)

om
"LMα, RLSOT (Software limit external setting)

[CMC ⇒ PMC]
MA (NC ready)
SA (Servo ready)
AL (NC alarm)
RST (Resetting)
BAL (Battery alarm)

r.c
INPα (In–position)
MVα (Axis moving)
TAP (Tapping)

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

180
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.6 Address of interface signal between Power Mate and PMC.

ADDRESS LIST

Power Mate PMC MT

G000 to X000 to

F000 to Y000 to

om
r.c
4.6.1
Power Mate–D for

e
1–path Control

MT
PMC
Address
nt #7 #6 #5 #4
Bit No.
#3 #2 #1 #0
ce
X000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1 *ESP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2

X001 *DEC2
nc

These addresses are applicable when an external input/output card and the
MODEL–A input/output are used. Ehen a built–in input/output card is
used., addresses X1000 to X1001 are used. When the built–in
input/output card, external input/output card, and the MODEL A
.c

input/output unit are all being used, data is entered via the built–in
input/output card.
w
w
w

181
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN

G005 AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN

G006 OVC *ABSM

G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST

om
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

r.c
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G014 ROV2 ROV1

e
G018 HS2B HS2A HS1B HS1A

G019
nt RT MP2 MP1
ce
G029 *SSTP SOR SAR

G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

nc

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

G041 HS2IB HS2IA HS1IB HS1IA

.c

G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

G044 MLK BDT1

w

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

w

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G053 UNIT
w

G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8

G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD

182
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G061 RGTAP

G066 EPCON IGNVRY

G070 MRDY ORCM SFR SRV CTH1 CTH2 TLMH TLML

G071 RCH RSL SOCN *ESPS ARST

om
G072 DEFMOD NRRO ROTA INDX

G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

r.c
G100 +J2 +J1

G102 –J2 –J1

G106 MI2 MI1

e
G110 +LM2 +LM1

G112
nt –LM2 –LM1
ce
G124 DTCH2 DTCH1

G126 SVF2 SVF1

G130 *IT2 *IT1

nc

G132 +MIT2 +MIT1

G134 –MIT2 –MIT1

.c

G136 EAX2 EAX1

G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EFINA

w

G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A

w

G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A

w

G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A

G147 EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A EID9A EID8A

G148 EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A

G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A

183
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E

G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E

G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EFINB

G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B

om
G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B

G157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B

G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B

r.c
G159 EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B EID9B EID8B

G160 EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B

G161 EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EID26B EID25B EID24B

e
G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01

G205
nt LED09
ce
G212 SKIPP ZPEXT1 GST ZR1 RTN31 RTN21 RTN11

G213 ACT ZPEXT2 ZR2 RTN32 RTN22 RTN12

G214 RTNT CTCHK WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1

nc

G216 TRQ2E TRQ1E

G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10

.c

G218 TRQ27 TRQ26 TRQ25 TRQ24 TRQ23 TRQ22 TRQ21 TRQ20

G219 PALM PAL6 PAL5 PAL4 PAL3 PAL2 PAL1 PAL0

w

G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK

w

G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00

G253 EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08

w

G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00

G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08

184
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

F002 CUT CSS

F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MRMT MMDI MJ MH

om
F004 MZRN

F007 TF SF MF

F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

r.c
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

e
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

F022
nt S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
ce
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

nc

F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

.c

F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

w

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

w

F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

w

F045 ORAR TLM LDT2 LDT1 SARS SDT SST ALMS

F046 RCFN RCHP

F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY

185
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

F055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO9 UO8

F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100

F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108

om
F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116

F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124

F065 RGSPM RGSPP

r.c
F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01

F071 PSW10 PSW09

F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

e
F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

F075
nt *SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
ce
F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O

F077 RTO HS1BO HS1AO

F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

nc

F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O

.c

F081 –J2O +J2O –J1O +J1O

F094 ZP2 ZP1

w

F096 ZP22 ZP21

w

F098 ZP32 ZP31

F104 INP2 INP1

w

F106 MVD2 MVD1

F110 MDTCH2 MDTCH1

F120 ZRF2 ZRF1

F129 *EAXSL EOV0

186
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA

F131 EMFA

F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A

F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB

om
F134 EMFB

F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B

F168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

r.c
F169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW 9

F170 SW24 SW23 SW22 SW21 SW20 SW19 SW18 SW17

F171 SW32 SW31 SW30 SW29 SW28 SW27 SW26 SW25

e
F172 SW40 SW39 SW38 SW37 SW36 SW35 SW34 SW33

F173
nt SW48 SW47 SW46 SW45 SW44 SW43 SW42 SW41
ce
F174 SW56 SW55 SW54 SW53 SW52 SW51 SW50 SW49

F175 SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57

F180 CLRCH1 CLRCH0

nc

F206 AD07 AD06

F207 AD15 AD14 AD13 AD12 AD11 AD10 AD09 AD08

.c

F208 SVER2 IPL2 SUP2 SVER1 IPL1 SUP1

F209 CTOPN RTPT WVRDY WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1

w

F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0
w

F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8

F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT

w

F213 KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS

F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN

F217 KX KR KG KN KO

F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF

187
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1

F251 ALPS4 ALSPD ALAPC

F252 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1

F253 APBL2 APBV2 APBZ2 APPS2 APPE2 APFE2 APOV2 APCM2

om
F254 DPL2 DPL1 DPL0

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

188
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.6.2
Power Mate–D for
2–path Control

MT
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 SKIP#1 *RILK#1 *DEC#1 *ESP#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 SKIP2#1

om
X001 SKIP#2 *RILK#2 *DEC#2 *ESP#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2

THese addresses are applicable when an external input/output card and

the MODEL A input/output unit are used. When a built–in input/output
card is used, addresses X1000 to X1001 are used. When the built–in

r.c
input/output card, external input/output card, and the MODEL A
input/output unit are all being used, data is entered via the built–in
input/output card.
The G/F address or path 2 is obtained by adding 1000 to the addresses of

e
path 1.
(Example) ST#1 <G007#2> ST#2 <G1007#2>
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

189
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN

G005 AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN

G006 OVC *ABSM

G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST

om
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

r.c
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G014 ROV2 ROV1

e
G018 HS1A

G019
nt RT MP2 MP1
ce
G029 *SSTP SOR SAR

G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

nc

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

G043 ZRN MD4 MD2 MD1

.c

G044 MLK BDT1

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

w

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

w

G053 UNIT

G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

w

G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8

G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD

190
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G061 RGTAP

G066 EPCON IGNVRY

G070 MRDY ORCM SFR SRV CTH1 CTH2 TLMH TLML

G071 RCH RSL SOCN *ESPS ARST

om
G072 DEFMOD NRRO ROTA INDX

G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

r.c
G100 +J1

G102 –J1

G106 MI1

e
G110 +LM1

G112
nt –LM1
ce
G124 DTCH1

G126 SVF1

G130 *IT1
nc

G132 +MIT1

G134 –MIT1
.c

G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01

G205 LED09
w

G212 SKIPP ZPEXT1 GST ZR1 RTN31 RTN21 RTN11

w

G213 ACT

G214 RTNT CTCHK

w

G215 PATHS

G216 TRQ1E

G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10

G219 PALM PAL6 PAL5 PAL4 PAL3 PAL2 PAL1 PAL0

191
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK

G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00

G253 EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08

G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00

om
G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

192
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

F002 CUT CSS

F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MMDI MJ MH

om
F004 MZRN

F007 TF SF MF

F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

r.c
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

e
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

F022
nt S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
ce
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

nc

F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

.c

F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

w

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

w

F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

w

F045 ORAR TLM LDT2 LDT1 SARS SDT SST ALMS

F046 RCFN RCHP

F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY

193
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

F055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO09 UO08

F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100

F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108

om
F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116

F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124

F065 RGSPM RGSPP

r.c
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

F075 *SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO

e
F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O

F077
nt RTO HS1AO
ce
F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O

nc

F081 –J1O +J1O

F094 ZP1
.c

F096 ZP21

F098 ZP31
w

F104 INP1
w

F106 MVD1

F110 MDTCH1
w

F120 ZRF1

F168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

F169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW 9

F170 SW24 SW23 SW22 SW21 SW20 SW19 SW18 SW17

194
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F171 SW32 SW31 SW30 SW29 SW28 SW27 SW26 SW25

F172 SW40 SW39 SW38 SW37 SW36 SW35 SW34 SW33

F173 SW48 SW47 SW46 SW45 SW44 SW43 SW42 SW41

F174 SW56 SW55 SW54 SW53 SW52 SW51 SW50 SW49

om
F175 SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57

F180 CLRCH0

F208 SVER1 IPL1 SUP1

r.c
F209 CTOPN RTPT WVRDY

F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0

F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8

e
F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT

F213
nt KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS
ce
F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN

F217 KX KR KG KN KO

F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF
nc

F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1

F251 ALPS4 ALSPD ALAPC

.c

F252 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1

F254 PATHO DPL2 DPL1 DPL0

w
w
w

195
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

4.6.3
Power Mate–F
MT
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 SKIP *RILK *DEC *ESP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

196
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN

G005 AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN

G006 OVC *ABSM

G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST

om
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PPN3 PN2 PN1 PN0

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

r.c
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G014 ROV2 ROV1

e
G018 HS1A

G019
nt RT MP2 MP1
ce
G029 *SSTP SOR SAR

G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

nc

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

G041 HS1IA
.c

G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

G044 MLK BDT1

w

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

w

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G053
w

G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8

G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD

197
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G061 RGTAP

G066 EPCON IGNVRY

G070 MRDY ORCM SFR SRV CTH1 CTH2 TLMH TLML

G071 RCH RSL SOCN *ESPS ARST

om
G072 DEFMOD NRRO ROTA INDX

G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

r.c
G100 +J1

G102 –J1

G106 MI1

e
G110 +LM1

G112
nt –LM1
ce
G124 DTCH1

G126 SVF1

G130 *IT1
nc

G132 *MIT1

G134 –MIT1
.c

G136 EAX1

G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EFINA

w

G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A

w

G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A

w

G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A

G147 EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A EID9A EID8A

G148 EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A

G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A

198
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC
CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E

G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E

G212 SKIPP ZPEXT1 GST ZR1 RTN31 RTN21 RTN11

G213 ACT

om
G214 RTNT CTCHK WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1

G216 TRQ1E

G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10

r.c
G219 PALM PAL6 PAL5 PAL4 PAL3 PAL2 PAL1 PAL0

G250 DPOSV DPOSM

G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK

e
G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00

G253
nt EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08
ce
G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00

G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08

nc
.c
w
w
w

199
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

F002 CUT

F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MRMT MMDI MJ MH

om
F004 MZRN

F007 TF SF MF

F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

r.c
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

e
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

F022
nt S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
ce
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

nc

F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

.c

F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

w

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

w

F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

w

F045 ORAR TLM LDT2 LDT1 SARS SDT SST ALMS

F046 RCFN RCHP

F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY

200
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

F055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO9 UO8

F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100

F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108

om
F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116

F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124

F065 RGSPM RGSPP

r.c
F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01

F071 PSW10 PSW09

F094 ZP1

e
F096 ZP21

F098
nt ZP31
ce
F104 INP1

F106 MVD1

F110 MDTCH1
nc

F120 ZRF1

F129 *EAXSL EOV0

.c

F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA

F131 EMFA
w

F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A

w

F180 CLRCH0

F208 SVER1 IPL1 SUP1

w

F209 CTOPN RTPT WVRDY WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1

F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0

F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8

F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT

201
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

CNC
PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F213 KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS

F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN

F217 KX KR KG KN KO

F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF

om
F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1

F251 ALPS4 ALSPD ALAPC

F252 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1

r.c
F254 DPL2 DPL1 DPL0

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

202
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.7
SIGNAL AND
SYMBOL
CORRESPONDENCE
TABLE

Symbol Signal name PMC address

:ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2

om
ACT Temporary interrupt detection signal G213#7

AD06 to AD15 Analog input signal F206 to F207

AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005#6

r.c
AL CNC alarm signal F001#0

ALAPC APC alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F251#0

ALOH Overheat alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#5

e
ALOT Over travel alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#4

ALPS P/S alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#3

ALPS1

ALPS2
nt
P/S alarm 100 signal (alarm classification signal)

P/S alarm 000 signal (alarm classification signal)

F250#0

F250#1
ce
ALPS3 P/S alarm 101 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#2

ALPS4 PS alarm 5000–5999 signal (alarm classification signal) F251#2

ALSPD Spindle alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F251#1

nc

ALSV Servo alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#6

APBL1, APBL2 APC battery LOW alarm 2 signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#7, F253#7

APBV1, APBV2 APC battery LOW alarm 1 signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#6, F253#6
.c

APBZ1, APBZ2 APC battery zero alarm signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#5, F253#5

APCM1, APCM2 APC communication error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#0, F253#0
w

APFE1, APFE2 APC framing error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#2, F253#2

APOV1, APOV2 APC over time error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#1, F253#1
w

APPE1, APPE2 APC parity error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#3, F253#3

APPS1, APPS2 APC pulse miss error signal (APC alarm type signal) F252#4, F253#4
w

ARST Alarm reset signal G071#0

BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2

BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9 Optional block skip signal G044#0, G045

BDTO Optional block skip signal (software operator’s panel) F075#2

BGEACT Background editing signal F053#4

CLRCH1, CLRCH2 Current limit arrival signal F180#0, #1

CSS Constant speed signal F002#2

203
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

CTCHK Chaser status check signal G214#5

CTH1,CTH2 Gear select signal(serial spindle) G070#3, #2

CTOPN Chaser open signal F209#7

CUT Signal under cutting F002#6

:DEC1, :DEC2 Reference position return deceleration signal X000#5, X001#5

DEFMOD Differential rigid tap signal G072#3

om
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3

DM00, DM01, DM02, M decode signals F009#4 to #7

DM30

DNCI DNC operation signal G043#5

r.c
DPL0 to DPL2 Screen status signal F254#0 to #2

DPOSV, DPOSM Position display unit select signal G250#6, #7

DRN Dry run signal G046#7

e
DRNE Dry run signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#7

DRNO Dry run signal (software operator’s panel) F075#5

DTCH1, DTCH2

EAX1, EAX2
nt
Controlled axis detach signal

Controlled axis selection signal (Axis control by PMC)

G124#0, #1

G136#0, #1
ce
:EAXSL Controlled axis select state signal F129#7

EBSYA, EBSYB Axis control command read signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#7, F133#7

EBUFA, EBUFB Axis control command completed signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#7, G154#7
nc

EC0A to EC6A, Axis control command signal (Axis control by PMC) G143#0 to #6,
EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6

ECKZA, ECKZB Error zero checking signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#1, F133#1
.c

ECLRA, ECLRB Reset signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#6,G154#6

EDENA, EDENB Miscellaneous function executing signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#3, F133#3
w

EDG00 to EDG15 External punch start number signal (I/O device external control function) G252, G253

EDGN Diagnose selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#7
w

EDN00 to EDN15 Signal of external punch total number (I/O device external control function) G254, G255

EFINA, EFINB Miscellaneous function complete signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#0, G154#0
w

EGENA, EGENB Axis moving signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#4, F133#4

EIALA, EIALB Alarm signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#2, F133#2

EID0A to EID31A, Axis move distance, Dwell time , Auxiliary function code (Axis control by G146 to G149,
EID0B to EID31B PMC) G158 to G161

EIF0A to EIF15A, Feedrate (Axis control by PMC) G144, G145,G156,

EIF0B to EIF15B G157

EINPA, EINPB In–positioning signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#0, F133#0

204
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

Symbol Signal name PMC address

EM11A to EM28A, Miscellaneous BCD code (Axis control by PMC) F132, F135
EM11B to EM28B

EMFA, EMFB Miscellaneous function read signal (Axis control by PMC) F131#0, F134#0

EMSBKA, EMSBKB Block stop inhibit signal (Axis control by PMC) G143#7, G155#7

ENB Spindle enable signal F001#4

EOTNA, EOTNB Overtravel in negative direction signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#6, F133#6

om
EOTPA, EOTPB Overtravel in positive direction signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#5, F133#5

EOV0 Override 0% signal (Axis control by PMC) F129#5

EPARM Parameter selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#6

EPCON External pulse input/output signal G066#6

r.c
ERS External reset signal G008#7

ESBKA, ESBKB Block stop signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#3, G154#3

ESOFA, ESOFB Servo off signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#4, G154#4

e
:ESP Emergency stop signal G008#4, X000#4
:ESPS Emergency stop signal (serial spindle) G071#1

ESTPA, ESTPB

EVAR
nt
Axis control stop signal (Axis control by PMC)

Variable selection signal (I/O device external control function)

G142#5, G154#5

G251#5
ce
EXF1 to 5 Speed change signal X000#0, #1, #2,
X011#4,
#5,
X1000#0, #1, #2
nc

EXPRG Program selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#4

EXRD External read start signal G058#1

EXSTP External read/punch stop signal G058#2

.c

EXWT External punch start signal G058#3

FIN End signal G004#3

w

:FLWU Follow–up signal G007#5

:FV0 to :FV7 Feedrate override signal G012
w

:FV0E to :FV7E Override signal (Axis control by PMC) G151

:FV0O to :FV7O Feedrate override signal (software operator’s panel) F078
w

GR1O, GR2O, GR3O Gear selection signal F034#0 to #2

GST Spindle gear shift signal G212#5

HS1A, HS1B, HS2A, Manual handle feed axis select signal G018#0, #1, #4, #5
HS2B

HS1AO, HS1BO Manual handle feed axis select signal (software operator’s panel) F077#0, #1

HS1IA, HS1IB, HS2IA, Axis select signal for handle interrupt G041#0, #1, #4, #5
HS2IB

205
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

IGNVRY Speed control servo alarm ignored signal G066#0

INDX Orientation stop position change command (serial spindle control) G072#0

INP1, INP2 In–position signal F104#0, #1

IOLNK FANUC I/O LINK signal G251#0

IPL1, IPL2 Distribution signal (axis status signal) F208#2, #6

:IT Interlock signal G008#0

om
:IT1, :IT2 Each axis interlock signal G130#0, #1

+J1, +J2, –J1, –J2 Feed axis direction select signal G100#0, #1,
G102#0, #1

+J1O, –J1O, +J2O, Manual feed F081#0 to #3

–J2O

r.c
:JV0 to :JV15 Manual feedrate override signal G010, G011
:JV0O to :JV15O Jog feedrate setting signal F079, F080

K0 to K9, KMNS, Key data reference function by PMC F210 to F218

e
KPRD, KNO, KSLH,
KEOB, KCAN, KALT,
KINS, KDLT, KINP,
KWRT, KRED, KPOS,
KPRG, KVAR, KPRM,
KALM, KDWN, KUP,
nt
ce
KP, KQ, KH, KO, KN,
KG, KR, KX, KF, KM,
KS, KT, KSHRP

KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, Memory protection key G046#3 to #6

nc

KEY4

KEYO Program protect signal (software operator’s panel) F075#6

LDT1 Load detection signal 1 F045#4

.c

LDT2 Load detection signal 2 F045#5

LED01 to LED09 Handy operator’s panel signal G204 to G205

w

+ LM1, +LM2, Software limit external setting signal G110#0, #1,

–LM1, –LM2 G112#0, #1

M00 to M31 M function code signal F010 to F013

w

M2RN Manual reference position return check signal F004#5

MA Ready signal F001#7

w

MAUT Automatic operation (AUTO) check signal F003#5

MD1 ,MD2, MD4 Mode select signal G043#0 to #2

MD1O ,MD2O, MD4O Software operator’s panel signal F073#0, F073#1,

F073#2

MDTCH0, MDTCH1 Controlled axis detaching signal F110#0, #1

MEDT Memory edit (EDIT) check signal F003#6

MF M code output end signal F007#0

206
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

Symbol Signal name PMC address

MFIN M function end signal G005#0

MH Manual handle or step feed (HANDLE/STEP) check signal F004#1

MI1, MI2 Mirror image signal G106#0, #1

+MIT1, +MIT2, Interlock signal for each axis and direction G132#0, #1,
–MIT1, –MIT2 G134#0, #1

MJ Jog feed (JOG) check signal F003#2

om
MLK Machine lock signal G044#1

MLKO Machine lock signal (software operator’s panel) F075#4

MMDI Manual data input (MDI) check signal F003#3

MP1, MP2 Incremental feed signal G019#4, #5

r.c
MP1O, MP2O Incremental feed signal (software operator’s panel) F076#0, #1

MRDY Ready signal (serial spindle) G070#7

MRMT Tape command (RMT) check signal F004#4

e
MTCHIN TEACH IN JOG STEP check signal F003#7

MVD1, MVD2 Moving direction signals F106#0, #1

NRRO
nt
Short path control command at change of orientation stop position (serial
spindle control)
G072#2
ce
OP Automatic operation signal F000#7

ORAR Spindle orientation completion signal F045#7

ORCM Orientation command signal G070#6

nc

OUT0 to OUT7 Software operator’s panel general purpose switch signal F072

OVC Override cancel signal G006#4

OVCE Override cancel signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#5

.c

PAL0 to PAL6 Alarm number specification signal (Display of alarms from PMC) G219#0 to #6

PALM PMC alarm generation selection signal (Display of alarms from PMC) G219#7
w

PATHO Displaying path check signal F254#7

PATHS Path switch signal G215#0

w

PN0 to PN7 Workpiece number search signal G009

PSW01 to PSW10 Position switch signal F070 to 71

w

R01I to R12I Spindle speed binary signal input G032, G033#0 to

#3

R01O to R12O Spindle speed binary signal output F036, F037#0 to

#3

RCFN Exit switch completion signal F046#3

RCH Power line state confirmation signal (serieal) G071#7

RCHP Exit switch signal F046#2

RGSPM Spindle rotation direction signal (minus) F065#1

207
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

RGSPP Spindle rotation direction signal (plus) F065#0

RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0

:RILK High–speed interlock signal X000#6

RLSOT Software limit external setting signal G007#7

ROTA Rotation direction command at change of orientation stop position (serial G072#1
spindle control)

om
ROV1, ROV2 Rapid traverse override signal G014#0, #1

ROV1E, ROV2E Rapid traverse override signal (axis control by PMC) G150#0, #1

ROV1O, ROV2O Rapid traverse override signal (software operator’s panel) F076#4, #5

RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053#3

r.c
RPBSY Reading/punching signal F053#2

RRW Reset & rewind signal G008#6

RSL Output change request signal (serial) G071#6

e
RST CNC reset signal F001#1

RT Manual rapid traverse select signal G019#7

RTE

RTN11 to RTN31 Return signal

nt
Manual rapid traverse signal (axis control by PMC) G150#6

G212#0 to #2
ce
RTN12 to RTN32 Return signal G213#0 to #2

RTNT Rigid tapping return signal G214#7

RTO Manual rapid traverse signal (software operator’s panel) F077#6

nc

RTPT Rigid tapping return signal F209#5

RWD Rewinding signal F000#0

S00 to S31 Spindle function code signal F022 to F025

.c

SA Servo ready signal F000#6

SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029#4

w

SARS Speed arrival signal F045#3

SBK Single block signal G046#1

w

SBKO Single block signal (software operator’s panel) F075#3

SDT Speed detection signal F045#2

w

SF Spindle function strobe signal F007#2

SFIN S function end signal G005#2

SFR Spindle CW command signal G070#5

SGN Spindle polarity select signal G033#5

SHA00 to SHA11 Spindle orientation external stop position command signal G078#0 to G079#3

SIND Spindle analog voltage control signal G033#7

208
B–62835EN/01 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

Symbol Signal name PMC address

SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, Skip signal X000#7, #0, #1, #2

SKIP4

SKIPP Skip signal from PMC G212#7

SOCN Soft start/stop cancel signal (serial) G071#4

SOR Spindle orientation signal G029#5

SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override signal G030

om
:SP Feed hold signal G008#5
:SPO Feed hold signal (software operator’s panel) F075#7

SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000#4

SRV Spindle CCW command signal G070#4

r.c
SSIN Spindle polarity control select signal G033#6

SST Speed detection 0 signal F045#1

:SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6

e
ST Cycle start signal G007#2

STL Cycle start lamp signal F000#5

SUP1, SUP2

SVER1, SVER2
nt
Acceleration/deceleration signal (axis motion status signal)

Servo position deviation monitor signal

F208#1, #5

F208#3, #7
ce
SVF1, SVF2 Servo off signal G126#0, #1

SW1 to 61 Handy operator’s panel signal F168 to F175

T00 to T31 Tool function code signal F026 to F029

nc

TAP Tapping signal F001#5

TF Tool function strobe signal F007#3

TFIN T function end signal G005#3

.c

TLM Torque limiting signal F045#6

TLMH High–speed torque limit signal G070#1

w

TLML Low–speed torque limit signal G070#0

TRQ10 to TRQ17 Torque limit signal G217#0 to #7

w

TRQ1E, TRQ2E Torque limit enable signal G216#0, #1

TRQ20 to TRQ27 Torque limit signal G218#0 to #7

w

UI0 to UI15 Custom macro input signal G054, G055

UINT Custom macro interrupt signal G053#3

UO0 to UO15 Custom macro output signal F054, F055, F056

UO100 to UO131 to F059

WAT1 to WAT4 Waiting signal (waiting function) F209#0 to #3

WFN1 to WFN4 Waiting complete signal (waiting function) G214#0 to #3

WVRDY V–READY waiting signal F209#4

209
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62835EN/01

Symbol Signal name PMC address

ZP1, ZP2 Reference position return end signal F094#0, #1

ZP21, ZP22 2nd reference position return end signal F096#0, #1

ZP31, ZP32 3rd reference position return end signal F098#0, #1

ZPEXT1, ZPEXT2 External reference position setting signal G212#6, G213#6

ZR1, ZR2 Dogless reference position setting signal G212#4, G213#4

ZRF1, ZRF2 Reference position establishment signal F120#0, #1

om
ZRN Manual reference position return selection signal G043#7

ZRNO Reference position return signal (software operator’s panel) F073#4

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

210
B–62835EN/01 5. DIGITAL SERVO

5 DIGITAL SERVO

This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of

digital servo and adjustment of reference position.

om
5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS
5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD)
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

211
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62835EN/01

5.1 This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used
for field adjustment of tool.
INITIAL SETTING A servo adjustment screen is not provided by the Power Mate–F or the
SERVO DPL/MDI.
PARAMETERS 1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.
2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS

#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

om
1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.

3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.

4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following

r.c
operation: SYSTEM key [SV.PARA].

5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.

e
SERVO SETTING
X AXIS Y AXIS
(1) INITIAL SET BIT00000000 00000000 PRM 2000
nt (2) MOTOR ID NO.
(3) amr
(4) cmr
(5) FEED GEAR N
47
00000000
2
1
47
00000000
2
1
PRM
PRM
PRM
PRM
2020
2001
1820
2084
ce
(6) (N/M) M 125 125 PRM 2085
(7) DIRECTION SET 111 111 PRM 2022
(8) VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 8192 PRM 2023
(9) POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 12500 PRM 2024
(10) REF.COUNTER 8000 8000 PRM 1821
nc
.c

(1) INITIAL SET BIT

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 PRMCAL DGPRM PLC01
w

#3 (PRMCAL) 1 : Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done.

The following parameters are set automatically in
accordance with the no. of pulses of pulse coder:
w

PRM 2043(PK1V), PRM 2044(PK2V),

PRM 2047(POA1), PRM 2053(PPMAX),
PRM 2054(PDDP), PRM 2056(EMFCMP),
w

PRM 2057(PVPA), PRM 2059(EMFBAS),

PRM 2074(AALPH),PRM 2076(WKAC)
#1 (DGPRM)l 0 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not
done.
#0 (PLC01) 0: Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as
they are:
1: Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied
by 10.

212
B–62835EN/01 5. DIGITAL SERVO

(2) MOTOR NUMBER

DGN 2020 Motor type no. per axis

Motor type no. that can be set are 3 to 62.

Format
3 4 5 7 8 9
number
Model
α12HV α22HV α30HV αC3/2000 αC6/2000 αC12/2000
name
Drawing
0176 0177 0178 0142 0123 0127
number

om
Format
10 13 15 16 17 18
number
Model α12/200
αC22/1500 α0.5 α3/3000 α6/2000 α6/3000
name 0
Drawing
0128 0142 0123 0127 0128 0142

r.c
number

Format
19 20 21 22 23 24
number
Model
α12/3000 α22/2000 α22/3000 α30/2000 α30/3000 αM3/3000

e
name
Drawing
0143 0147 0148 0152 0153 0161
number
nt
Format
number
25 26 27 28 29 30

α40/2000
ce
Model α40/2000
αM6/3000 αM9/3000 α22/1500 α30/1200 without
name with FAN
FAN
Drawing
0162 0163 0146 0151 0158 0157
number
nc

Format
33 34 35 36 46 56
number
Model αE3/2000 αE6/2000 αE1/3000 αE2/3000
α2/2000 αL3/2000
name β3/2000 β6/2000 β1/3000 β2/3000
.c

Drawing
0105 0106 0101 0102 0372 0561
number

Format
w

57 58 59 60 61 62
number
Model
αL6/3000 αL9/3000 αL25/3000 αL50/2000 α1/3000 α2/3000
name
w

Drawing
0562 0564 0571 0572 0371 0373
number
w

213
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62835EN/01

(3) CMR

DGN 1820 Command multiply ratio

1
1 When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27 Set value=
CMR
+100
2 When CMR is 1 to 48 Set value=2 CMR

(4) Turn off power once, then turn it to on.

(5) Feed gear n/m

om
FRM 2084 n of flexible feed gear

FRM 2085 m of flexible feed gear

1) For serial pulse coder A or B, and serial a pulse coder.

r.c
n No. of feedback pulses per revolution of motor
=
m 1000000
For serial pulse coder B, set 250,000 pulses or less to parameter 2084.

e
Examples of calculation
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
nt 1 rotation
of motor
8mm
10mm
12mm
n=1/m=125
n=1/m=100
n=3/m=250
n=2/m=25
n=1/m=10
n=3/m=25
ce
2) For serial pulsecoder C

n No. of feedback pulses per revolution of motor

=
m 40000
nc

Examples of calculation
1/1000 mm
1 rotation 8mm n=1/m=5
of motor 10mm n=1/m=4
.c

12mm n=3/m=10

(6) Direction of Travel

w

PRM 2022 Direction of motor rotation

111 : Positive (CCW) –111 : Reverse (CW)

w

(7) No. of velocity pulses and position pulses

1) For serial pulse coder A or B and serial α pulse coder
w

Para– Resolution 1/1000mm Resolution 1/10000mm

meter
no. Full close Semi close Full close Semi close
High resolu- 2000 xxxx xxx 0 xxxx xxx 1
tion setting
Separate 1815 0010 0010 0010 0000 0010 0010 0010 0000
detector
Velocity feed- 2023 8192 819
back pulses
Position feed- 2024 NS 12500 NS/10 1250
back pulses

214
B–62835EN/01 5. DIGITAL SERVO

2) For serial pulse coder C

Para– Resolution 1/1000mm
meter
no. Full close Semi close

High resolu- 2000 xxxx xxx1

tion setting
Separate 1815 0000 0010 0000 0000
detector
Velocity feed- 2023 4000
back pulses
Position feed- 2024 NS/10 4000

om
back pulses

NS is the no. of position feedback pulses times 4.

For 5–0S to 3–0S motor, since the no. of poles is different, set parameter
2001.
Even if the system is of full closed loop PMR 2002#3=1 #4=0.

r.c
(8) Reference counter
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity(0 to 99999999)

e
6.Turn off power then turn on power.

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

215
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62835EN/01

5.2
SERVO TUNING
SCREEN

5.2.1 Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.

Parameter Setting A servo adjustment screen is not provided by the Power Mate–F or the
DPL/MDI.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS

om
#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.
1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.

5.2.2

r.c
1. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
Displaying Servo
2. Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.
Tuning Screen
SERVO TUNING 01234 N12345

e
(PAMAMETER) (MONITOR)
(1) FUN.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000 (9)
(2) LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00000000 (10)

nt
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
TURNING SET.
SET PERIOD
INT.GAIN
PROP.GAIN
FILER
0
50
113
–1015
0
ALARM 3
ALARM 4
ALARM 5
LOOP GAIN
POS ERROR
10000000
00000000
00000000
2999
556
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
ce
(8) VELOC.GAIN 125 CURRENT% 10 (16)
SPEED RPM 100 (17)

SV SET SV TUN OPE

nc

1 Function bit : PRM 2003

2 Loop gain : PRM 1825
3 Tuning start : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)
.c

4 Set period : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)

5 Integral gain : PRM 2043
w

6 Proportional gain : PRM 2044

7 Filter : PRM 2067
w

(PRM 2021)+256
8 Velocity gain : Set value=
256
100

9 Alarm 1 : DGN 200 (Details of alarm 400 and 414)

w

10 Alarm 2 : DGN 201 (Details of disconnection alarm,

overload)
11 Alarm 3 : DGN 202 (Details of alarm 319)
12 Alarm 4 : DGN 203 (Details of alarm 319)
13 Alarm 5 : DGN 204 (Details of alarm 414)
14 Loop gain : Actual loop gain
15 Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300)
16 Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.
17 Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation

216
B–62835EN/01 5. DIGITAL SERVO

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm1 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

DGN (200) :
#7 (OVL) : Overload alarm
#6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm
#5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm
#4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm
#3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm

om
#2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm
#1 (FBA) : Disconnection alarm
#0 (OFA) : Overflow alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm2 ALD EXP

r.c
DGN
) ⇓
Over- 0 — — — Amplifier overheat
load
alarm 1 — — — Motor overheat

e
Discon- 1 — — 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnec-
nection tion (Hardware)
alarm
nt 1

0
—

—
—

—
1

0
Separate type pulse coder dis-
connection (Hardware)
Pulse coder disconnection (soft-
ware)
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc

Alarm3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH

DGN (202) :
#6 (CSA) : Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal.
#5 (BLA) : Battery voltage is in low (warning).
.c

#4 (PHA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal.

Counting the feedback signal is in error.
#3 (RCA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
w

Counting is in error.
If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1
of alarm 1) and ALD bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the
w

EXP bit of alarm 2 (internal hardware disconnection)

is set to 1, a count miss alarm (CMAL) occurs in the α
pulse coder.
w

#2 (BZA) : Battery voltage becomes 0.

Replace batteries and set the reference position.
#1 (CKA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block has stopped.
#0 (SPH) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.

217
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62835EN/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm4 DTE CRC STB

DGN (203) :
#7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
There is no response.
#6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#5 (STB) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.

om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm3 OFS MCC LDM PMS

r.c
DGN (204) :
#6 (OFS) : A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is
abnormal.
#5 (MCC) : Contacts of electro–magnetic contactor of servo

e
amplifier is blown
#4 (LDM) : LED of serial pulse coder C is abnormal.
#3 (PMS)
nt : No. of feedback pulses are in error because serial pulse
coder or feedback cable is faulty.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

218
B–62835EN/01 5. DIGITAL SERVO

5.3
ADJUSTING
REFERENCE
POSITION
(DOG METHOD)

5.3.1
General

om
Speed

Rapid traverse
(PRM1420α)

r.c
FL rate
(PRM1425 α )

Time

e
Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620 α )

*DECα nt
ce
PCZ

Grid

Grid shift amount

nc

Reference counter capacity

(PRM1850)
(PRM1821)

10mm/rev

10000P +
.c

Error count- Proportion Speed M

CMR gain
Command er loop
–
4 (Serial)
w

Refere
GRID count. FFG PC

10000P/rev (Flex-
w

Counter capacity
ible feed gear)
10000p
w

D Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ

#1(DLZ)l 0 : Reference position return method is normal (dog).

1 : Dogless reference position setting is used.

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity [P]

No. of feedback pulses or its division by an integer is set.

219
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62835EN/01

PRM 1850 Grid shift amount per axis [P]

* This parameter is set using a value ten times the unit of

detection, if the input system uses units of 0.0001 mm.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1815 APC APZ OPT

#5(APC) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder.

om
1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
#4(APZ) Zero position of absolute pulse coder is:
0 : Not established
1 : Established
(Turns to 1 after establishment)
To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to

r.c
1 without first returning to the reference position when
using serial pulse coder α , follow this procedure: Back
up the data with the battery and give the motor one or
more turns.
Turn the power off then on again, then change the APZ

e
bit setting from 0 to 1.
#1(OPT) 0 : The pulse coder built into the motor is used for position
nt detection.
1 : A separate pulse coder or linear scale is used for
position detection.
ce
D Separate Type Pulse
Coder or Linear Scale is
Used
nc

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]

Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to

the reference counter capacity.
.c

When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of the

distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer may be used
w

as a reference counter capacity:

Example)
w
w

(1µ m)
300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc

220
B–62835EN/01 5. DIGITAL SERVO

5.4 When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this
function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by
DOGLESS MTB.
REFERENCE When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once
POSITION SETTING set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is replaced
or absolute position is lost, perform this setting.

5.4.1
General

om
Speed

Reference position return

FL rate (PRM 1425)

r.c
Time

JOG

e
ZRN

+Jα

GRID
nt
..........................
ce
ZP α
nc

5.4.2
Operation 1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual operation.
.c

2 Select the reference position return mode or switch.

3 Press a button for an axis–and–direction–select–signal + or –, and the
machine moves to the next grid, then stops.
w

(This position is set as the reference position).

After the reference position has been set, select the reference position
return mode (ZRN signal is 1) and turn on an axis–and–direction–
w

select signal, then the tool returns to the reference position.

w

221
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62835EN/01

5.4.3
Associated Parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ

#1(DLZ) 0 : Dog is used for reference position return

1 : Dogless reference position setting

om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1006 ZMI

#5(ZMI) 0 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction

is +.
1 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction

r.c
is –.
After ZRN signal becomes 1, manual feed direction is
always the direction set by this parameter irrespective
of an axis selection signal.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

222
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

This chapter describes the parameter tuning screen of serial interface

spindle amplifier.

om
6.1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL
(SERIAL INTERFACE)
6.2 TABLE OF TEST POINTS
6.3 CONFIRMING POWER SUPPLY (SERIAL INTERFACE)

r.c
6.4 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN
6.5 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF STANDARD PARAMETER

e
On the serial interface spindle amplifier, the following specification
number is printed on upper part of the spindle unit
nt A06B–6063–Hxxx or
A06B–6064–Hxxx or
ce
A06B–6065–Hxxx
(xxx is any)
nc
.c
w
w
w

223
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

6.1
GENERAL OF
SPINDLE CONTROL
(SERIAL INTERFACE)
S instruction M instruction

NC PMC
M03,M04,M05,M19

om
FIN

*SSTP(Spindle stop)

Motor speed SOVx( Spindle override)

r.c
SF,GR10,GR20,GR30

e
S SOR( Orientation)
(PRM 3735 to 3752)

Orientation speed
nt 0

1 R010 to R120

R01I to R12I
ce
(PRM 3705#1, 3732,
3706#5) 0 1
SIND
Output polarity
(PRM 3706#7,6) SGN(0=+,1=–)
nc

0 1
SSIN

*ESP,MRDY,
SFR,SRV,ORCM
.c

etc.
SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1,
LDT2
ORAR, ALM etc.
w

Interface
function
w

Optical cable
Serial spindle
w

amplifier Interface
function
Spindle
Operator’s motor
panel PC
Load meter
LM

Speed meter
SM Spindle

224
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.1.1
Method A of Gear Output Motor speed

Change
4095 Max
(PRM3705#2=0)
Gear 2 PRM 3736
Gear 3
Gear 1

om
PRM 3735
0
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 S code

r.c
6.1.2
Method B of Gear Output Motor speed

Change 4095 Max

(PRM 3705#2=1)

e
PRM 3736
PRM 3752
PRM 3751
nt Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
ce
0 PRM 3735
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743
nc
.c
w
w
w

225
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

6.2
TABLE OF TEST
POINTS

6.2.1
Printed Circuit Board Name Signal Remarks

(A16B–2201–0440) PA Pulse–generator phase A 90°advance for PB in a CW rotation

Vpp=0.36 to 0.5V
PB Pulse–generator phase B 90° delay for PA in a CW rotation

om
Vpp=0.36 to 0.5V
RA Phase–A reference voltage +2.5VDC "0.2
RB Phase–B reference voltage +2.5VDC "0.2
PAAS Signal with the amplitude 90° advance for PB in a clockwise
10 times that of PA direction,Vp–p=3.6 to 0.5V

r.c
PBAS Signal with the amplitude 90 delay for PA in a clockwise direc-
10 times that of PB tion,Vp–p=3.6V to 5.0V
PAA A phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)
PBA B phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)

e
*ITP1 ITP pulse Synchronous signal from the CNC
TR Serial data transmission The high level of this signal indicates
signal that serial data is being transmitted
ntMSA Magnetic sensor output
MSA signal
from the CNC
One signal per rotation
ce
LSA Magnetic sensor output One signal per rotation
LAS signal
*LS LSA pulse signal One signal per rotation
PAE2 Position–coder phase A Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)
nc

PBE2 Posiiton–coder phase B Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)

PSE2 Position–coder phase Z 1 pulse/rotation
*PELS Position coder cable is bro- The low level of this signal indicates
ken that the wire is broken.
.c

CLK1 Clock signal 8MHz, 50% duty

VDC DC link voltage signal Voltage that is 1/100 of the DC link
voltage
SDC Control power DC link volt- Voltage that is 1/100 of the DC voltage
w

age signal of the input power

+24V +24V DC voltage +20V to +26V
w

+15V +15V DC voltage +15V±4%

+5V +5V DC voltage +5V±2%
–15V –15V DC voltage –15V±4%
w

0V
IU U–phase current detection
Amplifier Current
signal
Model 1S to 3S 21.9A/V
Model small 6S,6S to 12S 33.3A/V
Model 15S 41.7A/V
Model 15S to 22S 66.7A/V
Model 26S 83.3A/V
IV V–phase current detection Model Small 30S 111.1A/V
signal Model 30S 83.3A/V
Model 40S 104.2A/V
Model 30HV,40HV 50.5A/V
Model 60HV 94.7A/V

226
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.2.2
Signal Waveform Check terminal Waveform Remarks

a Test Points PB PA
Pulse generator
output
PA 0.36 +2.5V
PB to 0.5 Phase differ-
ence between
V PA and PB is
0V 90°

om
RA
2.5V"0.2V
RB
Nominal
0V voltage

+4 to +4.5V

r.c
PAA
0V

0V
PBA Signal formed

e
by PA/PB

Peak

IU
nt 0V
Current feed-
back signal of
each phase
ce
IV Peak value is
0V
proportional to
current value

125ns
nc

+4V Clock
CLK1 8MHz
0V
.c
w
w
w

227
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

6.3
CONFIRMING POWER
SUPPLY
(SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.3.1 Confirm AC power voltage and DC current on spindle control circuit PCB
Power Supply as follows:
AC power supply Check terminals R,S,T,G

om
DC voltage
Volt Test points Rated value
on spindle
control circuit +24V Across +24V to 0V +20 to +26V
PCB
+15V Across +15V to 0V +15V"4%

+5V Across +5V to 0V +5V"2%

r.c
–15V Across –15V to 0V –15V"4%

e
6.3.2
Test Points nt
D A20B–1003–0550
ce
CN10 Ę Ę Ę
+B –B 0B
nc

Ę 0V

C
N
6
.c

Ę ST
w

C
N
5
+24V Ę Ę 0V
w

+5V Ę Ę 0V
+15V Ę Ę–15V

0V Ę C
w

N
4

CN11A CN11B CN2 TB

228
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

D A20B–1003–0920

CN10
Ę Ę Ę
+B –B 0B

Ę 0V

C
N
6

om
C
N
5
+24V Ę

r.c
Ę 0V
+5V Ę
+15V Ę Ę 0V
Ę –15V C
0V Ę Ę 0V N

e
4

nt CN13 CN11A CN11B CN2 TB

ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

229
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

D A16B–2201–0010
A16B–2201–0440
0V +24V +15V –15V +5V
Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Display part

Setting
switch

ROM

ST2

om
CN10

ST1

r.c
C

e
N
12
S2 S3
nt
ce
C
N
TB
14
nc
.c

CNA/TOP
w

CN13 CN11A CN11B CN2/BOTTOM

w
w

230
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.4 Spindle setting and tuning screen is not used at the Power Mate–F or
DPL/MDI
SPINDLE SETTING
AND TUNING
SCREEN

6.4.1 1. Confirm the parameters

Display Method
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SPS

om
#1 (SPS) 0 : Spindle tunign screen is not displayed.
l 1 : Spindle tuning screen is displayed.
2. Press SYSTEM key.

r.c
3. Press soft key .
4. Press soft key [SP–PRM] and the spindle tuning screen is displayed.
5. The following screens are available and they can be selected by soft
key.

e
1) [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen
2) [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen
nt
3) [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen
ce
6.4.2
Spindle Setting Screen
SPINDLE SETTING
GEAR SELECT : 1
nc

SPINDLE : S11

(PARAMETER)
GEAR RATIO 50
MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
.c

MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000

w

D Gear select Shows gear selected on the machine side.

w

Display CTH1 CTH2

w

1 0 0
2 0 1
3 1 0
4 1 1

231
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

D Parameter
S11:1st Main
Gear ratio(HIGH) 4056
Gear ratio(MIDIUM HIGH) 4057
Gear ratio(MIDIUM LOW) 4058
Gear ratio(LOW) 4059
Max. spindle rpm (Gear1) 3741
Max. spindle rpm (Gear2) 3742
Max. spindle rpm (Gear3) 3743

om
Max. motor speed 4020

6.4.3
Spindle Tuning Screen

r.c
SPINDLE TUNING

OPERATION : NORMAL OPERATION

GEAR SELECT : 1
SPINDLE : S11

e
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
PROP.GAIN 20 MOTOR SPEED 100
INT.GAIN 50 SPINDLE SPEED 150
nt MOTOR VOLT
REGE. POWER
30
100
ce
D Operation mode
1 : Normal operation
2 : Spindle Orientation
nc

3 : Rigid tapping
.c
w
w
w

232
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

D Display of parameter Display of parameter contents changes depending on operation mode.

Normal
Orientation Rigid tapping
operation
Proportional gain f f f
Integral gain f f f
Position loop gain – f f
Motor voltage f f f
Regenerative power f – –
ZRN gain % – – f
Shift reference point – f f

om
Shift spindle stop pos. – f –
ORAR gain (%) – f –

Refer to Subsec. 6.4.5 for correspondence between operation mode and

parameters.

r.c
D Display of monitor Display of monitor contents changes depending on operation mode.
Normal
Orientation Rigid tapping
operation

e
Motor speed f f f
Spindle speed f f f
nt
Position deviation S1
Position deviation Z
Synchronous deviation
–
–
–
f
–
–
f
f
f
ce
Spindle data
1) Motor speed [rpm] + Max. Motor rpm.(*)
16383
(*) PRM 4020: Main Sp.
PRM 4196: Sub. Sp.
nc
.c
w
w
w

233
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

6.4.4
Spindle Monitor Screen SPINDLE MONITOR SCREEN
ALARM : AL–27(POSITION CODER DIS.)
OPERATION : NORMAL OPERATION
SPINDLE SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM

0 50 100 150 200

LOAD METER (%)
JJJJJ
CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESP

om
CONTROL OUTPUT : SST SDT ORAR

D Spindle alarm 1: Motor overheated

2: Speed deviation excessive
3: Fuse blow of DC link

r.c
4: Fuse blow of AC inputline
5: Fuse blow of DC voltage
7: Excessive speed
9: Heat sink overheat
10: Low voltage of AC input

e
11: Excess voltage in DC link
12: Excess current in DC link
nt
13: CPU internal data memory error
18: ROM SUM check error
19: U phase current offset excessive
ce
20: V phase current offset excessive
24: Serial data transmission abnormal and stop
25: Serial data transmission stop
27: Position coder signal disconnection
nc

29: Short time overload

30: Input circuit excess current
31: Speed detecting signal disconnection
32: SLC LSI internal RAM abnormal
.c

33: DC link charging insufficient

34: Parameter abnormal setting
35: Gear ratio data excessive
w

36: Error counter overflow

37: Speed detecting unit error setting
38: Magnetic sensor signal abnormal
w

41: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal

42: Undetection of the position coder one revolution signal
46: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal on
w

threading
47: Abnormal position coder signal
48: Erroneous detection of position coder one revolution signal

234
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

D Operation Following 6 modes are available:

a. Normal operation
b. Orientation
c. Rigid tapping
D Load meter The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.
1) Load meter[%] + Load meter data timesMax.output value
32767
of load meter (*)

(*) PRM 4127: Main

om
PRM 4274: Sub.

D Control input signal Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
TLML : Torque limit command (low) SPSL : Spindle selection signal
TLMH : Torque limit command (high) MCFN : Power line switching

r.c
CTH1 : Gear signal 1 SOCN : Soft start/stop cancel
CTH2 : Gear signal 2 RSL : Output switching request
SRV : Spindle reverse rotation RCH : Power line state confirm
SFR : Spindle forward rotation INDX : Orientation stop pos.

e
ORCM : Spindle orientation change
MEDY : Machine ready ROTA : Rotation direction of
ARST : Alarm reset signal ORCM
nt
*ESP : Emergency stop NRRO
INTG
:
:
Shor–cut of ORCM
Speed integral control
signal
ce
DEFM : Referencial mode
command

D Control output signals Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
nc

ALM : Alarm signal TML5 : Torque limitation

SST : Speed zero signal ORAR : Orientation end signal
SDT : Speed detecting signal CHP : Power line switched signal
SAR : Speed arrival signal CFIN : Spindle switch complete
LDT1 : Load detecting signal 1 RCHP : Output switch signal
.c

LDT2 : Load detecting signal 2 RCFN : Output switch complete

signal
w
w
w

235
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

6.4.5
Correspondence
Between Operation
Mode and Parameters
on Spindle Tuning
Screen

om
D Speed control mode Numerals are parameter numbers :
(Normal mode)
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4040
Proportional gain (LOW) 4041
Integral gain(HIGH) 4048

r.c
Integral gain(LOW) 4049
Motor voltage 4083
Regenerative power 4080

e
D Spindle orientation mode Numerals are parameter numbers :
nt
Proportional gain(HIGH)
Proportional gain (LOW)
Integral gain(HIGH)
4042
4043
4050
ce
Integral gain(LOW) 4051
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4060
Position loop gain (MID,HIGH) 4061
nc

Position loop gain (MID,LOW) 4062

Position loop gain(LOW) 4063
Motor voltage 4084
Change of position gain 4064
.c

Stop position shift amount 4077

Orientation by PC method 4031
w

D Rigid tapping mode Numerals are parameter numbers :

w

Proportional gain(HIGH) 4044

Proportional gain (LOW) 4045
Integral gain(HIGH) 4052
w

Integral gain(LOW) 4053

Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065
Position loop gain (MID,HIGH) 4066
Position loop gain (MID,LOW) 4067
Position loop gain(LOW) 4068
Motor voltage 4085
ZRN gain % 4091
Grid shift amount 4073

236
B–62835EN/01 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.5 Standard parameters those are specific to each motor model can be set at
a time by this operation.
AUTOMATIC Note that, however, depending on the conditions under which a motor is
SETTING OF used, the machine tool builder may determine unique values to the
STANDARD parameters.
Therefore, always set the parameters (No.4000 and later) according to the
PARAMETER
parameter list attached to the machine.

1. Turn on power under emergency stop condition.

2. Set PRM4019#7 to 1.

om
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 LDSP

#7(LDSP) Serial interface spindle parameters are:

0: Not set automatically.
l 1: Set automatically.

r.c
3. Set a motor model code.

e
4133 Motor model code

nt Code Motor model Code Motor model

ce
0 3S (1500/6000rpm) 10 18P (750/6000rpm)
1 6S (1500/6000rpm) 11 22P (750/6000rpm)
2 8S (1500/6000rpm) 12 40P (575/4500rpm)
3 12S (1500/6000rpm) 13 30P (575/4500rpm)
4 15S (1500/6000rpm) 14 50P (575/4500rpm)
nc

5 18S (1500/4500rpm) 15 1S (3000/8000rpm)

6 30S (1150/4500rpm) 16 1.5S (1500/8000rpm)
7 8P (750/6000rpm) 17 2S (1500/8000rpm)
8 12P (750/6000rpm) 18 3S (1500/6000rpm)
9 15P (750/6000rpm) 23 0.5S (3000/8000rpm)
.c

4. Turn off power once, then turn it on again.

w

“PLoAd” is displayed on the spindle amplifier PCB and the standard

parameters are read.
w
w

237
7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

7 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

This chapter describes connection between the analog interface spindle

amplifier, block diagram, setting method of standard parameters and
function confirmation procedure of the spindle amplifier.

om
7.1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL
(ANALOG INTERFACE)
7.2 TABLE OF TEST POINTS

r.c
7.3 SETTING PARAMETERS (DIGITAL AC SPINDLE)
7.4 SETTING STANDARD PARAMETERS
7.5 LIST OF PARAMETER
7.6 TUNING AFTER REPLACING PCB

e
(S SERIES AC SPINDLE)
nt The following specification number is printed on the spindle unit
for the analog interface spindle amplifier.
ce
A06B–6059–Hxxx (xxx is any)
nc
.c
w
w
w

238
B–62835EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

7.1
GENERAL OF
SPINDLE CONTROL
(ANALOG
INTERFACE)

7.1.1
Block Diagram

om
S command M command

PMC
NC
M03 to M05, M06, M19
CW/CCW command

r.c
Spindle speed orientation
conversion
Auxiary function end
Motor speed FIN
*SSTP Spindle stop
Gear 1 Gear 2
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O

e
Gear selection

nt S
ce
Max. spindle speed, etc.
PRM3714 to 3743, 3735
3736, 3751, 3752(M series)
PRM3741 to 3744(T series)
nc

*ESP, MRDY SAR, LDT

SFR, SRV SST, ORAR
Position coder interface D/A converter ORCM, TLM SDT, ALM
.c

PRM 3730 (Gain)

PRM 3731 (Offset)
w

SVC DV
w

RV
w

Spindle amp.
I/O card or I/O unit

Spindle Operatior’s
panel Load meter
PC motor
LM

Speed
Spindle SM meter

239
7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

7.1.2
Calculation of S Analog
Voltage and Associated
Parameters 1 Gear change method A(PRM3705#2=0)
SVC Motor speed
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
(4095) 10V Max

om
PRM 3736

r.c
PRM 3735
0V S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)

e
2 Gear change method B(PRM3705#2=1)
SVC Motor speed

(4095) 10V
PRM 3736
Max
nt Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
ce
PRM 3752

PRM 3751
nc

PRM 3735
0V S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)
.c

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM
w

TCW CWM Sign of output voltage

0 0 + with M03 or M04
w

0 1 – with M03 or M04

1 0 + with M03, – with 04
w

1 1 – with M03, + with M04

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 SGB

#2 (SGB) Spindle speed taken when gear is changed is

0: Max. speed for each gear
1: Set by respective parameters (PRM542, 543, 585, 586)

240
B–62835EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3742 Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3743 Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3736 Upper limit of the output to the spindle motor

3735 Lower limit of the output to the spindle motor

Spindle speed Z(upper limit/lower limit)

Set value= 4095
Max. spindle speed

om
7.1.3 Gear 1 is used in the following explanation, although any gear may be
Tuning S Analog applied.
For the T series, select gear 1 manually or an M code.
Voltage (D/A Converter)
(1) Change upper and lower limit as follows:

r.c
D For gear change method A: PRM 3736=4095, PRM 3735=0
D For gear change method B: PRM 3751=4095, PRM 3735=0
This is not required for T series.
(2) Tuning offset of D/A converter

e
Command spindle speed 0 and tune the following prameter so that
voltage at test point DA2 on the spindle amplifier PCB becomes 0mV.
nt S0 ; (Command by MDI operation and press the cycle start button)
ce
DGN 3731 Spindle speed (D/A converter) offset compensation value

(3) Tune the gain of D/A converter

Command the maximun spindle speed of gear 1 and tune the
nc

following parameter so that voltage at test point DA2 on the spindle

amplifier PCB becomes 10.0V.
S ; ( is a value of parameter 3741)
.c

(Specify by MDI operation and press the cycle start button.)

w

DGN 3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1–9999) [rpm]

Usually a voltage is output from the D/A converter by only an S command

w

execution. However, CW rotation command (M03) may be required on

some machines.
(4) If the output voltage is not correct, perform the following calculation,
w

change the value of parameter no. 3730 and tune the gain of D/A
converter.
10V
Setting value= measured voltage (Current value of PRM 3730)

(5) Execute an S command again and confirm that the output voltage is
correct.

Return the parameters to the previous values.

241
7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

7.2
TABLE OF TEST
POINTS

7.2.1
Model 1S to 3S Name Signal Remarks

(Amp. Specification : DA2 Analog speed command 0 to +10V, Rated speed at 10V

om
voltage (SVC)
A06B-6059-H00x) PA Pulse generator output 90° advance by PB at CW rotation
A–phase Vp–p =0.36–0.5V
PB Pulse generator output 90° delay by PA at CW rotation
B–phase Vp–p =0.36–0.5V

r.c
RA A–phase standard voltage +2.5VDC "0.2V
RB B–phase standard voltage +2.5VDC "0.2V
PAP A phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)
PBP B phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)

e
TSA Speed feedback signal "10V at rated max. speed of motor
(CW:+,CCW:–)
nt
TS2

TS3
Low–speed detection
signal
Speed pulse F/V conver-
Adjustment of each model by RV6

At CCW (forwar rotation)

ce
sion signal 6000rpm, –4.65 to –6.15V
VCMD Speed command voltage 0 to "10V,(CCW:+, CW: – )
FWP CCW rotation pulse Pulse width=3.2µs, occurs only at CCW
(forward rotation)
nc

RVP CW rotation pulse Pulse width=3.2µs, occurs only at CW

(backward rotation)
ER Error voltage –4.2 to +4.8V
CLK1 Clock signal 2.5MHz, duty 50%
.c

SLIP Slip pulse

VDC DC link voltage signal Voltage 1/100 of DC link voltage
DTDC DC form voltage of input Voltage 1/100 of DC form voltage of input
w

AC voltage AC voltage
IU U–phase current detection
signal 22.2 A/V
w

IV V–phase current detection

signal
w

IW W–phase current detection

signal
+24V +24V DC voltage About 23V "4%
+15V +15V DC voltage +15V"4%
+5V +5V DC voltage +5V"4%
–15V –15V DC voltage –15V"4%
0V
SM Speed meter signal At maximum rated max. rotation +10V
LM Loadmeter signal At maximum rated max. output +10V

242
B–62835EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

7.2.2
Name Signal contents Remarks
Models 6S to 26S
DA2 Analog speed command 0 to +10V, Rated speed at 10V
(Amp. specification:
voltage (SVC)
A06B–6059–H2xx) PA Pulse generator output 90° advance by PB at CW rotation
A–phase Vp–p=0.36–0.5V
PB Pulse generator output 90° delay by PA at CW rotation
B–phase Vp–p=0.36–0.5V
RA A–phase standard voltage +2.5VDC "0. 2V

om
RB B–phase standard voltage +2.5VDC "0. 2V
PAP A phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)
PBP B phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio)
TSA Speed feedback signal At maximum rated max. rotation
"10V(CW:+,CCW:–)

r.c
TS2 Low–speed detection At CCW (forward rotation)
signal 22.5rpm , –1.4V"0.3V
TS3 Speed pulse F/V converi- At CCW (forward rotation)
son signal 6000 rpm , –4.65 to –6.15V

e
VCMD Speed command voltage 0X"10V, (CCW:+, CW: – )
TSAF CCW rotation speed At CCW (forward rotation)
nt
TSAR
detection signal
CW rotation speed
detection signal
6000 rpm , 0. 82V "82mv
At CW (backward rotation)
6000 rpm , 0. 82V "82mv
ce
ER Error voltage –4.2 to +4.8V
CLK1 Clock signal 2. 5MHz , duty 50%
SLIP Slip pulse
VDC DC link voltage signal Voltage 1/100 of DC link voltage
nc

SDC Control power DC link Voltage 1/100 of control power DC link

voltage voltage
ADIN A/D converter input signal
IU U–phase current detection
.c

signal Model 6S to 12S 15S to 22S 26S

IV V–phase current detection
Current 33.3 A/V 66.6 A/V 83.3 A/V
signal value
w

IW W–phase current detec-

tion signal
"4%
w

+24V +24V DC voltage About 23V

+15V +15V DC voltage +15V"4%
+5V +5V DC voltage +5V"4%
w

–15V –15V DC voltage –15V"4%

0V
*RGHLD Regenerative stop signal

243
7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

7.2.3 Check
Waveform Remarks
terminal
Test Points Signal
+10V +10V at maxi-
Waveform
mum rated rota-
DA2
0V tion
(0V at 0 rpm)
+10V
VCMD At CCW
0V (Minus for re-
verse rotation)

om
0V
TSA Speed feedback
–10V voltage
(Pulse for re-
0V verse rotation)
TS3

r.c
–5.0V F/V converter
output
+4. 8V (Pluse for re-
verse rotation)
ER
0V

e
Velocity devi-
ation voltage
–4.2V

PA
nt0.36
PB PA

+2.5V
Pulse generator
output

Phase differ-
ce
PB to 0.5V ence between
PA and PB is
0V 90°.
RA
nc

RB 2.5V"0.2V

Nominal voltage
0V
.c

PAP +4 to +4. 5V

0V
0V
w

PBP Signal formed

by PA/PB
w

Peak
IU
0V Current feed-
w

back signal of
each phase
IV 0V

Peak value is
IW
0V proportional to
current value
200ns 200ns
+4V Clock
CLK1
2. 5MHz
0V

244
B–62835EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

7.3
SETTING Parameters can be set and confirmed PCB
through the display and the setting switch
PARAMETERS on the PCB.
(DIGITAL AC Display

SPINDLE) Display Setting

switch

Setting
switch

om
r.c
1. If the PCB is mounted a jumper SH, set it to SET.
DATA ⇑ DOWN
2. Press the setting switch MODE , SET , UP and ⇓ at the
same time for more than 1 second and when the display shows FFFFF,

e
release the buttons.
3. Press the MODE button and a parameter (mode) no. is displayed.
nt
4. Press and hold the MODE button and press the
⇑
UP or DOWN
⇓
ce
button, then the number increases or decreases by 1.
5. Value of parameter is shown on the display in 4 digits about 0.5 second
after the MODE button is released.
nc

⇑
6. Value of parameter increases by one by UP button and decreases
DOWN
by one by ⇓ button.
.c

7. Perform the same operation for another parameters.

8. Press DATA button at last.
SET
w

When the display shows 88888, the setting value is stored in memory.
w

* If you turn off power before pressing DATA button, the values of
SET

parameters return to the previous values.

w

245
7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

7.4
SETTING STANDARD
The standard parameters are stored in ROM. If the pa-
PARAMETERS
rameter list attached to the machine is lost or when an
accident occurs and no parameter can be set, perform
the setting of standard parameters.
Also when a ROM is replaced with different maximum
speed applied to different motor model, perform the fol-
lowing procedure.
However, since the standard parameters are set to

om
each motor, some parameters must be modified by the
parameter list according to the machine’s unique char-
acteristics.

r.c
1. Turn off power.
2. Set jumper S1 on the PCB to TEST.

e
3. If the PCB is provided with jumper SH, set it to SET.
4. Turn on power and confirm that display shows 00000, 11111, ..., and
nt FFFFF repeatedly.

5. Press the setting switch MODE ,

DATA
SET ,
⇑
UP and
DOWN
⇓ at the
ce
same time for more than 1 second and when the display shows FFFFF,
release the buttons.
6. Press the MODE button and the display shows FC–00.
nc

DOWN
7. Press and hold the MODE button and press ⇓ button to display

FC–22 on the display and release the MODE button. (Display changes
.c

to that of step 4)
Other number shows other meaning, therefore select the number
correctly.
w

8. Press DATA button more than one second.

SET
w

9. When the display shows GOOD, the standard parameters have been
set correctly.
10.Turn power off and set jumper S1 and SH to the DRIVE side.
w

11.Modify the standard parameters those are specific to the machine or

the PCB as required. Refer to 7.6 “Tuning after replacing PCB”.

246
B–62835EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

7.5
LIST OF PARAMETER
No. Contents Setting
value

F–00 The speed of the motor is displayed. (rpm)

F–01 Machine ready signal (MRDY) is 0: not used 1: used

* F–02 Spindle speed override is 0: not used 1: used

om
*
F–03 Upper limit of speed override is 0: 100% 1: 120%

F–04 none

* F–05 Setting of maximum speed Standard High–speed

r.c
0 Max. 5000 Max. 10000
Standard : 256p/ rev (Detector I)
1 Max. 6000 Max.12000
High–speed : 128p/ rev (Detector II) 2 Max. 15000
3 Max. 20000

F–06

e
Setting of output limit pattern

Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Content

nt
0
1
2
0
4
5
The output is not limit
Limited at acc./dec. time
Limited under normal operation
ce
3 6 Limited under all operation

Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Output Output
nc

Speed Speed
.c

Nb Nb
Nb: Base speed

F–07 Limit value at output limited (The max. rated output is 100)
w

F–08 Delay time to motor power interruption (Standard setting 40msec)

w

Excitation interruption of motor power using MRDY signal is

F–09
0: not used 1: used

F–10 Adjustment of speed error offset at the time of the forward rotation command
w

F–11 Adjustment of speed error offset at the time of the reverse rotation command

F–12 Adjustment of speed error offset at the time of the orientation command

*
F–13 Speed at forward rotation command (Model 1S to 3S is RV1)

Parameters marked with *does not exist in models 1S to 3S.

247
7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

Setting
No. Contents value

* F–14 Speed at reverse rotation command (Refer to RV2 for Models 1S to 3S)

F–15 Motor peed when spindle speed command voltage is 10V

(Setting value=Speed/100)

F–16 Detection range of speed arrival signal(SAR)

( Detection range=command speed setting value % )
F–17 Detection range of speed detecting signal (SDT)
(Maximum speed) (Setting data % )

F–18 Torque limit value when the torque limit signal (TLMH) is turned on

om
F–19 Acceleration /deceleration time (Setting value=(Acceleration time [sec]) 2)

F–20 Limit of regenerative power

F–21 Speed control phase compensation P : HIGH gear (CTH=1)

r.c
F–22 Speed control phase compensation P : LOW gear (CTH=0)

F–23 Speed control phase compensation P in orientation : HIGH gear (CTH=1)

F–24 Speed control phase compensation P in orientation : LOW gear (CTH=0)

e
F–25 Speed control phase compensation I : HIGH gear (CTH=1)

F–26

F–27
nt
Speed control phase compensation I : LOW gear (CTH=0)

Speed control phase compensation I in orientation : HIGH gear (CTH=1)

ce
F–28 Speed control phase compensation I in orientation : LOW gear (CTH=0)

* F–29 Speed detection offset (Refer to RV3 for models 1S to 3S)

nc

F–30 Display of motor speed (value is 1 when rigid tapping is used)

F–31 Setting of rigid tap mode

F–32 Motor voltage at normal operation

.c

F–33 Motor voltage in orientation

F–34 Motor voltage in rigid tap mode

w

F–35 Setting of detection ragne of zero–speed signal (SST) (The detection

range=(maximum speed) (The setting data/100))
w

F–36 Detection range of load detection signal (LDT)

* F–37 Time constant of torque deviation at deceleration start

w

Characteristics of control in deceleration

F–38
(When the gear noises at deceleration, set the data to 1)

F–39 Characteristics of control in stable rotation with no load

(When the motor speed may undulate in the stable rotation , set the data to 1)
Characteristics of control in torque limitation
F–40
(When using mechanical orientation)

Parameters marked with * does not exist in models 1S to 3S.

248
B–62835EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

Following are the parameters relating to the motor characteristics.

Therefore, do not change the settings.
If you changed these parameter, perform the standard setting of the
parameters.
Setting
No. Content value

F–41 Current loop I gain

F–42 Slip compensation constant

om
F–43 Slip constant

F–44 Voltage compensation

F–45 PWM maximum amplitude

r.c
F–46 Second current command

F–47 Current assumed constant

e
F–48 Fixed torque point

F–49 Excitation weak point

nt
F–50 Voltage conversion constant
ce
F–51 Selection of speed detector

F–52 Current conversion constant

F–53 Current loop P gain

nc
.c
w
w
w

249
7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) B–62835EN/01

7.6
TUNING AFTER 1. Set jumpers on the PCB to the previous satate.
2. Check whether ROM is mounted or not and confirm version of ROM.
REPLACING PCB
If ROM is not mounted or ROM series is different, remove the ROM
(S SERIES AC from the old PCB and mount it on new PCB.
SPINDLE) 3. Install the PCB to the unit and set the system to the emergency stop
state. Then turn on power and measure voltage on the PCB.
Test points Rating
+24V About 23V "4%

om
+15V +15V "4%
+5V +5V "2% .For the amplifiers for
models 1S to 3S, RV4 can
–15V –15V "2% be used to adjust +5 V.
4. If the PCB mounts jumper SH, set it to SET.

r.c
(Depending on version of PCB, there is no jumper SH.)
5. Confirm that jumper S1 is set to DRIVE and turn on power.
DATA ⇑ DOWN
6. Press MODE , SET , UP and ⇓ buttons at the same time

e
for more than one second to enable writing parameters.
When the display shows FFFFF , it is a state that parameters can be
nt
written.
7. Set parameters according to the parameter list attached to the machine.
⇑
ce
1) When you press and hold MODE button and press UP or

DOWN
⇓ key, you can change parameter number.
nc

⇑ DOWN
2) When you press UP or ⇓ key without pressing MODE
key, you can change the values of parameters.
8. After you have completed the setting of parameters, release the
.c

emergency stop, rotate the spindle at a low speed to see whether

problem does not occur.
* At first, check from low speed to midium speed.
w

* You should be ready to press the emergency stop button to escape

from accidental problem.
9. Turn off rotation commands to make fine adjustment of the PCB.
w

The PCB for model 1S to 3S mounts the following volumes.

RV1 Adjusting forward rotation
w

speed Used for fine adjustment of max.

RV2
speed
Adjusting reverse rotation
speed
RV3 Adjusting velocity detec- Set check terminal TS3 to 0mV at stop.
tion circuit offset
RV4 Adjusting +5V Adjust +5V"0.1V
RV5 Gain when changing a Standard setting 50 %
gain
RV6 Velocity detection circuit Do not change setting
gain at low speed

250
B–62835EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE)

10.Measure test point TS3 with a digital tester and adjust parameter
F–29 so that it becomes 0mV at a stop state.
Adjust this item with volume RV3(velocity detection circuit offset
adjustment) on the PCB for models 1S to 3S.
11.Execute spindle speed command S0 and spindle forward command
M03. Tune offset speed by parameter F–10 so that the spindle does
not rotate by M03. In some machines, rotational direction of motor
and M03 are reverse. Therefore, if motor speed does not change with

om
M03, command M04.
12.Execute spindle speed command S0 and spindle reverse command
M04. Tune offset speed by parameter F–11 so that the spindle does
not rotate by M04.

r.c
13.When the orientation function is equipped, execute orientation
command M19 or perform orientation by a manual operation.
Tune F–12 so that INPOS–FINE (magnetic sensor method) or

e
INPOS–ADJUST(position coder method) is lit when an orientation
completes.
nt
14.Tune F–12 so that motor speed becomes that specified by a
command duning forward rotation.
ce
* When you halt the setting switch operations, the display shows
5–digit motor speed in a few seconds and you confirm the speed.
For model 1S to 3S, tune this item by volume RV1 (forward rotation
speed adjustment) on the PCB.
nc

15.Tune F–14 so that motor speed becomes that specified by a

command during reverse rotation.
For model 1S to 3S, tune this item by volume RV2 (reverse rotation
.c

speed adjustment) on the PCB.

DATA
16.Press SET button for more than one second to memorize
w

parameters.When they are memorized, the display shows 88888 .

DATA
w

Note 1)If you turn off power without pressing SET button, the
parameters become invalid.
w

CAUTION
This operation cannot be accepted when a rotation
command is specified.
Always perform this operation with the spindle stopped.

17.Turn off the power and return jumper S1 and SH to DRIVE.

251
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8 TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.

om
8.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES
8.2 POWER CANNOT BE TURNED ON
8.3 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED
8.4 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE

r.c
8.5 HANDLE OPERATION (MPG) CAN NOT BE DONE
8.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE
8.7 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF

e
8.8 WHEN MANIPULATION IS NOT POSSIBLE WITH
THE CRT/MDI
nt 8.9

8.10
ALARM 85 TO 87
(READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM)
REFERENCE POSITION DEVIATES
ce
8.11 ALARM 90
(REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL)
8.12 ALARM 300
nc

(REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN)

8.13 ALARM 301 TO 305
(ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY)
8.14 ALARM 306 TO 308
.c

(ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW)

8.15 ALARM 350
w

(SERIAL PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL)

8.16 ALARM 351
w

(SERIAL PULSE CODER COMMUNICATION IS

ABNORMAL)
8.17 ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD)
w

8.18 ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF)

8.19 ALARM 404 AND 405
(*DRDY ON, REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
ABNORMAL)
8.20 ALARM 410
(EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT
DURING STOP)

252
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.21 ALRAM 411

(EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE)
8.22 ALARM 414
(DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL)
8.23 ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM)
8.24 ALARM 417
(DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL)
8.25 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE)

om
8.26 ALARM 749
(SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR)
8.27 ALARM 750
(SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED)
8.28 ALARM 751 (SPINDLE ALARM)

r.c
8.29 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR)
8.30 ALARM 910 TO 911 (RAM PARITY)
8.31 ALARM 920 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY)

e
8.32 ALARM 924
(SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR)
nt 8.33 ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR)
8.34 ALARM 950 OR 951 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM)
8.35 ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC MODULE)
ce
8.36 ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC)
8.37 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE)
nc

NOTE
The following example describes the addressing of two
Power Mate–D axes. In a 2–path Power Mate–D, each path
corresponds to one axis. For the G and F addresses, the
.c

first path corresponds to the first–axis address, and the

second path corresponds to an address 1000 greater than
the first–axis address. The Power Mate–F corresponds to
w

the first–axis address.

Example)
#1 #0
w

G130 *IT2 *IT1

Two–axis Power Mate–D :G130#0. #1

w

Single–axis Power Mate–D :G130#0

2–path Power Mate–D :G130#0 (first path)
:G1130#0 (second path)
Power Mate–F: G130#0

253
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.1 When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of

failure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the
CORRECTIVE machine.
ACTION FOR Check for the failure according to the following procedure :
FAILURES
When? With what What failure?
operation?

Grasp the kind of failure

±
Appropriate action

om
±
Recovery

8.1.1

r.c
Investigating the (1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)
(2) With what operation
Conditions Under (3) What failure occurred
Which Failure

e
Occurred 1 When did the failure occur?
D Date and time?
D Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)
nt
D Occurred when the power was turned on?
D Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances
to the power supply?
ce
How many times has it occurred
D Only once?
D Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per
month?)
nc

2 With what operation did it occur ?

D What was the Power Mate mode when the failure occurred?
(Jog mode/AUTO operation mode /MDI mode /reference position
return mode)
.c

D If during program operation,

1) Where in the program ?
2) Which program No. and sequence No. ?
w

3) What program ?
4) Occurred during axial movement ?
w

5) Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ?

6) Failure specific to the program ?
D Does the same operation cause the same failure ?
w

(Check the repeatability of the failure.)

D Occurred during data input/output ?
<Feed axes and spindle>
D For a failure related to feed axis servo
1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ?
2) Ocurred only for a certain axis ?
D For a failure related to spindles
When did the failure occur ? (during power–on, acceleration,
deceleration, or constant rotation)

254
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

3 What failure occurred ?

D Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen on the
CRT?
(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for alarms 300
to 599.)
D For alarm 350: Examine diagnostic 202
For alarm 351: Examine diagnostic 203
For alarm 414: What does diagnostic display 200,201,204
indicate ?
D For alarm 751 or 761 : Which spindle alarm is indicated ?
(indicated by AL–XX (XX is a number))

om
D Is the CRT screen correct ?
D If machining dimensions are incorrect
1) How large is the error ?
2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?
3) Are the offsets correct ?

r.c
4 Other information
D Is there noise origin around machine?
If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be external
noise to the power supply or inductive noise on machinery cables.

e
Operate other machines connected to the same power line and see
if noise come from the relays or compressors.
D Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?
nt
D Check the following for the input power supply voltage :
1) Is there variation in the voltage ?
2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ?
ce
3) Is the standard voltage supplied ?
D How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit?
(0_C to 55_C during operation)
Refer to manual about noise.
nc

D Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit?

(0.5 G or less during operation)
5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items :
1) Name of the unit
.c

2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine

3) Software series/version of the Power Mate
4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor
w

(for a failure related to the servo)

5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor
(for a failure related to a spindle)
w

6) Name and contact of the person who is most familiar with the
failure conditions
(for a failure related to the servo)
w

D See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for the
locations of the Power Mate and servo/spindle amplifiers.
D We use the following specification codes :
Servo/Spindle amplifier : A06B–VVVV–HVVV
Servo/Spindle motor : A06B–VVVV–BVVV
(V represents a number)

The above information is required by FANUC to determine

the cause of the failure. The information is used to
attempt to reproduce the failure at the service center.

255
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.2
POWER CANNOT BE
TURNED ON
Points Confirm the green LED EN on the front of controller.
When green LED EN is turned on, power of Power Mate is ON.
Causes and Remedies
(1) Fuse F1 on the controller front panel is blown.
(a) Input power voltage is too high.

om
(b) External 24DCV power supply is faulty.
(c) 24–V power line short–circuit (line–to–line or line–to–ground)
(2) Input voltage is low
Measure voltage at S terminals of 0V and 24V to confirm 24VDC "100
% is supplied.

r.c
If it is not normal, check machine side magnetics circuit.
(3) Power supply printed board in controller is faulty.
When 24 V is found to be input normally in step (2), but 5 V is not output
to the 0 V and 5 V terminals, the power PCB in the controller may be

e
defective.
(4) Power leakage from other units
ntDisconnect all cables other than the power cable of the Power Mate,
then retry.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

256
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.3
NO MANUAL OPERA-
TION NOR AUTOMAT-
IC OPERATION CAN
BE EXECUTED
Points (1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position

om
(3) Check Power Mate status display
(4) Check Power Mate internal status using diagnostic function
Causes and
Countermeasures

r.c
1. Position display (1) Check CNC status display (Refer to 2.10 NC STATUS DISPLAY
(relative, absolute, FOR DETAIL)
machine coordinate) (a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on)
does not change If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is

e
input. Check the following signal using the PMC’s diagnostic
function (PMCDGN).
nt
X1000
1 When built in I/O card is used.
#7 #6 #5
*ESP
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
G0008 *ESP

ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.

2 When emergency stop is input from I/O card
(Parameter No.3001#3=1). (FANUC I/O Link)
nc

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 *ESP

G0008 *ESP
.c

ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.

(b) It is a reset status
When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned. Check
w

the following signal using the PMC’s diagnostic funciton

(PMCDGN).
1 An input signal from the PMC functions
w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS RRW
w

When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input.

When RRW is 1, reset & rewing signal is input.
2 RESET key on the MDI keyboard functions
When the signals in 1 are 0, RESET key may be functioning.

Check the contact of RESET key using a tester.

When it is abnormal, change the keyboard.

257
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

(c) Confirm the status of modes

Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of CRT as
follows :
If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input. Check
mode select signal using PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
For details, refer to section 1.7 STATUS DISPLAY.
(Example of display)
JOG : Manual continuous feed (JOG) mode
STEP : Manual handle/Step feed (HANDLE/STEP)
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode

om
AUTO : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT : EDIT (Memory edit) mode
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

r.c
± ± ±
Manual continuous (JOG) mode 1 0 1
Manual handle/Step feed (HANDLE/STEP) mode 1 0 0

e
Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0
Automatic operation (AUTO) mode 0 0 1

nt EDIT (Memory edit) mode

TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE
TEACH IN JOG
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
ce
(2) Check diagnostic data 000 to 025 of the CNC Check an item for which
1 is displayed
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
nc

001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
a.003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
.c

004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0

b.005 INTERLOCK (Example) :1
010 PUNCHING :0
w

011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
w

c.013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0

d.014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
w

015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0

Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.

258
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)

DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826

In–positio width
1 Check the parameters according to the parameter list
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)

2 Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to alarm 400, 410, and 411.

om
b. Interlock signal is input There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX HITL ITL

r.c
#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1
#1 HITL = 1 shows interlock signal *RILK is effective. To 2
#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 3
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal "MITn is effective. To 4

e
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
nt
1 Interlock signal (*IT) is input

G0008
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*IT
ce
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.
2 High–speed interlock signal (*RILK) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc

X0000 *RILK
or
X1000

*RILK = 0 shows interlock signal is input.

.c

3 Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT2 +IT1
w

*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.

4 Interlock signal per axis and direction (+/– MITn) is input
w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0132 +MIT2 +MIT1
w

G0134 –MIT2 –MIT1

"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input.

c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes

1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.

259
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

*JV15 . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%

: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%

: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

d. Power Mate is in a reset In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using

om
state the procedure of 1 above.
2. When machine (1) Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.
coordinate value does #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
not update on position G0044 MLK
display MLK : All axes machine lock

r.c
When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal
is input.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

260
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.4
JOG OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check whether position display is operating.
(2) Check status display
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic funciton
Causes and Remedies
1. Position display (1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected)

om
(relative, absolute, When status display shows JOG, it is normal.
machine cooordinate) When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is not
does not change selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using PMC’s
diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
<Mode select signal>

r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

± ± ±

Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1

e
nt
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal
using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

G0100
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
+J2
#0
+J1
ce
G0102 –J2 –J1

Example)
When +X button is pressed on the operator’s panel, signal+J1 turns to 1.
nc

This signal is effected at its rise. If axis selection signal is input before
JOG mode is selected, axis movement does not occur. Turn the signal
to off, then on.
(3) Check CNC’s diagnostic function 000 to 015. Check the items for
.c

which 1 is displayed at right side.

No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
w

001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
w

a. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0

004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
w

b. 005 INTERLOCK (Example) :1

010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.

261
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)

DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 In–positio width

1 Check the parameters according to the parameter list
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)

2 Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to alarm 400, 410, and 411.

om
b. Interlock signal is input There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PARAM 3003 DIT ITX HITL ITL

#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1

r.c
#1 HITL = 1 shows interlock signal *RILK is effective. To 2
#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 3
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal "MITn is effective. To 4
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function

e
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
1 Interlock signal (*IT) is input
nt
G0008
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*IT

*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.

ce
2 High–speed interlock signal (*RILK) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0000 *RILK
or
nc

X1000

*RILK = 0 shows interlock signal is input.

3 Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input
.c

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT2 +IT1

*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.

w

4 Interlock signal per axis and direction (" MITn) is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w

G0132 +MIT2 +MIT1

G0134 –MIT2 –MIT1

w

"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input.

c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes

1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.

262
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

*JV15 . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%

: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%

: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

om
d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.
(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct
1423 Jog feedrate per axis

r.c
(5) Check whether a torque limit is in effect.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

263
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.5
HANDLE OPERATION
(MPG) CANNOT BE
DONE

Points (1) Check another manual operation (JOG) is accepted.

(2) Check status display
Causes and

om
Countermeasure

1 JOG operation is not Consult with Sec. 8.3 and 8.4.

acceptable, either
2 When only handle (1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the CRT

r.c
operation cannot be (Refer to 1.7 STATUS DISPLAY for details)
done When the status display shows STEP, mode selection is correct.
If it is not STEP, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function(PMCDGN).

e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

± ± ±
nt Manual handle mode

(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input

1 0 1
ce
Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0018 HS2B HS2A HS1C HS1B HS1A

When axis select switch for manual pulse generator is selected on the
nc

machine operator’s panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is

normal.
Selected axis HSnB HSnA
.c

no selection 0 0
1st axis 0 1
2nd axis 1 0

n represents the manual pulse generator (MPG) number.

w
w
w

264
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Magnification selection of manual handle feed is not correct

Check the following signals using PMC’s PCDGN. Also confirm the
following parameters based on the parameter list.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0019 MP2 MP1

± ±
MP1 MP2 Multiplication
0 0 1
0 1 10
1 0 m

om
1 1 n

7110 Number of manual pulse generators used (1 to 2)

7113 Magnification of manual handle feed m(1 to 127)

r.c
7114 Magnification of manual handle feed n(1 to 1000)

(4) Checking manual pulse generator

(a) Incorrect of cable

e
Check disconnection of cable or short circuit.
ntPower Mate
MPG (JA13)
#1 1st MPG
ce
#2 2nd MPG
nc

Manual pulse
CNC side MPG (JA13) generator
HA1 (01) (05) HA1 1st
HB1 (02) (06) HB1
(09)
.c

+5V (03) +5V

0V (12) (04) 0V
w

HA2 (03) (05) HA2 2nd

HB2 (04) (06) HB2
+5V (18) (03) +5V
w

0V (14) (04) 0V

shield
Connector:half pitch
w

20pins (HIROSE)

265
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

(b) Manual pulse generator is faulty

When you rotate the MPG, the following signal is output.
Measure the signal with synchroscope at screw terminal on back
of MPG. If no signal is output, measure +5V voltage.

Back of MPG

Screw terminal HA: A phase signal

HB: B phase signal

om
+5V 0V HA HB

Rotation in plus Rotation in minus

1:1

r.c
+5V
HA on off on off
0V
+5V
HB on off on off

e
0V

nt 1:1
1/4 phase difference 1/4 phase difference
Threshold voltage of reciever for Power Mate :
V+n (↑)=3.3V
ce
V+n (↓)=2.1V

Check on and off ratio and phase difference of HA and HB.

(5) Check of the torque limit
nc

Check whether a torque limit is in effect.

.c
w
w
w

266
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.6
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator’s manual.
(3) Check status of Power Mate.
Causes and Remedies When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure,

om
based on the previous item ”Jog operation cannot be done”.
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select status
of Power Mate status display. Also, by confirming the automatic
operation status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and
cycle stop state.

r.c
1. When cycle operation is ”****” is displayed at status display on CRT.
not started (Cycle start
(1) Mode select signal is not correct.
LED does not light)
When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status
display is done.
MDI :Manual data input mode (MDI)

e
AUTO :Automatic operation mode
RMT :Remote operation mode
nt
If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode signal
with following diagnosis function of PMC side (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 Mode select

– 0 0 0 Manual data input mode (MDI)
0 0 0 1 Memory operation mode (AUTO)
nc

1 0 0 1 Remote operation mode

(2) Cycle start signal is not input

This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0 when
it is released. The cycle start actuates when it changes from 1 to 0.
.c

Check the state of the signal using PMC’s diagnostic

function(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w

G0007 ST

#2 (ST) : Cycle start signal

w

The cycle is allowed to start by setting of parameter (No.3001#1)

when it changes from 1 to 0.
(3) Feed hold signal is input
w

Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold button
is not pressed.
Check the state of this signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) .
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP

#5 (*SP) : Feed hold signal

267
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

2. When an automatic Power Mate’s status display shows “STRT” on the CRT.
operation is in progress
(1) Check the contents of diagnostic nos. 000 to 015.
(Cycle start LED is lit)
No. Message Display
a. 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL (Example) :1
b. 001 MOTION :0
c. 002 DWELL :0
d. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
e. 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0

om
f. 005 INTERLOCK :0
g. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0

r.c
h. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
i. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to i relate with an automatic operation and their details

e
are as follows :
a. An auxiliary function is
being executed (waiting
for FIN signal)
nt
An auxiliary function (M/S/T) specified in a program is not ended.
Check according to the following procedure.
At first, confirm the kind of interface of an auxiliary function.
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 MHI

#7(MHI) 0 : M/S/T is of normal interface.

nc

1 : M/S/T is of high–speed interface.

1 Normal interface
When the auxiliary function finish signal turns from 1 to 0, the
.c

auxiliary function is supposed to be ended and the next block is read

for operation. Confirm the status of this signal using PMC’s
diagnostic function(PMCDGN).
w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 FIN

#3 (FIN) : Auxiliary function finish signal

w

2 High–speed interface
The auxiliary function is supposed to be ended when the signals are
w

in the following state. Confirm it using PMC’s diagnostic function

(PMCDGN).

268
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 TFIN SFIN MFIN

#0(MFIN) : M function finish signal

#2(SFIN) : S function finish signal
#3(TFIN) : T function finish signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0007 TF SF MF

om
#0(MF) : M function strobe signal
#2(SF) : S function strobe signal
#3(TF) : T function strobe signal
Signal End state

r.c
Finish signal 0 1
store signal 0 1

b. Travel command is being CNC is reading an axis command (X,Y,Z,...) in a program and giving the
executed command to the axis.

e
c. A dwell command is CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and is executing
being executed
d. In–position check
(confirming positioning)
nt
the dwell command.
Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis is not
completed.
ce
is being done Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the servo position
error amount. Check it CNC’s diagnostic function as follows:
DGN no.300 Position Error > PARAM 1826 In–position width
Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning of an axis
nc

completes and when the amount becomes within the in–posiiton width,
it is assumed that positioning completes and the next block is exected.
If position error amount does not become within the in–position width,
refer to servo alarm 400, 410 and 411.
.c

e. Feedrate override is at Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a programmed

0% feedrate. Check the override signals using the PMC’s diagnostic function
w

(PMCDGN).
<Normal override signal>
w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

*FVn : Feedrate override

w

<State of override signal>

*FV7@@@@@@@*FV0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 254%
: :
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%
: :
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1%
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0%

269
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

f. Interlock signal or start There are a plural number of interlock functions. Parameters are set by
lock signal is input machine tool builders for which interlock function is used.
Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX HITL ITL

#0 (ITL) 0 : Interlock signal(*IT) is valid. To 1

#1 (HITL)1 : shows interlock signal *RILK is effective. To 2
#2 (ITX) 0 : Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid. To 3
#3 (DIT) 0 : Interlock signal ("MITn) is valid. To 4

om
Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMC’s diagnostic
function (PMCDGN) .
1 Interlock signal (*IT) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

r.c
G0008 *IT

#0 (*IT) : When this bit is 0, interlock signal is input.

2 High–speed interlock signal (*RILK) is input.

e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0000 *RILK
nt
or
X1000

*RILK = 0 shows interlock signal is input.

ce
3 Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT2 *IT1
nc

*ITn When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis’s interlock signal is

input.
4 Interlock signal per axis and direction("MITn) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c

G0132 +MIT2 +MIT1

G0134 –MIT2 –MIT1

w

"MITn Interlock signal is input to the corresponding axis and

direction with the signal being 1.
w

5 Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached axis is

specified for travelling.
*This function is valid when Power Mate parameter RMB
w

No.1005#7=1. For whether this function is running or not, confirm the

following signal using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
Check the axis concerned.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0110 MDTCH2 MDTCH1

When signal MDTHn is “1” ,the axis detach function is in valid.

The control axis detach function becomes valid by the following
signal issued from the PMC or a Power Mate side parameter. Check
as in the following procedure :

270
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0124 DTCH2 DTCH1

If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached.

2) The following parameter enables the control axis detach function to
the corresponding axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx

#7(RMVx) 0 : Controlled axis is connected

om
1 : Controlled axis is detached
g. CNC is waiting for Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in a program.
spindle speed arrival Confirm the signal state using the PMC’s diagnostic function
signal to be input (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

r.c
G0029 SAR

#4(SAR) : When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the
specified speed.
This function is valid when PARAM SAR (3708#0)=1.

e
h. Manual feedrate override Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog feed.
is 0% (dry run) nt
But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an auomatic
operation,override values set with these signals become valid to the
following speed set by a parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ce
G0046 DRN

#7(DRN) : Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.

1410 Dry run rate for each axis [mm/min]
nc

The rate when the following override value is 100%.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 +JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
.c

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 +JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is

w

[1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000].

*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override
w

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%

1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
w

: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

i. Power Mate is in a reset In this case, the CNC’s status display shows RESET. Refer to item 1.
state
(1) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function Confirm
the following parameter and signals from the PMC.
(a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [mm/min]

271
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

(b) Rapid traverse override signals

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0014 ROV2 ROV1

ROV1 ROV2 Override

0 0 100%
1 0 50%
0 1 25%
1 1 Fo

om
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate [mm/min]

(2) Only feed (other than G00) does not function

(a) Maximum feed rate set by parameter is incorrect.
1422 Maximum feedrate [mm/min]

r.c
Feed rate is clamped at this upper feed rate.
(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev)
1) Position coder does not rotate

e
Check the connection between spindle and position coder
The following failure is considered:
nt D Timing belt is broken
D Key is removed
D Coupling is loose
D Connector of signal cable is loosened
ce
2) Position coder is faulty
Position coder is connected to the spindle amplifier when serial
interface spindle is used or connected to the CNC when analog
nc

interface spindle is used.

For details of connection, refer to the following.

<Serial interface spindle amplifier>

.c

(Optical I/O
SPINDLE link adapter)
Power Mate (JA11) Optical fiber Serial
spindle 200VAC
w

JD1 COP1 CN11A

JA713
w

ENC (JA12)
(Note)
Spindle
Position coder or motor
w

Don ’t connect to Built–in sensor PC

the ENC (JA12)

Spindle

272
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

<Analog interface spindle amplifier>

Control signal

Power Mate SPINDLE (JA11) Analog

200VAC
spindle
amplifier

ENC (JA12)

Spindle

om
motor
Position coder PC

Spindle

r.c
ENC (JA12) Position coder
SC (01) (B) SC
*SC (02) (P) *SC
PA (05) (A) PA

e
*PA (06) (N) *PA
PB (07) (C) PB
*PB (08) (R) *PB
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
(09)
(18)
(20)
(12)
(14)
nt (H) +5V
ce
0V (16) (K) 0V
Shield
Connector:20–pins Connector:Cannon connector
half pitch G
nc
.c
w
w
w

273
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.7
CYCLE START LED
SIGNAL HAS
TURNED OFF

Points (1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator’s panel.
(3) Confirm Power Mate’s diagnostic function

om
Causes and Remedies The reason why cycle start LED signal (STL) has turned off are displayed
on Power Mate’s diagnostic numbers 020 to 025 as follows:

020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

r.c
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

e
a. Emergency stop signal
b. External reset signal
nt c. Reset button on MDI
d. Reset & rewind signal
e. Servo alarm
ce
f. Feed hold by switching mode
g. Single block stop

Details of signals a to g are as follows:

nc

Confirm the signals concerned using diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

a. Emergency stop is input 1 When Built–in I/O is used :
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 *ESP
.c

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *ESP
w

*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :

2 When input from Buit–in I/O card :
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w

X0000 *ESP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *ESP
w

*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :

b. External reset signal is
input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS

#7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input.

This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02
when an M02 is specified in a program as the end of a
program.
Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input.

274
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

c. Reset button on the MDI An automatic operation is put into a reset status when RESET key on the
is pressed MDI panel is pressed.
d. Reset & rewind signal is
input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 RRW

#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input.
This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of
M30 when an M30 is specified in a program as the end of
a program.
Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input.

om
e. Servo alarm has When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the reset
generated state and operation stop.
f. Cycle operation is in a The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases:
feed hold state 1 Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a manual

r.c
operation mode.
2 Feed hold signal is input.
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

e
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

nt Automatic
operation
memory edit(EDIT)
Automatic operation
(AUTO)
Manual data input (MDI)
0
0

0
1
0

0
1
1

0
ce
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 0
M
Manual l Handle/Step 1 0 1
o eration
operation
TEACH IN STEP 1 1 1
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0
nc

<Feed hold signal>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
.c

#5(*SP) : When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input.

g. It become single block
stop during automatic #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w

operation G0046 SBK

#1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input.

w
w

275
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.8
WHEN
MANIPULATION IS
NOT POSSIBLE WITH
THE CRT/MDI
Points Check whether it is a trouble of display or a trouble of the system.
Judgement of the point Check the STATUS LED on the controller shows the following state.

om
EW (green) ON
WD (red) OFF
S0.SI –

If the status shows the above state, the system is normal.

r.c
Therefore, display system may be faulty.
If you have a DPL/MDI, check whether it can be used to manipulate the
system.
If the status shows other state, a hardware other than the display system

e
may be troublesome.
If the message ”WAITING FOR CRT DATA” appears on the CRT/MDI

Causes and remedies

1. When the display system
nt
unit, it indicates that the CRT/MDI unit has started normally.

(1) Confirmation item

ce
is in toruble Determine which of the following problems are evident.
1. Nothing is displayed on the CRT/MDI unit.
2. Only the message ”WAITING FOR CRT DATA” appears on the
CRT/MDI unit.
nc

3. A position display appears on the CRT/MDI unit, and the keys

are ineffective.
(2) Causes and remedies
.c

1. If nothing is displayed on the CRT/MDI unit.

D The power being supplied to the CRT/MDI unit is abnormal
(check the power supply).
D The CRT/MDI unit is defective (replace the CRT/MDI unit).
w

2. If only the message ”WAITING FOR CRT DATA” appears on the

CRT/MDI unit.
w

D Incorrect cable connection (correct)

D Defective cable (repair or replace)
D Defective CRT control module (replace)
w

D No CRT control module installed (install)

D Touch panel connection module or HSSB connection
module installed in place of the CRT control module (install
the CRT control module)
D Incorrect setting of rotary switches RSW and MTSW (correct
the setting)
3. A position display appears on the CRT/MDI unit, and the keys
are ineffective.
D DPL/MDI left connected (remove)
D Defective cable (repair or replace)

276
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) (3)

om
(4) CRT control module (3) CRT control module
A20B–2901–0480 A20B–2901–0480

r.c
A02B–0166–B001 A02B–0166–B501
A02B–0166–B520 A02B–0166–B502
A02B–0166–B531

e
2. When system is in
trouble nt EN (green)
WD (red)
ON
OFF
ce
When STATUS LED on the controller is other than above, check identify
the trouble and make an appropriate action. See Sec. 2.4 for LED display.
nc
.c
w
w
w

277
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.9
(START)
ALARM 85 TO 87
(READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ALARM) YES
Alarm 85?

NO · Check baud rate

and other I/O pa
rameters
YES · I/O device is
Alarm 86?

om
faulty

NO Is I/O pa- NO
rameter cor-
rect?

YES Set correct parameters

r.c
OFF
Is power of I/O

e
?

ON Turn on I/O device

nt Is cable connec-
NO
ce
tion right?

YES Connect the cable

· I/O device is faulty

nc

· Bace PCB is faulty

Alarm 87
.c

· I/O device is faulty

· Base PCB is faulty
w

Causes (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.

w

(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty.

(c) Cable between Power Mate and I/O device is faulty.
w

(d) Power Mate base PCB is faulty.

Countermeasures (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.

Check the following setting data and parameters:
<Setting>
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO)
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device.
If punch code does not match, alarm 86 will generate.

278
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

<Parameter>

Value of parameter
0020 0 1
Function

Feed 0101#7 0111#7

Data input code 0101#3 0111#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0
Type of I/O device 102 112
Baud rate 103 113

om
Communication method RS–232C

Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit numbers.

Example) 101#7:bit7 of parameter 101.

r.c
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
0111

#7(NFD) 0 : Feed is output before and after data in data output

e
(FANUC PPR)
1 : Feed is not output (standard).
nt
#3(ASI)

#0(SB2)
0
1
0
:
:
:
Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition)
Data input code is ASCII.
No. of stop bits is 1.
1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
ce
0102 Type of I/O device
0112
nc

Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE

0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used)
1 Not used
.c

2 FANUC CASSETTE F1 (Old type FLOPPY CASSETTE

ADAPTOR)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate,
w

FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR,

FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H,
FANUC Handy File
w

4 Not used
5 Not used
w

6 FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL G,

FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H

0103 Baud rete

0113
Value Baud rate 10 4800
7 600 11 9600
8 1200 12 19200
9 2400

279
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble

(i) Check whether the setting on communication of external I/O
device or host computer is the same as that of the Power Mate.
(baud rate, stop bits, etc.) If they are not the same, change the
setting.
(ii) When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is possible to
realize communication using the spare I/O device.
(c) Cable between Power Mate and I/O device is faulty.
Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection.

om
Controller
RS–232–C (JD5)
Punch panel

r.c
(d) Power Mate base PCB is faulty.

e
Replace the power Mate unit.

nt
< Cable connection>
RS–232–C (JD5) Punch panel
ce
RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
nc

CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
.c

+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
w

ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16)
w

(17) (07) SG
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
w

(20)
(01) FG
Shield
Connector :DBM–25S
Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins

NOTE
When CS is not used, connect it to RS.
Always use a twisted pair cable.

280
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.10
REFERENCE (START)
POSITION DEVIATES

YES
By 1 grid ?

NO Length of de- NO
celeration dog
sufficient ?

om
YES Exchange dog.
As a temporary work,
lower rapid traverse
rate in reference posi-
tion return
Does deceleration sig-
nal *DECα change

r.c
between grids ?
YES

NO

Wrong mounting position Limit switch for *DEC

e
a is faulty (variation is
large).
As a temporary work,
nt
Does machine return
to original position by
power OFF ?
NO
lower FL rate in refer-
ence position return.
ce
Confirm connection
YES between servo mo-
tor and machine

OFF
Is 5V of pulse
nc

coder correct ?

YES

· Pulse coder is
.c

faulty. *Voltage drop be-

· Servo control Confirm cable tween +5V and 0V
module or servo
should be less than
interface module
0.2V
w

is faulty.
· Base PCB is faulty.
w
w

281
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.11
ALARM 90
(REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
IS ABNORMAL)
Contents An attempt was made to return to the reference position without satisfying
the condition that, when the tool is moving toward the reference position
with a positional deviation (DGN. 300) of 128 or more pulses, at least a

om
one–turn signal is received.
Moreover, for the α absolute pulse coder, a reference position return was
attempted without first turning the power off then on again after rotating
the motor one turn when the system is started, or when the battery is
replaced in response to a battery zero alarm.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

282
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

Countermeasures

(START)

YES
α absolute pulse?

NO Ensure that, after the occur-

rence of a battery alarm (306),
the battery was restored to its
normal state, the motor was

om
rotated through at least one
turn, and that the power was
turned off then on again.

Was the
YES motor rotated through

r.c
at least one turn, and was the
power turned off then
on again?

NO
Position error Rotate the motor through at
Check whether position gain is greater than 128 pulses amount : 300 least one turn, then turn the

e
(DGN 300) before or during reference position return.
power off then on again.

128 or
more
NO
YES
nt
(1) Next page
ce
Raise the speed
Check feed rate command:
PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
nc

PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain (0.01sec–1)

F 5000/3
Position error=
G detection unit [µm/PLUSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1µm)
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is 4 on the
.c

position display screen, detection unit is 0.1 mm.

w

Check rapid traverse override signals : Override

ROV1 DGN G14.0 ROV1 ROV2
ROV2 DGN G14.1 0 0 100%
w

PRM 1421 Fo rate

1 0 50%
0 1 25%
1 1 Fo rate
w

Check reference position return deceleration signal

DEC1 DEC2
DGN X000.5, X001.5 when a built–in I/O card is used
DGN X1000.5, X1001.5 when a built–in I/O card is not used
When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed rate
becomes FL rate.
PRM 1425 FL rate

283
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

(1)

Check whether the motor ratated more than one rotation

(one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than 128 pulses
of position error amount.

NO Return start position is too close

Rotated ?
· Chagne the return start position.
· Move the machine at faster that 128
YES

om
pulses for more than one rotation to
wards RP.

Check that voltage of pulse coder is higher than 4.75 V.

To measure pulse coder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on
pulse coder PCB at across + and – or +5V and 0V terminals.

r.c
NO
More than 4.75V

YES

e
Hardware failure Pulse coder power voltage is low
nt · Pulse coder is faulty
Change pulse coder or motor
· Base printed board is faulty
· Servo module is faulty
· Caused by wire resistance
check wire material
(resistance shall be 0.5W or
less in both ways to restrict
ce
Change servo controled module or voltage drop.)
servo interface module · Pulse coder power supply is
abnormal
Change the power supply .
nc

CAUTION
1 After the pulse coder or motor is exchanged, reference
.c

position or machine’s standard point may be different from

former one. Please set it correctly.
2 When the base printed board is exchanged, all the data
w

stored in memory is lost. Reset all the data again, referring

to the data input/output item.
The data includes reference position information.
Reference position setting must also be performed,
w

therefore.
w

D Reference A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if speed is lower that
this, one–rotation signal does not function stably, causing improper
position detection.

284
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.12 Absolute position data in the serial pulse coder was lost.
[This alarm occurs if the serial pulse coder is replaced, the position
ALARM 300 feedback signal line is removed from the serial pulse coder, the battery or
(REQUEST FOR its cable is removed, or parameters are loaded into the Power Mate as a
REFERENCE batch.]
POSITION RETURN)
Remedies Machine position must be memorized using the following method:
If a battery alarm (306) occurs in the α pulse coder, recover the normal
battery status, rotate the motor through at least one turn, then turn the

om
power off then on again.
D When dog reference (1) Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for which
position return function this alarm was generated.
is present (2) Press RESET key at the end of reference position return to release the
alarm.

r.c
D When dog reference Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference
position return function position.
is not present

e
D When serial pulse coder Since the reference position is different from the former one, change the
is changed grid shift value (PRM 1850) to correct the position.
Related parameters nt
1815
#7 #6 #5
APC x
#4
APZx
#3 #2 #1 #0
ce
#5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is incremental pulse coder.
1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
#4(APZx) Reference position of absolute pulse coder is :
0 : not established
nc

1 : established

System configuration 1) Servo interface type B

Servo amp.
.c

AMPx
(JSx)
w

PC Servo motor
Built–in
battery
6V
w
w

2) Servo interface type A

Power Mate
ENCx
(JFx)

PC Servo motor
Separaty
type bat-
tery 6V

285
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.13 Absolute pulse coder, cable, servo module or base PCB is faulty.
ALARM 301 TO 305
(ABSOLUTE PULSE
CODER IS FAULTY)
Countermeasures 1 Agitate the cable connected to JSn of servo amplifier or JFn of
controler. If an alarm is issued, replace the cable.
2 Replace the base PCB.
(Power Mate–D/B501, B502, B531, Power Mate–F)

om
3 Replace the servo module (servo controled module, servo interface
module). (Power Mate–D/B001, B520)

r.c
A02B–0166–B001

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (6) Digital servo module

e
A20B–2900–0160
(7) Servo interface module
A20B–2900–0380
nt A02B–0166–B520
(6) Digital servo module
ce
A20B–2901–0340
(7) Servo interface module
A20B–2900–0380
nc
.c
w
w
w

286
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.14 This alarm is generated when absolute pulse coder battery becomes low.
If alarm 306 occurs, the reference position has been lost. After replacing
ALARM 306 TO 308 the battery, re–set the reference position.
(ABSOLUTE PULSE
CODER BATTERY IS
LOW)
Absolute pulse coder
battery replacement WARNING
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the

om
power to the machine (CNC, servo amplifier) switched on,
and hold the machine at an emergency stop. Because this
work must be carried out while the power is kept switched
on and the cabinet is open, only the personnel who have
been trained for safety are allowed to engage in the work.

r.c
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.

e
Procedure nt
Replace the batteries in the α series servo amplifier module, the β series
servo amplifier, or the separate battery box.
ce
CAUTION
1 When replacing the built–in batteries for the
series servo
amplifier module or β series servo amplifier module, keep
the power to the servo amplifier switched on.
nc

2 When replacing the batteries in the separate type battery

box, keep the power to the NC and servo amplifier switched
on.
3 Note that we are not supposed to replace the batteries for
.c

the control unit (for memory backup).

w
w
w

287
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

Procedure for replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder

(α series servo amplifier module)

1 Prepare lithium battery A06B–6073–K001(*) in advance.

(*) FANUC specification : A98L–0001–0902

2 Turn machine (servo amplifier) power ON.

om
3 Remove the battery case on the front panel of a series Servo Amp
Module (SVM).
The battery case can be removed by holding the top of the case and
pulling the case towards you.

r.c
Battery case
Connector CX5X Connector

CX5X

e
nt a series
SVM
ce
Battery
compartment

Battery
A06B–6073–K001
nc

4 Remove the connector the battery.

5 Replace the battery , and connect the connector.
6 Attach the battery case.
.c

7 Turn machine (servo amplifier) power OFF.

w

CAUTION
Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when
machine (servo amplifier) power is ON.
w

Replacing the batteries with power OFF causes the

absolute position stored in memory to be lost.
w

288
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

Procedure for replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder (β series servo amplifier)

Prepare lithium battery A02B–0168–K111(*) in advance.

(*) FANUC specification: A98L–0031–0011

Procedure 1 Turn machine (servo amplifier) power ON.

2 Remove the battery case from under the β series servo amplifier

om
module by holding the case at both sides and pulling downwards.

r.c
6V litium battery for

e
absolute pulse coder
A98L–0031–0011

nt Battery cover
A230–0533–X003
ce
nc

3 Remove the connector the battery.

4 Replace the battery, and connect the connector.
.c

5 Attach the battery case.

6 Turn machine (servo amplifier) power OFF.
w

CAUTION
1 Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when
machine (servo amplifier) power is ON.
w

Replacing the batteries with power OFF causes the

absolute position stored in memory to be lost.
2 If your machine is equipped with a separate battery case,
w

follow the instructions in 2.6.4

289
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

Procedure for replacing separate type batteries for absolute pulse coder

1 Prepare 4 alkaline batteries (UM–1type) commercially available in

advance.
2 Turn machine (CNC, sevo amplifier) power ON.
3 Loosen screws on the battery case to remove the cover. For placement
of the battery case, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
4 Replace the batteries in the case. Insert 2 batteries each in the opposite

om
direction as illustrated below.

Screw

r.c
Ç
ÇÇ Ç
ÇÇ
e
Cover

nt
ce
5 After replacement, install the cover.
6 Turn machine (CNC, sevo amplifier) power OFF
nc

CAUTION
Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when
machine (CNC, servo amplifier) power is ON.
Replacing the batteries with power OFF causes the
.c

absolute position stored in memory to be lost.

w
w
w

290
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.15 An error is generated in the control section of the serial pulse coder.
ALARM 350 (SERIAL
PULSE CODER IS
ABNORMAL)

Points 1 Alarm No. 351 has also generated⇒Refer to alarm 351.

2 Only alarm No. 350 has generated⇒Refer to the following Confirm
the details by diagnostic number 0202 and 0204.

om
D When diagnostic number
0202 shows 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 CSA PHA RCA CKA SPH

#6(CSA) Check sum alarm has generated.

r.c
#4(PHA) Phase data abnormal alarm has generated.
#3(RCA) Speed count abnormal alarm has generated.
#1(CKA) Clock alarm has generated.
#0(SPH) Soft phase data abnormal alarm has generated.

e
1 Check the contens using the above diagnostic function if the alarm
generates repeatedly. If diagnostic data is the same, serial pulse coder
may be faulty.⇒Refer to following Caution
nt
2 When diagnostic result does not the same, or other abnormality is
detected, an external noise may be generated.
ce
D When diagnostic number
0204 shows 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 LDA PMS

#4(LDA) LED of serial pulse coder is abnormal

nc

#3(PMS) Feedback pulses are not issued correctly.

(1) #4(LDA): LED in the serial pulse coder is abnormal.
Serial pulse coder is faulty⇒Refer to following Caution
.c

(2) #3(PMS): Pulses are not issued correctly by abnormality of

feedback cable.
1 Fault of serial pulse coder ⇒Refer to following Caution
w

2 Feedback cable is faulty.

CAUTION
w

Reference position and machine’s standard position are

different from the ones before, adjust and set them correctly.
w

291
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.16 An error is generated in communication with serial pulse coder.

ALARM 351 (SERIAL
PULSE CODER
COMMUNICATION
IS ABNORMAL)
Points Check the details by the diagnostic function of the Power Mate.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0203 DTE CRC STB

om
#7(DTE) Data error has generated.
#6(CRC) Serial communication error has generated. (CRC check error)
#5(STB) Serial communication error has generated. (Stop bit error)
1) #7(DTE):Response from serial pulse coder is absent.

r.c
Causes 1 Signal cable is disconnected
2 Serial pulse coder is faulty. å See Caution 1.
3 +5V to the serial pulse coder is lowered.
2) #6(CRC),#5(STB):Serial communication is in faulty

e
1 Signal cable is disconnected.
2 Serial pulse coder is faulty å See Caution 1.
nt
3 Base printed board or servo module is faulty å See Caution 2

CAUTION
ce
1 After the serial pulse coder is changed, reference position
or machine’s standard point is different from the one before
replacement. Therefore reset and adjust it again.
2 All the data stored in memory is lost when the base printed
nc

board is changed. Set NC data again, referring to “chapter

3 data input/output”.
The data includes reference position information.
Reference position setting must also be performed,
therefore.
.c
w
w
w

292
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.17 Amplifier or overheat of motor is detected.

ALARM 400
(OVERLOAD) 400 SERVO ALM :X OVERLOAD
⇐ Example of CRT display.
Axis name is also displayed.

om
Points Confirm the detail by the diagnostic function of Power Mate.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 OVL

#7(OVL) : 1 OVERLOAD ALARM is displayed.

r.c
Check details of alarms by DGN 201.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD

e
1 Overheat of servo motor
0 Overheat of servo amplifier

Overheat of servo motor

nt (START)
ce
NO
Is it hot ?
nc

YES

Overheat of motor
Defective thermostat
.c

(Next page) (1)

w
w

CAUTION
After the motor is changed, reference position or machine’s
reference point is different from the one before replace
w

ment. Set it again.

293
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

D Overheat of servo LED 6 of servo amplifier is lit

amplifier
(START)

Check LED status

of servo amplifier

om
NO
[6] ?

YES NO(Not light)

[-] ?

YES Check input power volt-

r.c
NO age of servo amplifier
Is amplifier hot
?

YES NO
Normal ?
(1)

e
<From previous YES
page>
Servo amplifier is
nt Connect the check pin
board (A06B–6071–K290)
to servo amp, then mea-
sure current at terminal IR
and IS on the check pin
faulty
ce
board while moving the Check magnetic circuit
machine.

NO
Does current ex-
nc

ceed a rated one

?

· Check temperature around

YES · Lower cutting conditions
.c

Machine load is large

Insulation of motor is poor
w
w
w

294
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.18 Ready signal (*DRDY) of servo amplifier is not turned on or turned off
during operation.
ALARM 401 (*DRDY
SIGNAL TURNED
(START)
OFF)
*When alarm 414 is also generated, LED
shows a number. Consult with alarm 414.
Check LED status
of servo amplifier

om
NO(Not lit)
[-] ?

YES Check input power sup-

ply of servo amplifier

r.c
YES
Servo amp. is Normal ?
faulty
NO

e
nt
· Cable disconnection between servo amp. and
Power Mate
· Servo amp. is faulty
· Base printed board or servo amp. is faulty
(See Sec.8.13)
Check magnetics
circuit
ce
CAUTION
When the base printed board is replaced, all the data stored
nc

in memory is lost. Set data again, referring to chapter 3.

“Data input/output” .
.c

(1) Interface type B

Power Mate Servo amplifier

w

JSn JSnB
–10 –10
DV RV RLY
w

*MCON

–9 –9
RV DV
w

*DRDY

295
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

(2) Interface type A

Power Mate Servo amplifier

JVn JVnB
–10 –10
DV RV RLY
*MCON

–20 –20
RV DV
*DRDY

om
Power on sequence (Power MateàServo amplifier)

r.c
= *Power supply unit failure
Power ON
*Input fuse disconnection

e
Servo enable = *SVF1 to 2 (Servo off signal)

nt
Position, velocity
control ready (*MCON)
= *System alarm (ALM900∼973) *Servo alarm
(ALM400 to 417) *Emergency stop (*ESP)
ce
Servo amp. ready (*DRDY) = * Servo amp. alarm (1–9,b) *Emergency
stop signall (*ESP) Lack of 3–phase input
voltage
nc

NOTE
1 When a servo amplifier is shared by more than one Power
Mate, this alarm may occur in one of the Power Mate units
.c

if *MCON is not generated in another Power Mate unit. Set

NOFVY (bit 2 of parameter No. 1803).
2 When a two–axis amplifier is used in a 2–path Power
Mate–D, this alarm may occur in one path of the Power
w

Mate–D unit if *MCON is not generated in the other path.

Set NOFVY (bit 2 of parameter No. 1803).
3 The non–generation of *MCON in another Power Mate or
w

another path of 2–path Power Mate may be due to an

emergency stop signal being input, follow–up after the
power is turned on, or the detach function being applied.
w

296
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.19
ALARM 404 AND 405
(*DRDY ON,
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
ABNORMAL)

D Alarm 404

om
DRDY signal is turned on before *MCON signal is turned on, or DRDY
(* DRDY ON) is not turned off after *MCON signal is turned off.

D Causes
1 Servo amplifier is faulty.

r.c
2 Between servo amplifier and Power Mate is faulty.
3 Base printed board or servo module is faulty. (See Sec.8.13)

NOTE

e
When the base printed board is replaced, all the data stored
in memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to chapter
nt
3 “data input/output”.

1) TYPE B Interface
ce
Power Mate Servo amplifier
nc

JVn JVnB
–10 –10
DV RV RLY
*MCON
.c

–20 –20
RV DV
*DRDY
w

2) TYPE A Interface
w

Servo amplifier
w

Power Mate

JSn JSnB
–10 –10
DV RV RLY
*MCON

–9 –9
RV DV
*DRDY

297
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

D Alarm 405 (Reference

positin return is
abnormal)
D Causes Base printed board or servo module is faulty. (See Sec.8.13.)

CAUTION
When the base printed board is replaced, all the data stored
in memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to
chapter 3 “data input/output”.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

298
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.20 Position error amount at stop (DGN 300) exceeds a value set by parameter
No. 1829.
ALARM 410
(EXCESSIVE (START)
POSITION ERROR
AMOUNT DURING YES
STOP) Is it vertical
axis?

NO

om
Check parameters 1825 and 1829 if they are cor- Check servo off signal of
rect (see parameter list attached) each axis. The servo off
function is valid when DGN
G126 bits 0–5 is 1.
Servo off funciton is used to
escape overload of an axis
when the axis is mechani-
cally clamped.

r.c
NO
Correct
?

YES
Set correct
Note) parameters.

e
Perform initial setting
of servo parameters YES
‘1’ ?
nt NO
Check PMC
NO
ce
Recovered ?

YES
Turn off Power Mate
Be carefull vertical power and remove
Set digital servo pa- axis does not drop.
power line of motor
rameters according then turn on power
nc

to parameter list
Measure motor power
Note) Save current CNC pa- at terminal board TB2
Measure in DC range U–V–W of the servo
rameters in a floppy disk or
such before performing ini- amplifier module
.c

tial setting for safety.

( No power ) ON
Power sup-
plied?
w

YES
· Servo amp. is faulty.
· Signal line disconnection between servo amp.
and Power Mate.
w

· Base printed board or servo module is faulty. Motor power line

(See Sec.8.13) is broken
w

CAUTION
When the base printed board is replaced, all the data stored
in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to chapter
3 “data input/output” .

299
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.21 Position error amount during movement (DGN 300) execeeds a value set
by parameter 1828.
ALARM 411
(EXCESSIVE (START)
POSITION ERROR
DURING MOVE) With a move command,
does this alarm occur
after machine moves ?

YES (Move)

om
Moves and
(1)
alarmed?

NO (No move)

Turn off Power Mate

power, remove pow-

r.c
er line and turn on Be careful that vertical axis
power does not drop by its weight.

Check motor power

at terminal board TB2
U–V–W of servo am- Measure by DC voltage

e
plifier module

NO (Not output)
nt Power out-
put ?

YES Confirm each–axis

servo off signal
ce
G126.0 to 1=1
Mechanical load is
excessive
Disconnection of
power line YES
nc

’1’ ?

NO
Check PMC su- Signal line between Power
quence, release ser- Mate and servo amplifier is
.c

vo off and check op- disconnected

eration again

YES
Normal ?
w

NO
w

Servo amplifier is Cable is faulty

faulty
w

300
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

(1)

Move the machine

at constant low
speed and check
DGN 300.

YES
Value fluctuate ?

om
NO
Connect the check
pin board (A06B–
Compare the value Note 1)
6011–K290) to check
obtained by the fol-
board measure cur-
lowing formula and
rent at IR and IS on
DGN 300
the check pin board

r.c
while moving the ma-
chine

NO * Refer to α series servo

Correct ? amplifier for current val-
ues

e
YES Servo amplifier is faulty.
Mechanical load is
Base printed board or
large. Refer to
nt
Compare value of
PRM1828 and the
servo module is faulty.
(See Sec.8.13)
alarm 400.
ce
list Note2)
nc

NO
Correct ?

YES
.c

Servo amplifier is
faulty Correct parameters
w

CAUTION
w

When the base printed board is replaced, all the data in

memory is lost. Reset NC data, referring to chapter 3 data
input/output item.
w

NOTE Feed rate (mmńmin) 1

1 Position error= 60 PRM1825 Detection unit
2 Parameter 1828yPosition error at rapid traverse 1.2

301
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.22
ALARM 414 (DIGITAL
SERVO SYSTEM IS 414 SERVO ALARM:X–AXIS
EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY
AXIS NAME DETECTED
ABNORMAL) DETECTION IS DISPLAYED
SYSTEM ERROR

om
Points Check details by Power Mate’s diagnostic fucntion and LED display on
the servo amplifier.
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

r.c
2 LED display on the front panel of servo amplifier module and power
supply module.

e
STATUS
7 segment LED
nt * An alarm detected on the servo amplifier is
also displayed at DGN 200.
ce
nc

3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 OFS MCC

D When DGN200 shows

.c

”1” #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
w

#6(LV) : Low voltage alarm
LED : “2” or “3” is lishted.

#5(OVC) : Over current alarm
#4(HCA) : Abnormal current alarm
LED : “8” is lishted.
w

#3(HVA) : Over current alarm
LED : “1” is lishted.

#2(DCA) : Discharge alarm
LED : “4” or “5” is lishted.
#1(FBA) : Disconnection alarm
w

#0(OFA) : Overflow alarm

302
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

D #6(LV):Insufficient
voltage alarm 1) Servo amp LED [2] turns on (control power shortage)

(START)

Check +5V power

at check terminal of
servo unit

YES
Voltage is

om
normal ?

NO
Servo amplifier is
faulty

r.c
Check input power * Power should be 200/220/230VAC –15%
to the controller across terminal T1(13) and (14)

e
NO
Is voltage
normal ?
nt YES

Servo amplifier is
Input voltage is
abnormal
ce
faulty

2) Servo amp LED [3] turns on (DC power shortage)

nc

(START)
.c

YES
Breaker off ?
w

NO
Turn off breaker and
check again
w

Check input volt- * Power should be 200/220/230VAC,–15%

age of servo amp. among terminal board T1(2)–(3)–(4).
w

Is voltage NO
normal ?

YES Input voltage

is abnormal
Servo amplifier
is faulty

303
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

D #5(OVC):Over current
detection by software (START)

* See Descriptions of servo amplifier for current.

Check current at check termi-
nal IR and IS at servo amplifi-
er and compare with rated
current of motor

om
Larger than NO
* 1.7 times for motor 20S or
1.4 times ? larger.

YES

r.c
Move axis at low speed
and measure current at
IR and IS, and compare
with rated current

e
Within rated YES
current ?
nt NO Check servo parameters
2040,2041,2056,2057 with
parameter list.
ce
Machine load is
large. Check load
at machine side.
nc

NO
Correct ?

YES
.c

· Servo amplifier is Correct parameters.

faulty
· Base PCB or servo
module is faulty
w

(See Sec.8.13)
w

CAUTION
When the base PCB is replaced, all the data in memory is
w

lost.Reset NC data, referring to chapter 3 “input/output of

data” .

304
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

D #4(HCA):Abnormal
current alarm
(Servo amp. LED:[8] (START)
lights)

Give a move command

and check wether the
alarm is generated

NO
Alarmed ?

om
YES

Remove motor power * Take care that verti-

line and turn on power cal axis may drop.

r.c
YES
Alarmed ?

e
NO

nt
Servo amp. is faulty. · Short circuit between
power lines
· Grounding of power lines
· Poor insulation of motor
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

305
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

D #3(HVA):Over voltage DC voltage in servo amp. is excessive.

alarm (Servo amp.LED
[1] lights) (Start)

Confirm status when

an alarm is generated

Does the alarm NO

generate during
deceleration ?

om
Power should be within
Confirm input voltage 200/220/230VAC among
YES of servo amplifier 3 phases of terminal
T1(2),(3) and (4)

r.c
Is voltage NO
normal ?

YES Input power voltage

is abnormal

e
Check feedrate Servo amp. is faulty
nt Does the alarm YES
ce
generate dur-
ing rapid tra-
verse ?

NO
· Is acc/dec time is correct ?
nc

· Isn’t load inertial too large ?

· Is friction reduced by aging of
Servo amp. is faulty machine ?

Set acc./dcc. time Refer to acc./dec. param-

.c

constant lager as a eters 1600 and so on.

temporary measure
w
w
w

306
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

D #2(DCA):Discharge alarm 1 Servo amp LED 4 lights (discharge control circuit is abnormal)

(START)

Generate at YES
power on ?

NO

om
Servo amp. is faulty

Generate during YES

deceleration ?

NO. Check frequency of

r.c
acceleration/deceleration

Generate dur- NO
ing lowering of NO
vertical axis Frequent ?

e
YES
YES
Servo amp. is faulty
nt
Balancer adjustment failure
· Mechanical load inertia
is large
· Resistance for friction
ce
due to againg of machine
is reduced.
Check by motor load current
during up/down movement
Set a larger acc./dec. time constant
nc

as a temporary measure.
*Take care that deceleration dis-
tance becomes longer.
.c

Separate type dis-

charge resistor must
be added
w
w
w

307
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

2 Servo amp LED 5 lights (discharge circuit overheat)

Separate type Servo amp.

(START)
discharge unit (C series)
T3 T1
TH –3 –15 TH
RV

Generate at YES –4 –16

power on?
0V ALM
NO YES Is unit hot ?

om
Short betrween 15 and 16
when not used.
NO

Check resistance
across terminals
T1(15) and (16).

r.c
0
? NO

Measure load current

YES

e
Check whether sep-
arated discharge unit
Servo amp. is faulty.
nt Is larger than
rated current ?
NO
is connected(Across
15 and 16 of T1)
ce
YES · Check ambient temperature rise
· Lower cutting condition

(Wired across 15 and 16 or T1)

Wired ?
nc

· Machine side load is large YES

· Insulation of motor is poor
Measure reistance NO
across 3 and 4 at
terminal board of
separate type dis-
.c

charge unit.
Short–circuit across 15 and
16 of terminal board T1
YES
0Ω ?
w

NO
Disconnection of
w

cable between sep-

Separate type discharge arate type dischrge
unit is faulty unit and servo amp.
w

308
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

D #1(FBA):DISCONNECTIO Position detection signal line is disconnected or short–circuited.

N ALARM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD EXP
↓ ↓
1 – – 0 Built–in serial pulse coder
disconnection
JFX
1 – – 1 Separate type position
detector connection
JF2x
0 – – 0 Pulse coder disconnec-

om
tion (software)

D Causes
1 Signal cable is disconnected or short–circuited.
2 Serial pulse coder or position detector is faulty Refer to CAUTION 1.
3 Base PCB or servo module is faulty. (See Sec.8.13)

r.c
Refer to CAUTION 2.

CAUTION
1 After the pulse coder is replaced, reference position or

e
machine’s standard position is different from former one.
Adjust and set it correctly.
2 When the base PCB is replaced, all the data stored in
nt
memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to chapter 3
“input/output of data”.
ce
JSxB Servo amplifier
Power Mate JFx Linear scale
nc

JVx
PC
JFx

Signal line for position detector

.c

JF2x
x is an axis number
NOTE) In the case of the type A interface, the position detection signal line is
w

connected to the Power Mate, while in the case of the type B interface,
it is connected to the servo amplifier.
w
w

309
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

D #0(OFA):Overflow alarm
causes 1 Wrong setting of servo parameters 1800s.
2 Base PCB or servo module is faulty. (See Sec.8.13)

CAUTION
When the base PCB is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to chapter 3
“input/output of data”.

om
When 1 is displayed at
DGN 204
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 OFS MCC

#6(OFS): A/D converter used for current feedback in the digital servo

r.c
is abnormal.
#5(MCC): Contacts of electromagnetic contactor in the servo amp. is
blown.→LED 7 lights.
D #6(OFS):A/D converter is Base PCB or servo module is faulty. (See Sec.8.13.)

e
abnormal
CAUTION
nt When the base PCB is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost.
Set NC data again, referring to chapter 3 “input/output of
data”.
ce
D #5(MCC):Contacts of
electro–magnetic (START)
contactor is blown within
nc

servo amp.
Check LED of
servo amplifier LED [7] Contacts of electro–magnetic
.c

contactor is blown in servo

amplifier

[7] ? NO (Not lit)

w

YES
Check input power
w

voltage of servo amp.

<Normal input power voltage>
YES Correct? 200/220/230VAC
w

+10%,–15%

NO

Servo amplifier is faulty Check magnetics circuit

310
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

D LED display

Display Meaning Explanation

Power off Power to the servo converter is not supplied.

NOT READY Internal MMC (electro–magnetic contactor) is not

turned on.

READY Internal MMC is turned on and the motor

om
becomes ready.

HV DC voltage for driving main circuit is considerabley

Excessive high.
voltage alarm

LV5V +5V of control power is abnormally low.

r.c
Control power
low alarm

LVDC DC voltage for main circuit is extremely low.

DC link voltage
low alarm

e
DCSW Regenerative discharge energy in short time is
Abnormal regen-
large or regenerative discharge circuit is faulty.
erative control cir-
nt cuit

DCOH
Excessive regen-
erative discharge
Average regenerative discharge energy is large or
frequency of acc./dec. is large.
ce
OH Lights when thermostat in the servo amplifier func-
Servo amplifier tions.
overheat

MCC Contacts of electro–magnetic contactor is blown.

Electro magnetic
nc

contactor

HCL Lights when a large current flows through the main

L axis excess circuit of L axis.
current
.c

HCM Lights when a large current flows through the main

M axis excess circuit of M axis.
current
w

HCLM Lights when a large current flows throught the main

Excess current circuit of L axis and M axis.
w

NOTE
w

1st axis is L, 2nd axis is M.

D LVDC alarm When the electro–magnetic contactor is turned on in the servo amp. or DC
voltage for the main circuit becomes low, this LED is lit.
Causes are;
1) Input voltage is insufficient.
2) Contacts of electro–magnetic contactor in servo amp. is poor.
3) Power circuit in servo amp. is abnormal.

311
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

D DCSW alarm This alarm is lit when the transistor for regenerative discharging turns on
more than 1 second.
Its causes are;
1) Mulfunction of servo amplifier such as regenerative discharge circuit.
2) Regenerative discharge energy is excessive due to cutting conditions.
D DCOH alarm This alarm is lit when regenerative discharge registance is overheated and
the thermost operates.
Its causes are ;
1) Average discharge energy is excessive due to frequent acc./dec. or no

om
use of balancer in vertical axis
2) Functioning of a thermostat in the power transformer when thermostat
signal TH1 and TH2 are connected.
D MCC alarm When turning on MCC, if the contacts are already on.
D Check terminals on

r.c
When you open the cover of the terminal board, you can see the check
servo amp. terminal below LED.
D Terminal name and
meaning Terminal name Meaning

e
0V 0V

nt 5V

IRL
Control power +5V(+5"0.25)

R–phase motor current of L axis

ce
ISL S–phase motor current of L axis

IRM R–phase motor current of M axis

ISM S–phase motor current of M axis

nc

D Current/volt
Type of unit A/V Type of unit (A/V)

A06B–6066–H002 1 A06B–6066–H222 1/1 Left side L axis/Right

.c

side M axis
A06B–6066–H003 3 A06B–6066–H223 1/3

A06B–6066–H004 10 A06B–6066–H224 1/10

w

A06B–6066–H006 20 A06B–6066–H233 3/3

A06B–6066–H234 3/10
w

A06B–6066–H244 10/10
w

312
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

D Current waveform
(Servo amplifier)
Check terminal

IRL IRM
Current check terminal
ISL ISM

0V +5V

om
Convert this
voltage into
current value
0V

r.c
Alarm display

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

313
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.23 Position detection signal line is disconnected or short–circuited.

ALARM 416
(DISCONNECTION
ALARM)

Point Check the details using the Power Mate’s diagnostic fucntion.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD EXP
↓ ↓

om
1 – – 0 Built–in serial pulse coder
disconnection
JFX
1 – – 1 Separate type position
detector connection
JF2X
1 – – 0 Pulse coder disconnec-

r.c
tion (software)

Causes 1 Signal cable is disconnected or short–circuitted.

2 Serial pulse coder or position detector is faulty. Refer to Note 1
3 Base printed board or servo module is faulty. (See Sec.8.13.)

e
Refer to Caution 2

nt
CAUTION
1 After the pulse coder is replaced, reference position or
machine’s standard position is different from former one.
ce
Adjust and set it correctly.
2 When the base printed board is replaced, all the data stored
in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to chapter
3 ” Data input/output” .
nc

JSxB Servo amplifier

Power Mate JFx Linear scale
.c

JVx
PC
JFx
w

Signal line for position detector

JF2x
w

x is an axis number
NOTE) In the case of the type A interface, the position detection signal line is
connected to the Power Mate, while in the case of the type B interface,
it is connected to the servo amplifier.
w

314
B–62835EN/01 8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.24 Digital servo parameters are abnormal.

(Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.)
ALARM 417 (DIGITAL When alarm 315 is occured at the same time, check the cause of alarm 351
SERVO SYSTEM IS of Sec. 8.16.
ABNORMAL)

D Causes
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:
PRM 2020 : Motor format number
PRM 2022 : Motor rotation direction

om
PRM 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
PRM 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
PRM 1023 : Servo axis number
PRM 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio

r.c
PRM 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.
2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0.
PRM 2047 : Observer parameter

e
3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters.
nt
”Refer to setcion 5.1 ”initial setting of servo parameters” .
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

315
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.25 Because an ambient temperature of Power Mate becomes high, a

thermostat mounted on Power Mate and informs an alarm.
ALARM 700
(OVERHEAT AT
CONTROL SIDE)

Remedies
(START)

om
Check fan on the top of controller of Power Mate
is operating when power is on.

NO

r.c
Operating

YES

e
Check temperature around Power Mate is high Fun motor is faulty
(more than 45 degrees)
Replace fan motor
nt
ce
YES
High tempera-
ture ?

NO
nc

Thermostat on the back panel of base Lower temperature around

printed board is faulty. Power Mate.

Replace the base printed board.

.c
w
w
w

316
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.26 Communication error has generated in serial spindle

ALARM 749
(SERIAL SPINDLE
COMMUNICATION
ERROR)
Causes and Remedies Improper connection between the control unit and the serial spindle. The
following reason is considered.

om
Power Mate JA11 α series
spindle
amplifier

r.c
Optical I/O Link
adaptor
Power Mate
JA11
Spindle
amplifier

e
Optocal cable
nt
D Spindle module is faulty. (Bold line in the figure below indicates
module mounting position.)
D The cable between the control unit and spindle amplifier is broken or
ce
disconnected.
D A cable between the control unit and optical I/O link adapter is
disconnected or short–circuited.
D Optical I/O link adapter is faulty.
nc

D Optical cable is disconnected.

D Serial spindle amplifier is faulty.
<Location of spindle module> Power Mate–D
.c
w
w

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) (3)
w

(2) Spindle module (2) Memory module

A20B–2900–0850 A20B–2902–0221
to 0255

A02B–0166–B001 A02B–0166–B501, B502

A02B–0166–B520 A02B–0166–B531

317
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

<Location of spindle module> Power Mate–F

(1)

om
(1) Spindle module (S serial)
A20B–2902–0225

r.c
A02B–0198–B501
A02B–0198–B531

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

318
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.27 When the spindle amplifier does not become normal state immediately
after power is turned on in the serial spindle system, this alarm is
ALARM 750 (SPINDLE informed.
SERIAL LINK
CANNOT BE
STARTED)
Points This alarm does not occur once the system becomes ready including the
spindle system .
This alarm occurs during power on sequence before the system becomes

om
ready.
After the system becomes ready, serial spindle alarm is issued by alarm
749.
Causes
(1) Cable is in poor contact or spindle amplifier power is off.

r.c
(2) When display of spindle amplifier shows SU–01 or an alarm other
than AL–24 is displayed, power to the CNC is turned on.
In this case, this alarm usually occurs when the CNC’s power is turned
off while the serial spindle is operating. Turn off the power of serial

e
spindle once, then turn it on and starts the system.
Details of Alarms Confirm the details of troubles on diagnostic 409.

DGN 0409
nt #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
SPE
#2 #1
S1E
#0
SHE

#3(SPE) 0 : In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters satisfies the
ce
starting conditions for spindle amplifier.
1 : In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not satisfy
the starting conditions for spindle amplifier.
nc

#1(S1E) 0 : The serial communication module of the CNC side is normal.

1 : The serial communication module of the CNC side is abnormal.
#0(SHE) 0 : Serial spindle module on the CNC side is normal.
1 : Serial spindle module was detected to be abnormal on the CNC side.
.c

Remedies Reform the following countermeasures based on the above configurations:

(1) #3(SPE)1: In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters
w

does not satisfy the starting conditions for spindle

amplifier.
↓
w

Confirm the settings of parameters 4000s.

Especially checks the parameters those are changed from the standard
parameters.
w

(2) #1(SIE)1: When an abnormality is found in the 1st spindle at the start
of serial spindle control, exchange the unit if the following
check items are not concerned.
↓
Check the parameters and connections at the 1st spindle to see
whether the 1st spindle is mechanically and electrically connected.
↓
If the parameters and connections are correct, the system control
module shown below or the spindle amplifier itself is faulty.
(3) #0(SPE)1: The serial spindle module is detected to be abnormal.
Exchange the following module :

319
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

<Location of spindle module> Power Mate–D

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) (3)

om
(2) Spindle module (2) Memory module
A20B–2900–0850 A20B–2902–0221
to 0255

r.c
A02B–0166–B001 A02B–0166–B501, B502
A02B–0166–B520 A02B–0166–B531

e
<Location of spindle module> Power Mate–F

nt
ce
(1)
nc
.c

(1) Spindle module (S serial)

A20B–2902–0225
w

A02B–0198–B501
A02B–0198–B531
w
w

320
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.28 With serial spindle system, an alarm on the spindle unit is informed to the
CNC.
ALARM 751 751 ( Alarm detection by 1st spindle )
(SPINDLE ALARM) The alarm contents is displayed by AL–xx on the display of spindle amp.
Refer to appendix B for the contents.
The CNC holds an alarm number display (AL–xx).
D Point This alarm informs of trouble of spindle control unit.
Repair the spindle side by the method of remedy for each alarm.
D Causes and Remedies Refer to Appendix B for details.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

321
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.29 ROM parity error occurred.

ALARM 900 (ROM
PARITY ERROR)

Causes
(1) ROM on the base printed board is defective.

SYSTEM ALARM 8834–06

om
900 ROM PARITY

Defective file

r.c
or ROM is displayed

e
nt
Confirm the series and versions of control software those are displayed
on upper right of the screen.
ce
Remedies Replace the ROM.
nc
.c
w
w
w

322
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.30 Parity error of SRAM that stores part programs.

ALARM 910 TO 911
(RAM PARITY)
Points A parity bit is prepared for writing data in memory correctly. There are
odd–number parity and even–number parity.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #P
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 (Parity bit)
(Even–number
parity)

om
Causes and Remedies (1) Defective base printed–circuit board or memory module, or incorrect
data in the base printed–circuit board or memory module
When this alarm occurs immediately after power is turned on, once
turn off power, then turn on power while pushing RESET and DELETE key
to perform memory all clear

r.c
If parity error is not released by clearing all memory, RAM or backup
circuit of RAM may be faulty. Change memory module or base
printed board.

CAUTION

e
When the base printed board or memory module is
replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Set data
nt
again, referring to chapter 3 ” Data input/output” .

D Memory module <Location of memory module> Power Mate–D

ce
mounting position
Base PCB
nc

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) (3)
.c
w

(2) Memory module (2) Memory module

A20B–2900–0530,531,541 A20B–2902–0221A0225
w

A20B–2902–0330A0332 A20B–2902–0230A0237
w

A02B–0166–B001 A02B–0166–B501, B502

A02B–0166–B520 A02B–0166–B531
128 to 512 kilobytes are installed 256 to 512 kilobytes can be added to the
using memory modules. base printed circuit board, by using one
or two 256–KB memory modules.

323
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

<Location of memory module> Power Mate–F

Bace PCB

(1)

om
r.c
A02B–0166–B501
A02B–0166–B531
256 kilobytes are installed on the

e
base printed circuit board.

nt
(2) Low voltage of memory back up battery.
A battery alarm occurs if a voltage rated at 3.0 V drops to 2.5 V typical
(2.3 to 2.7 V).
When the memory back up battery voltage is lowered, BAT is
ce
displayed at lower part of the screen.
When battery alarm is lit, replace with new lithium batteries as soon
as possible.
Refer to 2.6 battery replacing item and change the batteries.
nc

(3) Power supply printed board is faulty

When alarm turns off by an operation of clearing all the memory,
power supply printed board may also be faulty.
.c
w
w
w

324
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.31 920: Watch dog alarm or local RAM of servo has occurred
ALARM 920
(WATCH DOG OR
RAM PARITY)

points
D Watch dog timer alarm The timer used to monitor the operation of CPU is called the watch dog
timer. The CPU resets timer time every time a constant time has passed.

om
When an error occurs in CPU or peripheral device, timer is not reset but
the alarm is informed.
D RAM parity error Refer to alarm 910 to 911. Local RAM or module has been checked.
Causes and Remedies
D Servo module is faulty In the Power Mate–D (A02B–0166–B001, –B520), the servo module

r.c
includes servo RAM, watch dog timer circuit, etc. Defectiveness of
hardware, abnormality or malfunctioning of detection circuit or the like
is considered. Therefore, replace servo module.
D Base printed board is

e
In the Power Mate–D (A02B–0166–B501, –B502, –B531) and Power
faulty Mate–F the Base PCB includes servo RAM, watch dog timer circuit, etc.
Defectiveness of hardware, abnormality or malfunctioning of detection

D Memory is faulty
nt
circuit or the like is considered. Therefore, replace base PCB.
In the Power Mate, software may not workpiece properly due to failure
of memory. Change memory. (See Sec.8.31)
ce
D Power supply printed DC output voltage of power supply printed board may be faulty. Replace
board is faulty the power supply printed board.
nc
.c
w
w
w

325
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

D Location of PCB 1) Power Mate–D(A02B–0166–B001)

(2) Memory module

A20B–2900–0530,531,541
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) A20B–2902–0330 to 0332
(6) Digital servo module
A20B–2900–0160
(7) Servo interface module

om
A20B–2900–0380

r.c
2) Power Mate–D(A02B–0166–B520)

e
nt (2) Memory module
ce
A20B–2900–0530,531,541
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 87) A20B–2902–0330 to 0332
(6) Digital servo module
A20B–2901–0340
(7) Servo interface module
nc

A20B–2900–0380
.c
w
w
w

326
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

3) Power Mate–D(A02B–0166–B501, B502, B531)

Base PCB

The base printed–circuit board provides

the servo module functions.
(1) (2) (3)
(2) Memory modules
A20B–2902–0221 to –0225
A20B–2902–0230 to –0237

om
The base printed–circuit board has 256
KB of memory installed.

r.c
4) Power Mate–F(A02B–0198–B501, B531)

e
nt Base PCB

The base printed–circuit board provides

ce
both servo module functions and memory.
(1)
nc
.c
w

CAUTION
w

When the base printed board and memory module are

replaced, all the data stroed in memory is lost. Set data
again, referring to chapter 3 ” Data input/output” .
w

327
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.32 In the Power Mate–D (A02B–0166–B001, –B520) the servo module is

not mounted.
ALARM 924 (SERVO
MODULE MOUNTING NOTE
ERROR) This alarm may not occur during normal operaion.
This alarm may be generated when a PCB is changed for
maintenance.

Causes and Remedies Check installation servo module on base printed board.

om
Unless these boards are mounted correctly, if this alarm still generates,
change servo module.
D Module location See Sec. 8.13.

NOTE

r.c
The base printed–circuit boards of both the Power Mate–D
(A02B–0166–B501, –B502, –B531) and Power Mate–F
provide a servo module function. If this alarm occurs,
replace the base printed–circuit board.

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

328
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.33 CPU error (illeagal interrupt) has generated.

ALARM 930
(CPU ERROR)

Causes and Remedies 1) Base printed board is faulty

An interrupt which will not occur during usual operation has
generated.
Peripheral circuit of the CPU may be abnormal. Change the base
printed board. If operation is performed normally by power off and

om
on, noise may be a cause. Refer to Subsec.2.2.3. Suppressing Noise.
2) Memory is faulty
Replace PCB including the memory. For location of memory see the
section of alarm 910 to 911.
3) Defective CPU module

r.c
Replace the CPU module. (Power Mate–D/B001, B520)
When replacing the CPU module, the memory module must be
removed then re–mounted. Observe the following precaution.

e
nt (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
ce
nc

(3) CPU module

A20B–2901–0500
.c
w

CAUTION
If the base printed–circuit board is replaced, or the memory
w

module is removed then remounted, all data in memory will

be lost. Set data again, referring to chapter 3 ” Data
input/output”.
w

329
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.34 An error occurred when RAM used for PMC test is being executed.
ALARM 950 OR 951
(PMC SYSTEM
ALARM)

Causes and Remedies The following causes are considered :

D PMC module (1) is faulty. (Power Mate–D)
D Base printed board is faulty. (Power Mate–F)

om
Module mounting <Location of module> Power mate–D
position

r.c
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) (3)

e
nt (1) PMC module (1) PMC module
ce
A20B–2900–0142 A20B–2900–0142
A20B–2901–0660 A20B–2901–0660

A02B–0166–B001 A02B–0166–B501, B502

nc

A02B–0166–B520 A02B–0166–B531
.c
w
w
w

330
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.35 RAM parity error or NMI has occurred in the PMC module.
ALARM 970 (NMI
ALARM IN PMC
MODULE)

Causes and Remedies Same as alarm 950

Module mounting See alarm 950.

om
position

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

331
8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62835EN/01

8.36 A communication error is detected between Power Mate and I/O unit I/O
card at SLC in the PMC module. (Power Mate–D)
ALARM 971
(NMI ALARM IN SLC)

Causes and Remedies Fault of PMC module or fault of I/O unit or I/O card.

Main
CPU

om
<PMC module> I/O
ROM PMC control unit,
I/O card

RAM

r.c
+24V
power
supply

e
D PMC control module (1) is faulty.
Refer to ALARM 950 for the module mounting position.
nt
D I/O unit or I/O card is faulty.
D +24V power to the I/O unit is faulty.
ce
Interface module
AF01A/AF01B
1 +24V
CP32 2 GND
nc

3 Unused

Disconnection or broken of cable.

.c
w
w
w

332
B–62835EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

8.37 An unknown NMI has generated.

This alarm may also occur due to an I/O Link communication error when
ALARM 973 the Power Mate is used as a slave of the FANUC I/O Link.
(NMI ALARM BY
UNKNOWN CAUSE)

Causes and Remedies Possible causes are as follows. Replace the corresponding printed circuit
board.
D Defective base printed–circuit board
D Defective memory

om
See the description of alarms 910 to 911 for details of the memory
location.
D Defective CPU module (Power Mate–D/B001, B520)
See alarm 930 for the location of the CPU module.
D Defective power supply printed–circuit board

r.c
NOTE
If the base printed–circuit board is replaced, or if the
memory module is removed then remounted, all data in
memory will be lost. Re–set the data as explained in

e
Chapter 3.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

333
9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

9 TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE)

This chapter describes a troubleshooting of the serial interface spindle

amplifier.

om
9.1 LIST OF SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE
AMPLIFIER ALARMS
9.2 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EACH ALARM

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

334
B–62835EN/01 9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE)

9.1
LIST OF SERIAL
INTERFACE SPINDLE
AMPLIFIER ALARMS For troubleshooting the listed alarms, refer to 9.2 “TROUBLE
SHOOTING FOR EACH ALARM”.
Alarm No. Meanings Description Remedy
Motor overheat Detects internal motor temperature : Check load status.
AL–01
exceeding specified temperature. Cool motor, then reset alarm.

om
Excessive speed devi- Detects motor speed exceeding specified Check load status.
AL–02
ation speed excessively. Reset alarm.
DC link section fuse Detects that fuse F4 in DC link section is Check power transistors, and so forth.
AL–03
blown blown (models 30S and 40S). Replace fuse.
Input fuse blown. Detects blown fuse (F1 to F3), open phase or Replace fuse. Check open phase and power
AL–04 Input power open phase. momentary failure of power (models 30S and supply regenerative circuit operation.
40S).

r.c
Control power supply Detects that control power supply fuse AF2 or Check for control power supply short circuit.
AL–05
fuse blown AF3 is blown (models 30S and 40S). Replace fuse.
Excessive speed Detects that motor rotation has exceeded Reset alarm.
AL–07
115% of its rated speed.
High input voltage Detects that switch is set to 200 VAC when Set switch to 230 VAC.

e
AL–08 input voltage is 230 VAC or higher (models
30S and 40S).
Excessive load on main Detects abnormal temperature rise of power Cool radiator, then reset alarm.
AL–09

AL–10

AL–11
circuit section
Low input voltage
Overvoltage in DC link
nt
transistor radiator.
Detects drop in input power supply voltage.
Detects abnormally high direct current
Correct cause, then reset alarm.
Correct cause, then reset alarm.
ce
section power supply voltage in power circuit section.
Overcurrent in DC link Detects flow of abnormally large current in di- Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–12
section rect current section of power circuit.
CPU internal data Detects abnormality in CPU internal data Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–13 memory abnormality memory. This check is made only when pow-
nc

er is turned on.
Spindle switch/output Detects incorrect switch sequence in spindle Check sequence.
AL–15
switch alarm switch/output switch operation.
RAM abnormality Detects abnormality in RAM for external data. Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–16 This check is made only when power is turned
.c

on.
Program ROM sum Detects program ROM data error. This check Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–18
check error is made only when power is turned on.
Excessive U phase Detects excessive U phase current detection Correct cause, then reset alarm.
w

AL–19 current detection circuit circuit offset. This check is made only when
offset power is turned on.
Excessive V phase Detects excessive V phase current detection Correct cause, then reset alarm.
w

AL–20 current detection circuit circuit offset. This check is made only when
offset power is turned on.
Serial transfer data Detects serial transfer data error (such as NC Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–24
error power supply turned off, etc.)
w

Serial data transfer Detects that serial data transfer has stopped. Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–25
stopped
Position coder signal Detects abnormality in position coder signal Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–27 disconnection (such as unconnected cable and parameter
setting error).
Short-time overload Detects that overload has been continuously Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–29 applied for some period of time (such as re-
straining motor shaft in positioning).
AL–30 Input circuit overcurrent Detects overcurrent flowing in input circuit. Correct cause, then reset alarm.

335
9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

Alarm No. Meanings Description Remedy

Speed detection signal Detects that motor cannot rotate at specified Correct cause, then reset alarm.
disconnection motor speed (but rotates at very slow speed or has
AL–31
restraint alarm stopped). (This includes checking of speed
detection signal cable.)
Abnormality in RAM Detects abnormality in RAM internal to LSI for Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–32 internal to LSI for serial serial data transfer. This check is made only
data transfer when power is turned on.
Insufficient DC link Detects insufficient charging of direct current Correct cause, then reset alarm.
section charging power supply voltage in power circuit section
AL–33 when magnetic contactor in amplifier is turned
on (such as open phase and defective charg-
ing resistor).

om
Parameter data setting Detects parameter data set beyond allowable Set correct data.
AL–34 beyond allowable range range of values.
of values
Excessive gear ratio data Detects gear ratio data set beyond allowable Set correct data.
AL–35
setting range of values.
AL–36 Error counter over flow Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, then reset alarm.

r.c
Speed detector parame- Detects incorrect setting of parameter for Set correct data.
AL–37
ter setting error number of speed detection pulses.
Alarm for indicating fail- Detects failure in detecting position coder Make signal adjustment for signal conversion
AL–41 ure in detecting position 1-rotation signal. circuit.
coder 1-rotation signal. Check cable shield status.

e
Alarm for indicating posi- Detects that position coder 1-rotation signal Make 1-rotation signal adjustment for signal
AL–42 tion coder 1-rotation sig- has not occurred. conversion circuit.
nal not detected

AL–43
Alarm for indicating
disconnection of position
coder signal for
differential speed mode
nt
Detects that main spindle position coder
signal used for differential speed mode is not
connected yet (or is disconnected).
Check that main spindle position coder signal
is connected to connector CN12.
ce
Alarm for indicating fail- Detects failure in detecting position coder Make 1-rotation signal adjustment for signal
ure in detecting 1-rotation signal in thread cutting conversion circuit.
AL–46 position coder 1-rotation operation. Check cable shield status.
signal in thread cutting
operation.
Position coder signal Detects incorrect position coder signal count Make signal adjustment for signal conversion
nc

AL–47 abnormality operation. circuit.

Check cable shield status.
Position coder 1-rotation Detects that occurrence of position coder Make 1-rotation signal adjustment for signal
AL–48
signal abnormality 1-rotation signal has stopped. conversion circuit.
.c

The converted differential Detects that difference between a spindle Calculate differential speed by multiplying
speed is too high. speed and another spindle speed has speed of other spindle by gear ratio. Check if
AL–49
exceeded allowable limit in differential speed calculated value is not greater than maximum
mode. speed of motor.
w

Excessive speed Detects that speed command calculation val- Calculate motor speed by multiplying specified
command calculation ue exceeded allowable range in spindle syn- spindle speed by gear ratio. Check if calcu-
AL–50
value in spindle chronization control. lated value is not greater than maximum
synchronization control speed of motor.
w

Undervoltage at DC link Detects that DC power supply voltage of pow- Correct cause, then reset alarm.
section er circuit has dropped (due to momentary
AL–51
power failure or loose contact of magnetic
contactor).
w

ITP signal abnormality I Detects abnormality in synchronization signal Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–52 (ITP signal) with CNC (such as loss of ITP
signal).
ITP signal abnormality II Detects abnormality in synchronization signal Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL–53 (ITP signal) with CNC (such as loss of ITP
signal).
Overload current alarm Detects that excessive current flowed in motor Check if overload operation or frequent
AL–54
for long time. acceleration/deceleration is performed.
Power line abnormality in Detects that switch request signal does not Check operation of magnetic contractor for
spindle switching/output match power line status check signal. power line switching.
AL–55
switching Check if power line status check signal is
processed normally.

336
B–62835EN/01 9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE)

9.2
TROUBLESHOOTING
FOR EACH ALARM

AL–01 Motor overheat

Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Defective fan motor Check if fan motor is Replace fan motor.
1
of motor rotating.
Overload operation Check cutting conditions Review cutting conditions

om
and how tools are worn. and tools.
2
Check load meter for
cutting.
Dirty motor cooling Check motor cooling sys- Clean motor cooling
3 system tem for dirt. system with an air gun or
vacuum cleaner.
Disconnection or Check signal line connec- Connect signal line

r.c
loose contact of tion status. correctly.
4
motor overheat
signal line

AL–02 Excessive speed

e
deviation Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Overload operation Check with load meter. Review cutting conditions
1

2
nt (overload)
Defective transistor
module
Check if transistor collec-
tor-emitter is open.
and tools.
Replace transistor module.
ce
Fuse for protecting Check if fuses F3A to F3M Insert fuses firmly.
driver on PCB (models 1S to 26S) or FA Replace any blown fuse.
blown or not in- to FG (models 30S and
3
serted correctly 40S) are blown or re-
(disconnection, moved.
loose contact, etc.)
nc

Speed feedback Check level of speed feed- Check motor speed detec-
4 signal abnormality back signal. tor and signal cable con-
nection.
Wiring failure Check that cables are
5 (disconnection, connected correctly.
.c

loose contact, etc.)

NOTE
w

How to check the speed feedback signal

Observe the speed feedback signal with an osciloscope
after turning on power and setting the rotation command off
w

(motor stopped and drive power set off).

Observe the test points indicated below, while turning the
motor slowly by hand.
w

337
9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

Test point Normal wave form

PA–0V Vp–p=0.36 to 0.5V

About 2.5V
0V
PB–0V Same as above
RA–0V 2.5VDC±0.2V
RB–0V Same as above
PAA–0V PAP ON OFF
PBA–0V

om
(CW rotation)

0V

PBP ON OFF

r.c
4.5V
0V
0.4V

e
Check that the ON/OFF duty cycle is 50%.
(The PAP and PBP signals are inverted in CCW direction.)

AL–03 Blown fuse in DC

link section
nt
This alarm indicates that the fuse (F4) in the DC link section is blown.
In this case, the transistor module may have failed.
ce
AL–04 Input fuse blown
Input power open Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

phase High impedance on Alarm No. 04 is on only at Change power supply to

AC power supply time of deceleration from one with low impedance.
nc

side. high speed operation. There may be loose con-

Example: Alarm No. 04 can be on nection of input power
1 Two transformers when F1 to F3 are not cable
are connected in blown. Example:
series, or variable Open phase due to
autotransformer is screws not tightened
.c

connected. firmly
Defective transistor Replace transistor module
2 module and fuse.
w

Defective diode mod- Disconnect diode mod- Replace defective part.

ule or thyristor mod- ules DM1 to DM3 and thy- Replace blown fuse.
ule ristor modules SM1 to
w

SM3, then check A-K

3
connection with multime-
ter. (Defective modules
are usually short-cir-
w

cuited.)
Defective surge ab- Check surge absorbers Replace defective part.
4 sorber or capacitor Z1 to Z3 and capacitors Replace blown fuse.
C4 to C6.
When input fuse is Check if Item 1 is applica- When Item 1 is not applica-
5
not blown ble. ble, replace PCB.

338
B–62835EN/01 9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE)

AL–05 Control power

supply fuse blown Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
1 Defective PCB Replace PCB.
Check AC in
input
ut voltage.
voltage
Abnormal power sup- See (5) above.
2
ply voltage

AL–07 Excessive speed

(Detection by Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

digital value) Incorrect setting of Check if number of speed Set correct value in
parameter for number feedback pulses matches parameter.
1
of speed feedback parameter setting.

om
pulses (No. 6511)

NOTE
See Chapter 6.

r.c
AL–08 High input voltage
Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
AC power supply volt- Check power supply
1 age 10% higher than voltage.

e
rated voltage.
Incorrect setting of Check power supply Change setting from 200V

AL–09 Heat sink is

nt
2 toggle switch for volt-
age switching.
voltage. to 230V.
ce
overheated Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Cooling fan is defec- Check if fan is rotating. Replace fan.
1
tive.
Overload operation. Check load by using a Re-examine the cutting
2
load meter. condition.
nc

Dusty and dirty. Clean using compressed

3
air or vacuum cleaner.

AL–10 Input power This alarm indicates abnormally low AC power voltage (–15% or less).
.c

voltage drops This alarm may be generated even during momentary power failures.
w

AL–11 Overvoltage of DC
link circuit Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

(Regenerative High power imped- Examine AC power specifi-

1
w

ance. cation.
circuit is
2 PCB is defective. Replace PCB.
faulty…Regenerati
Defective transistor Replace transistor mod-
on failure) 3
w

module (TM1). ule.

AL–12 Overcurrent flows

to DC link circuit Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Output terminals or Check connections.
1 internal circuit of mo-
tor is shorted.
Transistor module is Check the transistor Replace transistor module.
2
defective. module.
3 PCB is defective. Replace PCB.

339
9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

AL–13 CPU internal data Replace PCB .

memory alarm

AL–16 RAM abnormality

Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
External data memory Replace memory (RAM).
1
(RAM) defective
2 PCB defective Replace PCB.

AL–18 Program ROM

om
sum check error Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Program memory Compare data displayed Replace program memory
1 data (ROM) defective when power is turned ON (ROM).
with ROM labels.

AL–19 Excessive U

r.c
phase current Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

detection circuit A/D converter defec- Replace A/D converter.

1
tive
offset
U-phase current de- After power is turned on, Replace PCB.
tector circuit defective check if offset voltage on

e
2 check terminal IU is be-
yond range of about
"100 mV.
nt
3
Loose contact of con-
nectors between PCB
and power circuit
Check connector connec-
tion between PCB and
power circuit.
Ensure that PCB and pow-
er circuit are securely con-
nected with each other.
ce
AL–20 Excessive V
phase current Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

detection circuit V-phase current de- After power is turned on, Replace PCB.
tector circuit defective check if offset voltage on
offset 1 check terminal IV is be-
nc

yond range of about

"100 mV.
Loose contact of con- Check connector connec- Ensure that PCB and pow-
2 nectors between PCB tion between PCB and er circuit are securely con-
and power circuit power circuit. nected with each other.
.c

AL–24 Serial transfer

data error Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
w

CNC power supply is Check that CNC power is Turn CNC power ON.
1
OFF ON.
AL–25 Serial data
transfer stopped Defective optical Check that optical cable is Connect securely.
w

cable for serial data fitted securely to the con- Replace optical cable.
transmission nector. Check that the Clean optical cable trans-
2 cable is not broken. mission/reception sur-
Check that transmission/ faces.
reception surfaces of the
w

cable are clean.

Defective data trans- Replace LSI.
mission/reception ele- Replace PCB.
3 ments in LSI used in
serial data transmis-
sion

340
B–62835EN/01 9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE)

AL–27 Position coder

signal Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

disconnection Position coder signal Check that signal cable is Connect signal cable se-
line defective connected securely to curely.
1 connector. Replace signal cable.
Check that signal cable is
not broken.
Incorrect parameter Check that the parameter Parameter MRDY2 = 0
setting setting does not indicate No. 4001#2
2 that the position coder
signal is used when actu-
ally it is not.

om
AL–29 Short–time
overload Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Overloaded opera- Use loadmeter to check Re-examine cutting
tion (Overload) that a load close to the conditions and tools.
1 load resistance limit is not
imposed continuously for

r.c
30 seconds or more.

AL–30 Input circuit

overcurrent Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Defective of power Check power transistor. Replace power transistor.

e
1 transistor used for
power
Defective of power Replace PCB.

AL–31 Speed detection

2nt regeneration circuit

Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

ce
signal
disconnection Motor constrained Check that nothing is Remove cause.
1 preventing the motor from
motor restraint accelerating.
alarm Defective motor Check signal waveform. Remove cause.
nc

2 speed feedback (Alarm No. 2)

signal
Defective motor Check that cable is con- Connect cable securely.
speed feedback nected securely to con- Replace cable.
3 signal cable nector.
Check that cable is not
.c

broken.

AL–32 Abnormality in
w

RAM internal to Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

LSI for serial data Defective LSI used in Replace LSI.

1 serial data transmis- Replace PCB.
transfer sion
w

AL–33 Insufficient DC
link section Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
w

charging Defective relay used Check relevant parts. Replace amp.

in DC link rechar-
1 ging.Disconnection of
resistor used in limit-
ing re-charge current

341
9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

AL–34 Parameter data

setting beyond Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

allowable range Incorrect parameter Check if specified param- Specify value within allow-
1 setting eter value is beyond al- able range.
of values lowable range of values.

AL–34 and F–XXX are alternately displayed in the spindle amplifier

indicator section if an AL–34 alarm is raised.
“XXX” indicates the data number internal to the spindle for a parameter
where a value beyond the allowable range is specified.

om
AL–35 Excessive gear
ratio data setting Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy
Parameter data of Check gear ratio and Change to suitable values.
gear ratio and posi- position gain data.
1
tion gain are too
large.

r.c
AL–37 Speed detector
parameter setting Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

error Incorrect setting of Check if number of speed Set correct value in

parameter for number feedback pulses matches parameter.
1

e
of speed feedback parameter setting.
pulses (No. 6511)

AL–41 Alarm for

indicating failure
in detecting
nt
Item Cause of trouble
Incorrect setting of
Check procedure
Check number of position
Remedy
Set correct value in param-
ce
parameter for number coder signal pulses and eter.
position coder 1 of position coder sig- parameter setting.
nal pulses (No.
1–rotation signal 4003#4,6,7).
Incorrect amplitude Check feedback signal Adjust feedback signal.
and offset of position level and also check if Check shielding status.
nc

2 coder feedback sig- feedback signal waveform

nal, or noise on same includes noise.
feedback signal.

AL–47 Position coder

.c

signal Item Cause of trouble Check procedure Remedy

abnormality Incorrect setting of Check number of position Set correct value in param-
parameter for number coder signal pulses and eter.
1 of position coder sig- parameter setting.
w

nal pulses
(No. 4003#4,6,7).
Incorrect amplitude Check feedback signal Adjust feedback signal.
w

and offset of position level and also check if Check shielding status.
2 coder feedback sig- feedback signal waveform
nal, or noise on same includes noise.
feedback signal.
w

342
 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
B–62835EN/01 (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE)

10 TROUBLESHOOTING (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE)

This chapter describes troubleshooting of the analog interface spindle.

om
10.1 AL–01 (MOTOR OVERHEAT)
10.2 AL–02 (EXCESSIVE DEVIATION OF SPEED)
10.3 AL–06,07 (OVER SPEED)
10.4 AL–09 (UNIT OVERHEAT / 6S TO 26S ONLY)

r.c
10.5 AL–10 (LOW INPUT VOLTAGE)
10.6 AL–11 (DC LINK EXCESSIVE VOLTAGE)
10.7 AL–12 (DC LINK EXCESSIVE CURRENT)

e
10.8 ABNORMAL SOUND AND VIBRATION
DURING ROTATION
nt
10.9 NO ROTATION OR INCORRECT SPEED
10.10CONFIRMATION OF TRANSISTOR MODULE
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

343
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
(ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

10.1
AL–01
(MOTOR OVERHEAT)
Model 6S to 22S (A20B–1003–0010)

(Start) PCB

+24V

om
Measure voltage of *OH signal
at input side of receiver R11 CN2 Inside motor
–3 TH
ALM RV

24V NO
–2
(contact open)

r.c
0V
?

YES

· Fan motor is not operating

e
· Overload
Reduce cutting condition
Receiver circuit is faulty
· Disconnection of signal line
nt
ce
Model 1S to 3S (A16B–1100–0200)

(Start) PCB
nc

+15V
CN2 Inside motor
Check continuity across pin 2 and 3 of –3
CN2 and pin 9 and 10 of CN4 TH
ALM RV
.c

–2
NO CN4
Contact open ? –9 Inside unit
TH
w

YES
–10
0V
w

· Fan motor is not operating

· Overload
Reduce cutting condition
Receiver circuit is faulty
w

· Disconnection of signal line

344
 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
B–62835EN/01 (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE)

10.2
AL–02
(EXCESSIVE
DEVIATION OF
SPEED)
(Start)

om
Does it occur YES
during deceleration?

NO · Regenerative discharge
circuit is faulty * Refer to 10.10

r.c
Apply a rotation command · Regenerative transistor “Confirmation of
and check whether motor rotates module is faulty Transistor Module”
· Load inertia is large
· PCB is faulty

e
NO (No rotation)
Does motor rotate?

nt
YES

Rotate the motor by hand

* Under AL–02
not generated
Command about
10 rpm speed.
ce
under emergency stop state
and check display of the speed
YES Normal output at
terminal U, V, W?

NO
nc

· Disconnection of
power line
· Motor is defective · PCB is faulty
· Machine load is large · Transistor module is faulty
(Disconnection across C and E)
· Unit is faulty (Check Ch.VDC)
.c

Is the speed YES

displayed?
w

NO
Check voltage of YES (2.5V ±0.2V)
RA and RB
(Normal)
w

NO
(2.5V ±0.2V)

Does PA and YES

w

PB change?

NO

· PCB is faulty
· If current limitter is operating, · Pulse generator is faulty PCB is faulty
machine load is excessive · Disconnection of feedback
(more than 4. 2V at IU) cable
· Poor contact of connector

345
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
(ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

10.3
AL–06, 07
(OVER SPEED)
(Start)

Measure actual speed

om
Does it exceed NO (115% or less)
rated speed?

YES
· Check parameter F–05 * Unused for 1S to 3S

r.c
Apply a speed command
and measure VCMD · Check specification of
ROM
· PCB is faulty

YES

e
Does it exceed 10V?

nt
NO

Measure ER under
emergency stop state
DA2?

NO
YES (10V or more)
ce
· S analog voltage is in
(Normal)
error or adjustment is
required
PCB is faulty · NC side PCB is faulty
NO
Nearly 0V?
nc

YES

Rotate the motor by hand and PCB is faulty

.c

confirm PA, PB, and TSA

w

Output at PA, PB, NO (No output at TSA)

and TSA
w

YES
w

Check parameters again PCB is faulty

346
 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
B–62835EN/01 (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE)

10.4
AL–09
(UNIT OVERHEAT /
6S TO 26S ONLY)

(Start)
PCB

+24V

om
Measure voltage of OVL signal
at input side of receiver
CN6 Inside unit
–6 TH
ALM RV

NO
24V (contact open?) –7

r.c
0V

YES

· Fan motor does not operate

e
· Overload
Receiver circuit is faulty
Check cutting conditions
· Disconnection of signal line
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

347
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
(ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

10.5
AL–10
(LOW INPUT
VOLTAGE)
(Start)

Measure voltage at check

om
SDC : 5V / 500V
terminal SDC on PCB · Terminal DTDC for 1S to 3S

NO
1.5V or less?

r.c
YES

Check DC voltage across

* Confirm input voltage for 1S to 3S

e
4 and 5 of CN6

nt
Less than 150V?
NO
ce
YES
* No fuse for 1S to 3S

Does fuse FUR, FUS, YES

FUT blown?
nc

NO
· Serge absorber is faulty
· Input voltage is low · Fan motor is faulty · Instantaneous power
· Unit is faulty
.c

· Unit is faulty interruption

· PCB is faulty
w
w
w

348
 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
B–62835EN/01 (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE)

10.6
AL–11
(DC LINK EXCESSIVE
VOLTAGE)

(Start)

om
Measure voltage at VDC : 5V/500V
test point VDC

YES

r.c
4.5V or more

NO

e
Does it occur during NO
deceleration

nt
YES

Measure resistance across C and E * Registor for discharge circuit

ce
of transistor module for generative or transistor is disconnected for
discharge circuit 1S to 3S

YES
nc

Shorted?

NO
· Confirm input voltage
.c

Replace transistor · Check noise of input signal

Input voltage is low module and PCB
w
w
w

349
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
(ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

10.7
AL–12
(DC LINK EXCESSIVE
CURRENT)
(Start)

Remove the power line and

om
measure resistance across C
and E of transistor module

YES
Short–circuited

r.c
across C and E?

NO
Replace transistor
module and PCB
Turn on power with power

e
line removed.
Give a speed command of
serval tens rpm.
nt YES
ce
AL–12?

NO
PCB is faulty
nc

Is power line YES

short–circuited
or grounded?

NO
· Power line is faulty
.c

· Motor is faulty

Does it occur during YES

deceleration?
w

NO
w

PCB is faulty (vibration) Check input voltage

Current feedback signal
is abnormal
w

350
 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
B–62835EN/01 (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE)

10.8
ABNORMAL SOUND
AND VIBRATION
DURING ROTATION

(Start)

om
Does it occur during YES
deceleration

NO
Check regenerative discharge * For 1S to 3S, disconnection of
circuit (pause of regeneration) transistor of discharge circuit or

r.c
Check waveform · Check transistor module
with synchroscope discharge resistor
during rotation
· TSA If load inertia is large,
· ER decrease value of F–20

e
NO
Is abnormality
confirmed?

YES
nt * Take enough care
* Do not execute frequently
Remove connector CN2 during
rotation, and the machine may
ce
Check relation between move a little.
frequency of vibration and
speed by changing speeds
NO Is abnormal
sound heard?
nc

YES
Electric system is abnormal
· Check incorrect signal of
pulse generator
· PCB is faulty Problem of machine
.c

NO Feedback signal of pulse generator

w

Is there any
1:1
relation?
+5V
YES
w

PAP
· Check incorrect signal 0V
· Check gear between spindle of pulse generator
and spindle motor · Failure of machine
w

+5V
· Observe frequency of vibration · PCB is faulty
per motor rotation and check · Check parameters F–21, PBP
the mechanical element that has 22, 25, and 26 0V
the frequency
1/2 1:1

351
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
(ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE) B–62835EN/01

10.9
NO ROTATION OR
INCORRECT SPEED

(Start)

Is power supplied to NO

om
PCB correctly?

YES
· Check input voltage
· Check power circuit within PCB
Give a rotation command

r.c
NO (0V or too low)
Is VCMD normal?

e
YES
YES Is voltage at
nt
Check whether MCC is on. · Check SFR, SRV,
DA2 normal?

NO

SRCM signals
ce
Check voltage at VDC.
· Check override circuit · Check S analog voltage
· Check setting of spindle
speed
⋅PCB is faulty · Check machine side
magnetics circuit
nc

YES (2.6 to 3.2V)

Is voltage normal?
SFR SRV ORCM Spindle rotation
NO 1 0 0 Forward
.c

(0V)
0 1 0 Reverse
MCC is off
Check following signals : – – 1 Orientation
⋅*ESP signal
w

⋅MRDY signal
⋅Speed zero signal (SSTP) PCB is faulty
w

WARNING
w

Whille you are checking above items, if the system may

recover, the spindle may suddenly start its rotation.
Therefore, take enough care when you access the spindle
or its peripherals.

352
 10. TROUBLESHOOTING
B–62835EN/01 (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE)

10.10
(1) Remove PCB–1 on the spindle amplifier.
CONFIRMATION OF
(2) Turn off power of main power supply of machine side and remove the
TRANSISTOR motor power line.
MODULE (3) Measure resistance across the following terminals of the transistor
module on the circuit board shown below with a tester.

B1 B3 B5 (+)

om
P
B1 B3 B5

B2 B4 B6
(–) P Uo Vo Wo
N (+)
B2 B4 B6

r.c
Uo Vo Wo N
(–)

e
Judgement (Range of tester : x10 ohm)
nt
Terminal

C–E
Tester
C:+
Normal
100 ohms
Abnormal
Short, infinity
ce
C:– Infinity Short, 100 ohms

C:+ 100 ohms Short, infinity

C–B
C:– Infinity Short, 100 ohms
nc

B:+ 100 ohms Short, infinity

B–E
B:– 100 ohms Short, infinity

* When a transistor is defective, terminals across collector and

.c

emitter, and across collector and base are short–circuited.

w

Collector (C)

Base (B)
w

Emittor (E)
w

353
w
w
w
.c
nc
ce
APPENDIX

nt
er.c
om
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX A. I/O UNIT MODEL A

A I/O UNIT MODEL A

A.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A.2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

om
A.3 LED INDICATION
A.4 FUSES
A.5 REMOVING A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

357
A. I/O UNIT MODEL A APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

A.1 Up to 16 FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A groups can be connected to a

Power Mate through the FANUC I/O Link high–speed serial interface.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION Slave

Master Base 0 Base 1

Power I/O UNIT I/O UNIT Group 0

Mate

om
I/O UNIT Group 1

Group 2

r.c
Group 15

e
* The number and types of slave units that can be connected for each
group are as follows :
nt
D Up to two I/O Units
D One Power Mate
D One I/O card
ce
A.2
HARDWARE Base unit
nc

CONFIGURATION (ABU05A or ABU10A)

Label
.c

(indicat-
ing the
specifi-
cations)
w

Input /Output modules

w

Interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B)

w

358
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX A. I/O UNIT MODEL A

A.3 Modules having up to 16 input/output points are provided with LEDs to

indicate their statuses.
LED INDICATION Use these LED’s to assist you with troubleshooting.

AIF01A
fPWR fLINK Symbol Description
PWR Indicates that the internal 24 VDC power
fBA1
supply is operating normally.
fBA0 LINK Indicates that the I/O Link is operating nor-
mally.

om
AIF01A BA0 Indicates the number of the base from which
BA1 data is being transferred.

BA1 BA0 Base number

f f Base #0
f F Base #1

r.c
F f Base #2
F F Base #3

F’On

e
f ’Off

If the LINK went on once, but then falled,

nt these LEDs indicate the number of the base
that was transferring data when the error oc-
curred.
ce
AIF01B
Symbol Description
fPWR fLINK
PWR Indicates that the internal 24 VDC power
supply is operating normally.
nc

LINK Indicates that the I/O Link is operating nor-

mally.
AIF01B
.c

Input / Output modules

Symbol Description
w

(with up to 16 input /
A01234567
output points) F
A0 to 7 Indicate the state of an input / output signal
B0 to 7 (LED on : signal on, LED off : signal off )
B01234567
w

F Indicates that the internal fuse has blown

Afffff
w

359
A. I/O UNIT MODEL A APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

A.4 The following modules provide the corresponding protection fuses. If a

fuse blows for any reason , such as the short–circuiting of a cable
FUSES connected to a load, first remove the cause of the problem, then replace
the fuse.
Indication
of whether Rated cur-
Module Parts number of fuse
a fuse has rent
blown
AIF01A Interface module PWR off A60L–0001–0290#LM32 3.2A
AIF01B Interface module PWR off A60L–0001–0290#LM32 3.2A

om
A0D08C Output module F on A60L–0001–0260#5R00 5A
(8 DC points)
A0D08D Output module F on A60L–0001–0260#5R00 5A
(8 DC points)
A0A05E Output module F on A60L–0001–0276#3.15 3.15A
(5 AC points)

r.c
A0A08E Output module F on A60L–0001–0276#3.15 3.15A
(8 AC points)
A0A12F Output module F on A60L–0001–0276#3.15 3.15A
(12 AC points)

e
WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the
nt
cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel
who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety
are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse
ce
with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
nc

get an electric shock.

.c
w
w
w

360
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX A. I/O UNIT MODEL A

A.5
REMOVING A
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD
D Removing a 1 Remove the terminal box, if necessary.
terminal–box–type 2 Remove the LED cap by pulling it in the direction indicated by the
input/output module arrow.

LED cap

om
(2)

Ter-
(1) mi-
nal

r.c
box

e
3 While pushing the connector in the direction indicated by the arrow,
use a screwdriver to release the two claws on the module case.
nt Screwdriver
ce
Claw
nc

Connector
.c

Claw
w

4 As shown on the right, insert a screwdriver into the gap between the
module case and the connector of the terminal box. To remove the
w

printed circuit board, push the connector in the direction indicated by

arrow B while pushing the screwdriver in the direction indicated by
arrow A
w

Underside of the module

B A

Connector

361
A. I/O UNIT MODEL A APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

D Removing a
connector–type 1 To remove the cover, pull it in the direction indicated by the arrow,
input/output module while using a screwdriver to release claws A and B on both sides.

A Connector

om
Cover
B

2 To remove the LED cap, pull it in the direction indicated by the arrow.

r.c
LED cap

e
nt Connector
ce
3 While pushing the connector in the direction indicated by the arrow,
use a screwdriver to release the two or four claws on the module case.
nc

Then, remove the printed circuit board by pushing the connector in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
.c

Screwdriver
w

Claw
w
w

Connector

Claw

362
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

B ALARM LIST

1) Program errors (P/S alarm)

Number Message Contents

om
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the
tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will
be generated only when the TV check is effective. Correct the tape.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input.

r.c
(Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.)
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign “ – ” was input without an address at the begin-
ning of a block. Modify the program .
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was fol-

e
lowed by another address or EOB code. Modify the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN Sign “ – ” input error (Sign “ – ” was input after an address with which
it cannot be used. Or two or more “ – ” signs were input.)

007
nt
ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT
Modify the program.
Decimal point “ .” input error (A decimal point was input after an ad-
dress with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were in-
ce
put.)
Modify the program.
009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Unusable character was input in significant area.
Modify the program.
010 IMPROPER G–CODE An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not
nc

provided is specified. Modify the program.

011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was
inadequate. Modify the program.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between
.c

the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No.
3410. Modify the program.
w

021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19)
COMMANDED was commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset.
w

G43/G44 Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length
offset. Modify the program.
028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the same direc-
w

tion are commanded.

Modify the program.
029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H code is too large.
Modify the program.
030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by H code for tool length offset is too
large. Modify the program.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following ad-
dress P was excessive or it was not specified.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by sys-
tem variables, the offset amount was excessive. Correct the offset value.

363
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Number Message Contents

044 G27–G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode.
CYC Modify the program.
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN Other than P2 and P3 are commanded for 2nd and 3rd reference
COMMAND position return command.
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND In an external workpiece number search, a specified program num-
ber was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is
being edited in background processing. Check the program number
and external signal. Or discontinue the background eiting.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence num-
ber search. Check the sequence number.

om
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The tape memory area is insufficient.
MEMORY An attempt to input a ladder program using the DPL/MDI failed be-
cause the program was too big.
Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with
specified program number was not found in program number search.

r.c
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (op-
tion), 200 (option), or 400 (option). Delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.

e
073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
074

075
ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER

PROTECT
nt The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
Modify the program number.
An attempt was made to register a program whose number was pro-
ce
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program.
nc

078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number which was specified by
address P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was
not found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement
was not found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in back-
ground processing. Correct the program, or discontinue the back-
.c

ground editing.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree
with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs
in memory and those from the external device.
w

085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher inter-
face, an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number
of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O
w

unit is incorrect.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher inter-
face, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was off.
w

Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is

defective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or base P.C.B. is defective.
090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot be performed normally because
INCOMPLETE the reference position return start point is too close to the reference
position or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough
from the reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for
reference position return.

364
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents

091 REFERENCE RETORN INCOM- An attempt was made to return to the reference position during feed
PLETE hold. If it becomes necessary to return to the reference position dur-
ing feed hold, reset the system to release the feed hold state before
returning to the reference position.
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did
POINT not return to the reference position.
093 EXTERNAL SETTING The reference position external setting cannot be performed because
INCOMPLETE the reference position external setting signal is set to 1 in the follow-
ing status.
1) When the jog feed mode (JOG) is not selected.

om
2) When the jog feed mode (JOG) is selected, however the signal
ZRN is 0.
3) When the emergency stop signal ESP is 0.
4) When the parameter APC No.1815 bit 5 is 0.
100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE(parameter writing en-
abled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system.

r.c
101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit op-
eration. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while pressing
<PROG>, and only the program being edited will be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the

e
allowable range. Modify the program.
111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The result of calculation result is out of the allowable range.

112 DIVIDED BY ZERO

nt (–1047 to –10–29, 0, and 10–29 to 1047). Check the calculated data.
Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90°) Check the calcu-
lated data.
ce
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.
Modify the program.
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom
nc

macro.
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.
.c

118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative, BCD argument is negative, or other
w

values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument.

Modify the program.
122 DUPLICATE MACRO MODAL–CALL The macro modal call is specified in double.
w

Modify the program.

123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND Macro control command is used during DNC operation.
IN DNC Modify the program.
w

124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO – END does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established. Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME NC and custom macro commands coexist.
BLOCK Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to
NUMBER 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used.
Modify the program.

365
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Number Message Contents

130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis
controlled by PMC. Modify the program.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message.
MESSAGES Consult the PMC ladder to find the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or exter-
ALARM MSG nal operator message. Check the PMC ladder.

om
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control.
CONTROL AXIS Modify the program.
145 ILEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR A condition for starting or canceling polar coordinate interpolation
COORDINATE INTERPOLATION was incorrect. There is an error at plane selection (parameter No.
5460 or 5461 error). Correct the program or parameter setting.
190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed control, the axis specification is wrong.

r.c
(See parameter No. 3770.) The specified axis command (P) contains
an illegal value.
Correct the program.
199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified.

e
The maximum value for S which can be specified in rigid tapping is
set in parameter (No.5241 to 5243). Change the setting in the

201

202
FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID
TAP
POSITION LSI OVERFLOW
nt parameter or modify the program.
In the rigid tapping, no F value is specified.
Correct the program.
In the rigid tapping, spindle distribution value is too large.
ce
203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAP- In the rigid tapping, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S
PING command is incorrect. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tapping, an axis movement is specified between the rigid
M code (M29) block and G84 (G74) block. Modify the program.
nc

205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF Rigid tapping signal (DGNG 061#1) is not 1 when G84 (G74) is
executed though the rigid M code (M29) is specified.Consult the PMC
ladder to find the reason the DI signal is not turned on.
Modify the program.
.c

206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (RIGID Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode.
TAP) Correct the program.
207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH The specified distance was too short or too long in rigid tapping.
w

224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return has not been performed before the auto-
matic operation starts. Perform reference position return only when
bit 0 of parameter 1005 ZRNX is 0.
w

231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the pro-
grammable–parameter input.
1) Address N or R was not entered.
2) A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
w

3) The axis number was too large.

4) An axis number was not specified in the axis–type parameter.
5) An axis number was specified in the parameter which is not an
axis type.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via
the RS–232–C interface, other users were using it.
239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function for controlling
external I/O units ,background editing was performed.
240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation.

366
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents

5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
5011 PARAMETER ZERO (CUT MAX) The parameter (No. 1422) for the maximum cutting feedrate is set to 0.

2) Background edit alarm

Number Message Contents
??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm that occurs
in ordinary program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.)
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in the background a program be-

om
ing selected in the foreground. (Note)
Use background editing correctly.

NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background edit screen instead
of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.

r.c
3) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm
Number Message Contents

e
300 nth–axis origin return Manual reference position return is required for the nth–axis (n=1 – 2).
301 APC alarm: nth–axis communication nth–axis (n=1 – 2) APC communication error. Failure in data trans-
nt mission
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.
ce
302 APC alarm: nth–axis over time nth–axis (n=1 – 2) APC overtime error.
Failure in data transmission.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.
303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing nth–axis (n=1 – 2) APC framing error. Failure in data transmission.
nc

Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.

304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity nth–axis (n=1 – 2) APC parity error.
Failure in data transmission.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
.c

305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse error nth–axis (n=1 – 2) APC pulse error alarm.
APC alarm.APC or cable may be faulty.
306 APC alarm: nth–axis battery voltage nth–axis (n=1 – 2) APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level
w

0 so that the data cannot be held.

APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty.
307 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 1 nth–axis (n=1 – 2) axis APC battery voltage reaches a level where
w

the battery must be renewed.

APC alarm. Replace the battery.
308 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 2 nth–axis (n=1 – 2) APC battery voltage has reached a level where
w

the battery must be renewed (including when power is OFF).

APC alarm .Replace battery.
309 APC alarm: nth–axis Ern impossible An attempt was made to return to the reference position without rotat-
ing the motor. First rotate the motor through at least one turn, then
turn the power off, before returning to the reference position.

367
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

4) Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarms

When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty serial pulse coder or cable.
Number Message Contents
350 SPC ALARM: n AXIS PULSE COD- The n axis (axis 1–2) pulse coder has a fault. Refer to diagnosis dis-
ER play No. 202 for details.
351 SPC ALARM: n AXIS COMMUNICA- n axis (axis 1–2) serial pulse coder communication error (data trans-
TION mission fault)
Refer to diagnosis display No. 203 for details.

om
D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350 (pulse coder alarm) are
pulse coder alarm displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 202 or 204) as shown below.
No.350 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH

r.c
CSA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
BLA : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries. This alarm has
nothing to do with alarm 350 (serial pulse coder alarm).
SPH : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace the
serial pulse coder or cable.

e
RCA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
BZA : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time.
nt Make sure that the batteries are connected.
Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform a reference
position return. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm 350
ce
(serial pulse coder alarm).
CKA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
PHA : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace the
serial pulse coder or cable.
nc

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS

OFS : A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo.

MCC: A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded.
.c

LDA : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective

PMS : A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable
w

is defective.
w
w

368
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351 (communication alarm)
pulse coder alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 203) as shown below.
No.351 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM

DTE : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.

The pulse coder, feedbak cable, or feedback receiver circuit is
defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, base PCB, or
servo module.
The servo interface type (A or B) is incorrect.

om
CRC : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is
defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, base PCB, or
servo module.
STB : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is

r.c
defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, base PCB, or servo
module.
PRM: An invalid parameter was found. Alarm 417 (invalid servo

e
parameter) is also issued.

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

369
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

5) Servo alarms
Number Message Contents
400 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS The n–th axis (axis 1–2) overload signal is on. Refer to diagnosis
OVERLOAD display No. 201 for details.
401 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS VRDY 1) The n–th (axis 1 or 2) servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) went
OFF off. Check the servo amplifier.
2) This alarm may occur if a servo amplifier is shared by several NC
units, or if a two–axis servo amplifier is used in a dual Power
Mate–D system. Set NOFVY (bit 2 of parameter No. 1803).
404 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS VRDY Even though the n–th axis (axis 1–2) READY signal (*MCON) went off,

om
ON the servo amplifier READY signal (*DRDY) is still on. Or, when the pow-
er was turned on, *DRDY went on even though *MCON was off.
405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in
RETURN FAULT) the reference position return, there is the possibility that reference
position return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the
manual reference position return.

r.c
409 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS An abnormal servo motor load was detected, or an abnormal spindle
TORQUE ALM motor load was detected during rigid tapping.
410 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1–2) stops is
EXCESS ERROR larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1829 for each axis.

e
411 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1–2) moves is
EXCESS ERROR larger than the set value.

413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS –

LSI OVERFLOW
nt
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1828 for each axis.
The contents of the error register for the n–th axis (axis 1–2) and be-
yond the range of –231 to 231. This error usually occurs as the result
of an improperly set parameters.
ce
414 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – N–th axis (axis 1–2) digital servo system fault. Refer to diagnosis
DETECTION RELATED ERROR display No. 200 and No.204 for details.
415 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – A speed higher than 511875 units/s was attempted to be set in the
EXCESS SHIFT n–th axis (axis 1–2). This error occurs as the result of improperly set
nc

CMR.
416 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – Position detection system fault in the n–th axis (axis 1–2) pulse coder
DISCONNECTION (disconnection alarm). Refer to diagnosis display No. 201 for details.
417 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – This alarm occurs when the n–th axis (axis 1–2) is in one of the
.c

PARAMETER INCORRECT conditions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm)

1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of the
specified limit.
2) A proper value (111 or –111) is not set in parameter No.2022
w

(motor revolution direction).

3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2023
(number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution).
w

4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2024
(number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution).
5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flexible field gear rate) have
not been set.
w

6) A value outside the limit of {1 to the number of control axes} or

a non–continuous value (Parameter 1023 (servo axis number)
contains a value out of the range from 1 to the number of axes,
or an isolated value (for example, 3 not prceded by 2).was set in
parameter No. 1023 (servo axisnumber).
421 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS The difference between the semi–closed side error and the fully
EXCESS ER (D) closed side error became large when the dual position feedback
function was being used. Check the setting of the dual position con-
version factor (parameter Nos. 2078 and 2079).

370
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

6) Over travel alarms

If this alarm occurs, move the machine manually in the direction opposite to that in which it was moving when
the alarm occurred, then reset the alarm.
Number Message Contents
500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–2) + side stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1320)
501 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–2) – side stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1321)

7) Overheat alarms

om
Number Message Contents
700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT Control unit overheat
Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor on the top of the contorl unit is overheated. Check the
operation of the fan motor and replace the motor if necessary.

r.c
8) Spindle alarms
Number Message Contents
749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR A communication error occurred for the serial spindle. The cause may

e
be the disconnection of an optical cable or the interruption of the power
to the spindle amplifier.

750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START

nt (Note) Unlike alarm No. 750, this alarm occurs when a serial commu-
nication alarm is detected after the spindle amplifier is normally acti-
vated.
This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not ready for
ce
FAULT starting correctly when the power is turned on in the system with the
serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control unit’s
power is OFF.
nc

2) When the NC power was turned on under alarm conditions other

than SU–01 or AL–24 which are shown on the LED display of the
spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform
startup again.
.c

3) Other reasons (improper combination of hardware)

This alarm does not occur after the system including the spindle
control unit is activated.
4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of parameter No. 3701, is 1)
w

is in one of the above conditions 1) to 3).

See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
For serial spindle operation, the position coder should be connected
w

to the serial spindle amplifier. Determine whether it has been con-

nected to the JA12 connector of the Power Mate by mistake.
751 FIRST SPINDLE ALARM DETEC- This alarm indicates in the NC that an alarm is generated in the spindle
w

TION (AL–XX) unit of the system with the serial spindle. The alarm is displayed in form
AL–XX (XX is a number). Refer to Sec.9.1.The alarm number XX is the
number indicated on the spindle amplifier. The CNC holds this number
and displays on the screen.
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does not properly terminate a
FAULT mode change. The modes include the spindle positioning, rigid tapping,
and spindle control modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control
unit does not respond correctly to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
754 SPINDLE–1 ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal spindle motor load was detected.
ALM

371
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

D The details of spindle The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis display
alarm No.750 (No. 409) as shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 SPE S1E SHE

SPE 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters

fulfill the spindle unit startup conditions.
1 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do
not fulfill the spindle unit startup conditions.

om
S1E 0 : The first spindle is normal during the spindle serial control
startup.
1 : The first spindle was detected to have a fault during the
spindle axis serial control startup.

SHE 0 : The serial communications module in the CNC is normal.

r.c
1 : The serial communications module in the CNC was detected
to have a fault.

9) System alarms

e
(These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)
Number Message Contents
900

910
ROM PARITY

SRAM PARITY: (4N)

nt ROM parity error
Replace the ROM.
RAM parity error. Clear the memory or replace the base PCB or
ce
memory module.
After this operation, reset all data including the parameters.
911 SRAM PARITY : (4N+1) RAM parity error. Clear the memory or replace the base PCB or
memory module.
After this operation, reset all data including the parameters.
nc

920 SERVO ALARM (1/2 AXIS) Servo alarm (1st or 2nd axis). A watchdog alarm or a local RAM par-
ity error of the servo occured.
Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board.
924 SERVO MODULE SETTING The servo module is not installed.
.c

ERROR Check that the servo control module or servo interface module on the
base PCB is mounted securely.
930 CPU INTERRUPUT CPU error (abnormal interrupt)
w

The base PCB, memory module, or CPU module is faulty.

950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM Fault occurred in the PMC. The base PCB or PMC module may be
faulty.
w

951 PMC–PA WATCH DOG ALARM Fault occurred in the PMC–PA3 module (watchdog alarm).
Defective base printed–circuit board or PMC control module
w

970 NMI OCCURRED IN BOC A RAM parity error or NMI occurred in the PMC–PA3 module. It is
likely that the base printed–circuit board or PMC module is defective.
971 NMI OCCURRED IN SLC An alarm occurred in the FANUC I/O link master function. Check the
connection between the controller and the I/O unit or I/O card. Also
check whether the I/O unit and I/O card are supplied with power and
whether the interface module or the I/O card is faulty. Or, check the
PMC module.
973 NON MASK INTERRUPT NMI occurred for an unknown reason. Or, a communication error oc-
curred in the FANUC I/O link slave function.
980 SYNC ERROR The ITP period of the master became asynchronous with that of the
slave. Replace the base printed–circuit board.

372
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

10) ALARM OF M–NET

Number Message Contents
5051 M–NET CODE ERROR Abnormal character received (other than code used for transmission).
5052 M–NET ETX ERROR Abnormal ETX code.
5053 M–NET CONNECT TIMEOUT Connection time monitoring error (parameter No. 175).
5054 M–NET RECEIVE TIMEOUT Polling time monitoring error (parameter No. 176).
5055 M–NET PRT/FRM ERROR Vertical parity or framing error.
5056 M–NET OVERRUN ERROR Overrun error is detected.
5057 M–NET TRANSFER TIMEOUT Transmission timeout error (parameter No. 178).

om
5058 M–NET ROM PARITY ERROR ROM parity error is detected.
5059 M–NET BOARD SYSTEM ERROR Unjust interruption is occured.

11) MEMORY CARD ALARM

Number Message Contents and solution

r.c
5101 MEMORY CARD NOT No memory card is inserted.
CONNECTED Insert a memory card before attempting input/output.
5102 MEMORY CARD WRITE The memory card is write–protected.
PROTECTED Write–enable the memory card before attempting to write data to it.

e
5103 MEMORY CARD DATA ERROR (During restoration) The memory card contains invalid data.
(During saving) Data cannot be written to the memory card.

5104 EMERGENCY STOP RELEASE

nt The memory card may be defective.
Use another memory card.
The emergency stop state was released during input/output to or
from the memory card. Place the system in emergency stop state,
ce
then retry input/output.
5105 LADDER READ ERROR An alarm was issued during the input of ladder programs from the
memory card. Reinput the ladder programs.
5106 MEMORY CARD SIZE ERROR The capacity of the memory card is less than the size of the data to
be saved.
nc

Use a memory card having a capacity greater than the size of the
data to be saved.
5107 MEMORY CARD DATA TYPE The data stored on the memory card is not supported by the system.
ILLEGAL Retry using a memory card containing data that is compatible with
the system.
.c

5109 MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM A PMC communication error occurred during input/output to or from
the memory card. Retry input/output.
5110 MEMORY CARD READ ERROR An attempt was made to simultaneously read data for the two Power
w

Mate–D units of a dual Power Mate–D system from the memory card,
but reading of the data for the Power Mate–D unit that is not currently
displayed failed. Re–set the input condition correctly, then re–enter
w

the data for the two Power Mate–D units. (This error occurs only for
a dual Power Mate–D system.)
5111 READ DATA MISSING IN PART An attempt was made to read the micro library for the first Power
Mate–D unit from the memory card and load it into the second Power
w

Mate–D unit, or to read the micro library for the second Power
Mate–D unit from the memory card and load it into the first Power
Mate–D unit. (This error occurs only for a dual Power Mate–D system.)

NOTE
For the 8830 series Version 12 and earlier
(A02B–0166–B001), alarm 5103 or 5106 may occur
because the use of the latest memory card is not supported.
Upgrade the ROM.

373
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

12) ALARM
Number Message Contents Counter plan Reference
1000 to A message created by the user or Alarm generated by Apply appropriate Manual provided by
1999 machine tool builder, using the PMC the user or machine countermeasures as machine tool builder
alarm message function, is dis- tool builder using the explained in the
played. PMC manual provided by
NOTE) On the DPL/MDI, only the the machine tool
number is displayed. builder.
3000 to A message created by the user or Alarm generated by Apply appropriate Manual provided by
3200 machine tool builder, using a custom the user or machine countermeasures as machine tool builder
macro, is displayed. tool builder, using a explained in the
NOTE) On the DPL/MDI, only the custom macro manual provided by

om
number is displayed. the machine tool
builder.
3000 to P/S ALARM Alarm generated by Manual provided by Manual provided by
3099 the user or machine machine tool builder machine tool builder
tool builder, using the
PMC alarm display

r.c
function
5010 END OF RECORD EOR was read with-
out specifying a pro-
gram end command.

e
13) Alarm messages (PMC)
This list contains alarms which do not occur in the Power Mate–D/F.
Message
ALARM NOTHING
nt
Normal status
Contents and solution
ce
ER00 PROGRAM DATA The ladder program is not written correctly.
ERROR(ROM) (solution) Write the ladder program again.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE The size of ladder program exceeds the option specification size.
ERROR(OPTION) (solution) Please increase the option specification size.
Or, reduce the size of ladder program.
nc

ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH The PMC model setting of the ladder program is not corresponding to an actual model.
(solution) Please change the PMC model setting by the offline programmer.
ER05 PMC MODULE TYPE The module type of the PMC engine is not correct.
ERROR
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine for a correct one.
.c

ER07 NO OPTION There is no step number option of LADDER.

(LADDER STEP)
w

ER17 PROGRAM PARITY A parity error occurred in RAM containing a ladder program.
(solution) Please edit the sequence program once on PMC. Check the operation.
Still the error occurs, exchange the RAM.
w

ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Transferring the ladder program from offline programmer was interrupted by the power
BY I/O off etc.
(solution) Please clear the ladder program and transfer the ladder program again.
w

ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Editing the LADDER was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to the CNC screen
by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit LADDER once on PMC.
Or, please input LADDER again.
ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT Editing the symbol and comment was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to the
DATA ERROR CNC screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit symbol and comment once on PMC.
Or, please input symbol and comment again.
ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Editing the message data was interrupted by the power off or the switch to the CNC
screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit message data once on PMC.
Or, please input message data again.

374
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

Message Contents and solution

ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING There is no sequence program
ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POW- There is a change in setting LADDER MAX AREA SIZE etc.
ER (solution) Please restart the system to make the change effective.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE Any DI/DO unit of I/O Unit or the connection unit etc. is not connected.
(solution) When I/O Link is used:
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turning on. Or please confirm
the connection of the cable.
ER33 SLC ERROR The LSI for I/O Link is defective.
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine.

om
ER34 SLC ERROR(xx) The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group failed.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to the DI/DO
units of the xx group.
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turned on earlier than Power Mate.
Or, please exchange the module of PMC engine on the DI/DO
units of the xx group
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which ex-

r.c
DATA IN GROUP(xx) ceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A connecting and maintenance manual”
(B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B connecting manual”(B–62163E)

e
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA The number of the input data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which exceed
IN GROUP(xx) 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
nt
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A connecting and maintenance manual”
(B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B connecting manual”(B–62163E)
ce
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of output side of xx group or later become ineffective.)
(solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number of
the output data of each group.
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
nc

DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of input side of xx group or later become infective.)
(Solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number of
the input data of each goup.
WN01 LADDER MAX SIZE The MAX LADDER AREA SIZE in the system parameter is illegal.
ERROR (solution) Set the correct value to MAX LADDER AREA SIZE and restart the system.
.c

WN03 ABORT NC–WINDOW/ LADDER was stopped while CNC and PMC were communicating.
EXIN The functional instruction WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, DISPB, and etc. may not work nor-
mally.
w

(solution) When restarting the system, this alarm will be released. Execute the
sequence program(Press RUN key) after confirming whether there is a
problem in LADDER or not.
w

WN07 LADDER SP ERROR When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CALLU(SUB66) was executed, the stack
(STACK) of the LADDER overflowed.
(solution) Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.
w

*When ER00 to ER23 occur, sequence program is not available.

375
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)

Message Contents and solution
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set.
FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number.
COM FUNCTION MISSING The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB29) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of COM and COME (SUB29) is incorrect.
Or, the number of coil controlled by COM is specified by the model which the number
cannot be specified.
EDIT BUFFER OVER There in no empty area of the buffer for the editing.
(solution) Please reduce NET under editing.

om
END FUNCTION MISSING Functional instruction END1,END2,END3 and END do not exist. Or, there are error net
in END1,END2,END3,END.
Or, order of END1,END2,END3, and END is not correct.
ERROR NET FOUND There is an error net.
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. The wrong number of the functional instruction is searched.

r.c
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL The functional instruction is not correctly connected.
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal line of the net is not connected.
ILLEGAL NET CLEARED Because the power had been turn off while editing LADDER, some net under editing
was cleared.

e
ILLEGAL OPERATION Operation is not correct.
The value is not specified and only INPUT key was pushed.
The address data is not correctly inputted.

SYMBOL UNDEFINED
nt
Because the space to display the instruction on screen is not enough, the functional
instruction cannot be made.
The symbol which was inputted is not defined.
ce
INPUT INVALID There is an incorrect input data.
Non–numerical value was inputted with COPY, INSLIN,C–UP,C–DOWN etc.
The input address was specified for write coil.
An illegal character was specified for the data table.
NET TOO LARGE The input net is larger than the editing buffer.
nc

(solution) Please reduce the net under editing.

JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The functional instruction JMP(SUB10) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of JMP and JMPE(SUB30) is incorrect.
The number of coil to jump is specified by the model which the number of coil cannot
specified. (It is possible to specify the coil number only on PMC–RB/RC.)
.c

LADDER BROKEN LADDER is broken.

LADDER ILLEGAL There is an incorrect LADDER.
w

OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program area was filled.

(solution) Please reduce the LADDER.
PARAMETER NOTHING There is no parameter of the functional instruction.
w

PLEASE COMPLETE NET The error net was found in LADDER.

(solution) After correcting the error net, please continue operating.
PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. Please input the number of the functional instruction.
w

(solution) If you do not input the functional instruction, please push soft key “FUNC”
again.
RELAY COIL FORBIT There is an unnecessary relay or coil.
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING The relay or the coil does not suffice.
PLEASE CLEAR ALL It is impossible to recover the sequence program.
(solution) Please clear the all data.
SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE The same symbol name is defined in other place.
COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW The comment data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the commnet.

376
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

Message Contents and solution

SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW The symbol data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the symbol.
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL There is an incorrect vertical line of the net.
MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW The message data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the message.
1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execution in time.
OVER (solution) Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.

14) SPINDLE ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE)

om
NOTE
Er–xx is not displayed on crt.
This list contains alarms which do not occur in the Power
Mate–D/F.

r.c
Message Contents Countermeasure
Er–01 *Although ESP (there are 2 types : connection signal and *Confirm the sequence of ESP and MRDY.

e
PMC→CNC) and MRDY (machine ready signal) are not
input, SFR/SRV is input. However, regarding MRDY, pay
attention to the setting of use/not use spindle parameter

Er–02
MRDY. nt
If spindle motor is not integrated with spindle in system Set the spindle motor speed detector parameter to
with high–resolution magnetic pulse coder, speed detec- 128 p/rev.
tor of spindle motor is set to 128 p/rev.
ce
Attempt to excite motor fails if value other than 128 p/rev
is set.
Er–03 Parameter for high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is Check parameter setting for high–resolution mag-
not set, but Cs contouring control command is entered. netic pulse coder.
In this case, motor is not excited.
nc

Er–04 Although parameter setting for using position coder was Confirm the parameter setting of the position coder.
not performed, commands for servo mode and synchro-
nous control are input.
In this case, the motor will not be excited.
.c

Er–05 Although option parameter for orientation is not set, the Confirm the parameter setting of orientation.
orientation command (ORCM) is input.
Er–06 Although option parameter for output switchover is not Confirm the parameter setting for output switching
set, LOW winding is selected. and power line status signal.
w

Er–07 Although Cs contouring control command was entered, Confirm the sequence.
SFR/SRV is not entered.
w

Er–08 Although servo mode control command was input, SFR/ Confirm the sequence.
SRV is not input.
Er–09 Although synchronous control command was input, Confirm the sequence.
SFR/SRV is not input.
w

Er–10 Cs control command was entered, but another mode Never set another mode when Cs contouring con-
(servo mode, synchronous control, orientation) is speci- trol command is being processed. Before chang-
fied. ing to another mode, clear Cs contouring contorl
command.
Er–11 Servo mode command was entered, but another mode Do not command other modes during servo mode
(Cs contouring control, synchronous control, orienta- command. When moving to other modes, perform
tion)is specified. after releasing the servo mode command.
Er–12 Synchronous control command was entered, but anoth- Do not command other modes during synchronous
er mode (Cs contouringt control, servo mode, orienta- control command.
tion) is specified. When moving to other modes, perform after releas-
ing the synchronous control command.

377
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Message Contents Countermeasure

Er–13 Orientation command was entered, but another mode Do not command other modes during orientation
(Cs contouring control, servo mode, synchronous con- command.
trol) is specified. When moving to other modes, perform after releas-
ing the orientation command.
Er–14 SFR/SRV are simultaneously commanded. Command one or the other.
Er–15 Cs contouring control command is entered when differ- Check parameter setting and control input signal.
ential speed control function is enabled by parameter
setting (No.6500#5=1).
Er–16 Differential mode command (DEFMDA) is entered when Check parameter setting and control input signal.
differential speed function is disabled by parameter set-

om
ting (No.6500#5=1).
Er–17 Parameter setting (No.6511#0,1,2) for speed detector is Check parameter setting.
incorrect. (Specified speed detector is not present.)
Er–18 Spindle orientation command of position coder type is Check parameter setting and control input signal.
entered when use of position coder signal is disabled by
parameter setting( No.6501#2=0).

r.c
Er–19 Although the command for orienting the magnetic sensor Do not issue another mode while the orientation
system was entered, another mode was issued. command is executed. Before issuing another
mode, cancel the orientation command.
Er–20 Both the slave mode and the high–resolution magnetic These two settings are incompatible. Check the
pulse coder were enabled. parameter settings.

e
Er–21 The slave mode command (SLV=1) was entered under Enter the slave mode command in the normal op-
position control (servo mode, orientation,etc.). eration mode.
Er–22 nt
The position control command (servo mode, orienta- Enter the position control command in the normal
tion,etc.) was entered in the slave operation mode operation mode.
(SLV=1).
ce
Er–23 A slave mode command was entered when the slave Enable the slave mode.
mode is disabled.
Er–24 To perform continuous indexing in the mode for orienting Check the control input signal (INCMD). To
the position coder system, incremental opera- execute the absolute position command continu-
tion(INCMD=1) was first performed, then the absolute ously, be sure to perform orientation with the abso-
nc

position command (INCMD=0) was entered. lute position command first.

Contact sig- Between ESP1 and ESP2 of spindle control printed cir- Contact is open : emergency stop
nal of *ESP cuit board Contact is closed : general operation
.c

Alarm Meaning Description Remedy

No.
“A” Program ROM abnormality Detects that control program is not started (due to Install normal program
display (not installed) program ROM not installed, etc.) ROM
w

AL–01 Motor Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed ex- Check load status.
overheat cessively. Cool motor then reset
alarm.
w

AL–02 Excessive speed deviation Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed ex- Check load status.
cessively. Reset alarm.
AL–03 DC link section fuse blown Detects that fuse F4 in DC link section is blown Check power transistors,
w

(models 30S and 40S). and so forth.

Replace fuse.
AL–04 Input fuse blown. Detects blown fuse (F1 to F3), open phase or mo- Replace fuse.
Input power open phase. mentary failure of power (models 30S and 40S). Check open phase and
power supply regenerative
circuit operation.
AL–05 Control power supply fuse Detects that control power supply fuse AF2 or AF3 Check for control power
blown is blown (models 30S and 40S). supply short circuit .
Replace fuse.
AL–07 Excessive speed Detects that motor rotation has exceeded 115% of its Reset alarm.
rated speed.

378
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

Alarm
No. Meaning Description Remedy

AL–08 High input voltage Detects that switch is flipped to 200 VAC when input Flip switch to 230 VAC.
voltage is 230 VAC or higher (models 30S and 40S).
AL–09 Excessive load on main circuit Detects abnormal temperature rise of power transis- Cool radiator then reset
section tor radiator. alarm.
AL–10 Low input voltage Detects drop in input power supply voltage. Remove cause, then reset
alarm.
AL–11 Overvoltage in DC link section Detects abnormally high direct current power supply Remove cause, then reset
voltage in power circuit section. alarm.
AL–12 Overcurrent in DC link section Detects flow of abnormally large current in direct cur- Remove cause, then reset

om
rent section of power cirtcuit alarm.
AL–13 CPU internal data memory ab- Detects abnormality in CPU internal data memory. Remove cause, then reset
normality This check is made only when power is turned on. alarm.
AL–15 Spindle switch/output switch Detects incorrect switch sequence in spindle switch/ Check sequence.
alarm output switch operation.

r.c
AL–16 RAM abnormality Detects abnormality in RAM for external data. This Remove cause, then reset
check is made only when power is turned on. alarm.
AL–18 Program ROM sum check er- Detects program ROM data error.This check is Remove cause, then reset
ror made only when power is turned on. alarm.
AL–19 Excessive U phase current Detects excessive U phase current detection ciucuit Remove cause, then reset

e
detection circuit offset offset. alarm.
This check is made only when power is turned on.
AL–20

AL–24 Serial transfer data error

nt
Excessive V phase current Detects excessive V phase current detection circuit Remove cause, then reset
detection circuit offset offset.
This check is made only when power is turned on.
alarm.

Detects serial transfer data error (such as NC power Remove cause, then reset
ce
supply turned off, etc.) alarm.
AL–25 Serial data transfer stopped Detects that serial data transfer has stopped. Remove cause, then reset
alarm.
AL–26 Disconnection of speed detec- Detects abnormality in position coder signal(such as Remove cause, then reset
nc

tion signal for Cs contouring unconnected cable and parameter setting error). alarm.
control
AL–27 Position coder signal discon- Detects abnormality in position coder signal (such Remove cause, then reset
nection as unconnected cable and adjustment error). alarm.
AL–28 Disconnection of position Detects abnormality in position detection signal for Remove cause, then reset
.c

detection signal for Cs con- Cs contouring control (such as unconnected cable alarm.
touring control and adjustment error).
AL–29 Short–time overload Detects that overload has been continuously ap- Remove cause, then reset
w

plied for some period of time (such as restraining mo- alarm.

tor shaft in positioning).
AL–30 Input circuit overcurrent Detects overcurrent flowing in input circuit. Remove cause, then reset
alarm.
w

AL–31 Speed detection signal dis- Detects that motor cannot rotate at specified speed Remove cause, then reset
connection motor restraint or it is detected that the motor is clamped. (but ro- alarm.
alarm or motor is clamped. tates at very slow speed or has stopped).
w

(This includes checking of speed detection signal

cable.)
AL–32 Abnormality in RAM inside the Detects abnormality in RAM inside the LSI used for Remove cause, then reset
LSI used for serial data trans- serial data transfer. This check is made only when alarm.
fer. This check is made only power is turned on.
when power is turned on.

AL–33 Insufficient DC link section Detects insufficient charging of direct current power Remove cause, then reset
charging supply voltage in power circuit section when mag- alarm.
netic contactor in amplifier is turned on (such as
open phase and defectifve charging resistor).

379
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Alarm
No. Meaning Description Remedy

AL–34 Parameter data setting beyond Detects parameter data set beyond allowable range Set correct data.
allowable range of values of values.
AL–35 Excessive gear ratio data set- Detects gear ratio data set beyond allowable range Set correct data.
ting of values.
AL–36 Error counter overflow Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, then reset
alarm.
AL–37 Speed detector parameter set- Detects incorrect setting of parameter for number of Set correct data.
ting error speed detection pulses.
AL–39 Alarm for indicating failure in Detects 1–rotaion signal detection failure in Cs con- Make 1–rotaion signal ad-

om
detecting 1–rotation signal for touring contorl. justment.
Cs contouring control Check cable shield status.
AL–40 Alarm for indicating 1–rotation Detects that 1–rotation signal has not occurred in Cs Make 1–rotaion signal ad-
signal for Cs contouring con- contouring control. justment.
trol not detected
AL–41 Alarm for indicating failure in Detects failure in detecting position coder 1–rotation Make signal adjustment for

r.c
detecting position coder 1–ro- signal. signal conversion circuit.
taion signal. Check cable shield status.
AL–42 Alarm for indicating position Detects that position coder 1–rotation signal has not Make 1–rotation signal ad-
coder 1–rotation signal not de- issued. justment for signal conver-
tected sion circuit.

e
AL–43 Alarm for indicating discon- Detects that main spindle position coder signal used Check that main spindle
nection of position coder signal for differential speed mode is not connected yet (or position coder signal is

AL–46
for differential speed mode nt
is disconnected).

Alarm for indicating failure in Detects failure in detecting position coder 1–rotation
detecting position coder signasl in thread cutting operation.
connected to connector
CN12.
Make 1–rotation signal ad-
justment for signal conver-
ce
1–rotation signal in thread cut- sion circuit.
ting operation. Check cable shield status.
AL–47 Position coder signal ab- Detects incorrect position coder signal count opera- Make signal adjustment for
normality tion. signal conversion circuit.
Check cable shield status.
nc

AL–49 The converted differential Detects that speed of other spindle converted to Calculate differential
speed is too high. speed of local spindle has exceeded allowable limit speed by multiplying speed
in differential mode. of other spindle by gear ra-
tio. Check if calculated val-
ue is not greater than maxi-
.c

mum speed of motor.

AL–50 Excessive speed command Detects that speed command calculation value ex- Calculate motor speed by
calculation value in spindle ceeded allowable range in spindle synchronization multiplying specified
w

synchronization control control. spindle speed by gear ra-

tio. Check if calculated val-
ue is not greater than maxi-
mum speed of motor.
w

AL–51 Undervoltage at DC link sec- Detects that DC power supply voltage of power cir- Remove cause, then reset
tion cuit has dropped (due to momentary power failure or alarm.
loose contact of magnetic contactor).
w

AL–52 ITP signal abnormality I Detects abnormality in synchronization signal (ITP Replace servo amp. PCB.
signal ) used in software.
AL–53 ITP signal abnormality II Detects abnormality in synchronization signal (ITP Replace servo amp. PCB.
signal) used in hardware.
AL–54 Overload current alarm Detects that excessive current flowed in motor for Remove overload of motor
long time. and reset the alarm.
AL–55 Power line abnormality in Detects that switch request signal does not match Check if power line status,
spindle switching/output power line status check signal. check signal is processed
switching normally.

380
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

15) SPINDLE ALARMS (ANALOG INTERFACE) (S SERIES ACSPINDLE)

Spindle alarms of Model 1S to 3S

Alarm Meaning Description Remedy
No.
“A” Program ROM abnormality Detects abnormality in ROM. Exchange ROM
display (not installed)

AL–01 Motor Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed ex- Check load status.
overheat cessively. Cool motor then reset
alarm.

om
AL–02 Excessive speed deviation Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed ex- Check load status.
cessively. Reset alarm.

AL–03 Defective regenerative Detects that regenerative current has flown longer Reset alarm after checking
current than the allowable time. cutting condition etc.

r.c
AL–04 Not used

AL–05 Not used

AL–06 Excessive speed (Analog) Detects that motot rotation has exceeded 115% of its Reset alarm.

e
rated speed.

AL–07 Excessive speed (Digital) Detects that motor rotation has exceeded 115% of its Reset alarm.

AL–08 High input voltage

nt
rated speed.

Detects that input voltage is 230 VAC or higher . Flip switch to 230 VAC.
ce
AL–09 Not used

AL–10 Low input voltage Detects drop in +15V power supply or input power Remove cause, then reset
supply voltage. alarm.

AL–11 Overvoltage in DC link section Detects abnormally high direct current power supply Remove cause, then reset
nc

voltage in power circuit section. alarm.

AL–12 Overcurrent in DC link section Detects flow of abnormally large current in direct cur- Check transistor and motor
rent section of power cirtcuit coils for their grounding, re-
move cause, then reset
.c

alarm.

AL–13 Defectives CPU and Detects abnormal transmission between CPU and Exchange PCB.
peripherals peripherals
w

AL–14 ROM abnormality Detects abnormality in ROM. Exchange ROM or PCB.

w

AL–15 Not used

AL–16 NVRAM abnormality Detects abnormality in NVRAM for external data. Exchange NVRAM or PCB.
AL–17
w

AL–18 Defectives CPU and Detects abnormal transmission between CPU and Exchange PCB.
to peripherals peripherals
AL–23

381
B. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Spindle alarms of Model 6S to 26S

Alarm Meaning Description Remedy
No.
“A” Program ROM abnormality Detects abnormality in ROM. Exchange ROM
display (not installed)

AL–01 Motor Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed ex- Check load status.
overheat cessively. Cool motor then reset
alarm.

AL–02 Excessive speed deviation Detects motor speed exceeding specified speed ex- Check load or other status

om
cessively. on the motor, correct fail-
ure, then reset the alarm.

AL–03 +24V fuse is blown. +24V fuse of the control power is blown Check control power if it is
* shorted and replace fuses.

AL–04 Blown of input fuse One of fuse F1 to F3 is flown or lack of phase or mo- Check lack of phase of

r.c
Lack of phase of input power mentary power failure was detected. power supply and power
supply regenerative circuit and re-
place fuse if required.

AL–05 Not used

e
AL–06 Excessive speed (Analog) Detects that motot rotation has exceeded 115% of its Remove cause, then reset
rated speed. alarm.

AL–07 Excessive speed (Digital)

nt
Detects that motor rotation has exceeded 115% of its Remove cause, then reset
rated speed. alarm.
ce
AL–08 High input voltage Detects that input voltage is 230 VAC or higher . Flip switch to 230 VAC.

AL–09 Overheat of radiator Temperature of radiator used for transistor is ex- Cool radiator then reset
tremely high. alarm.

AL–10 Low input voltage Detects drop in +15V power supply or input power Remove cause, then reset
nc

supply voltage. alarm.

AL–11 Overvoltage in DC link section Detects abnormally high direct current power supply Remove cause, then reset
voltage in power circuit section. alarm.
.c

AL–12 Overcurrent in DC link section Detects flow of abnormally large current in direct cur- Remove cause, then reset
rent section of power cirtcuit alarm.

AL–13 Defectives CPU and Detects abnormal transmission between CPU and Exchange PCB.
w

peripherals peripherals

AL–14 ROM abnormality Detects abnormality in ROM. Exchange ROM or PCB.

w

AL–15 Defective optional circuit Detects defective optional circuit (switch sequence Check sequence ,then
in spindle switch/output switch operation) and erro- exchange PCB.
neous connection to optional circuit.
w

AL–16 NVRAM abnormality Detects abnormality in NVRAM for external data. Exchange NVRAM or PCB.
AL–17

AL–18 Defectives CPU and Detects abnormal transmission between CPU and Exchange PCB.
to peripherals peripherals
AL–23

* Not displayed in PCB version number 10B and later.

382
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX B. ALARM LIST

D Method of resetting DATA

Press MODE and SET key at the same time.
alarm

WARNING
There is a possibility that the spindle may rotate immediately
after an alarm is released. Therefore, reset an alarm under
the emergency stop state and the rotation command being
off.

om
Alarm is not released if the cause of the alarm is not removed.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

383
C. LIST OF MAINTENANCE
PARTS APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

C LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS

C.1 MAINTENANCE PARTS

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

384
 C. LIST OF MAINTENANCE
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX PARTS

C.1
MAINTENANCE
PARTS

Maintenance Parts Consumables here refer to the parts which are not reused after
(Consumable) replacement. Rank : A>B>C
Name Drawing number Vender Remarks Rank
Fan motor A90L-0001-0385 SANYO A

om
Battery A98L-0031-0006 SANYO A
Fuse A60L-0001-0046#5.0R DAITO 5. 0A Contorol unit B
A60L-0001-0175#3.2R 3. 2A CRT/ MDI, I/O card B
A60L-0001-0290#LM50 5. 0A I/O card B

r.c
A60L-0001-0290#LM10 1. 0A LCD B
key board A86L-0001-0171#SM2 FUJITSU A02B-0166-C001 B
A86L-0001-0171#SM2R A02B-0166-C201#R B
A86L-0001-0171#SM2S A02B-0120-C201#S B

e
A20B-1003-0170 FANUC A02B-0168-C010 to C013 B
A02B-0118-C030 to C033
nt
A16B-2600-0070
A02B-0118-C130#R to C133#R
A02B-0118-C130#S to C133#S
A02B-0211-C020#R, #S B
ce
Key sheet A98L-0001-0741 A02B-0168-C010 to C013 B
A02B-0118-C030 to C033
A98L-0001-0741#R A02B-0118-C130#R to C133#R B
A98L-0005-0022 A02B-0118-C130#S to C133#S B
FUJI POLY-
POLY
nc

A98L-0005-0035#PMGE1 MERTECH A02B-0211-C020#R B

A98L-0005-0035#PMGS1 A02B-0211-C020#S B
A98L-0005-0036#PMGE1 A02B-0211-C020#R LED B
A98L-0005-0036#PMGS1 A02B-0211-C020#S LED B
.c

Plastic case A230-0476-T001 FANUC A02B-0166-B001, B520, B501, B502 C

A230-0476-T006 A02B-0166-B531 C
w

A230-0476-T003 A02B-0198-B501 C
A230-0476-T007 A02B-0198-B531 C
w
w

385
C. LIST OF MAINTENANCE
PARTS APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Maintenance Parts (Parts to be repaired by us)

Name Drawing number Vender Remarks Rank
Built-in I/O card A20B-1004-0960 FANUC B
Power Mate-D base PCB A16B-2201-0630 FANUC TYPE A For B001, B520 B
A20B-2001-0610 FANUC TYPE A,corresponding to 2-path B
For B501
A16B-2100-0030 FANUC TYPE A,corresponding to 2-path B
For B501
A16B-2100-0031 FANUC TYPE A,corresponding to 2-path B

om
For B502
A16B-2100-0160 FANUC TYPE B,corresponding to 2-path B
For B531
Power Mate-F base PCB A20B-2001-0620 FANUC TYPE A For B501 B
A20B-2002-0370 FANUC TYPE B For B531 B

r.c
Built-in I/O card A20B-2000-0670 FANUC DI:32, DO:24(Sink type) B
(Powr Mate-D)
Built-in I/O card C A20B-2001-0902 FANUC DI:32, DO:24(Source type) B
(Power Mate-D)

e
Built-in I/O card A A20B-2001-0631 FANUC DI:32, DO:24(Sink type) B
(Power Mate-F)
Built-in I/O card B A20B-2001-0630 FANUC DI:48, DO:32(Sink type) B
(Power Mate-F)
Built-in I/O card D1
(Power Mate-F)
nt
A20B-2001-0901 FANUC DI:32, DO:24(Source type) B
ce
Built-in I/O card D2 A20B-2001-0900 FANUC DI:48, DO:32(Source type) B
(Power Mate-F)
M–NET card A20B-2001-0370 FANUC B
I/O Link- II card A20B-2100-0040 FANUC B
nc

Genius card A20B-8100-0060 FANUC B

Profibus card1 A20B-2100-0120 FANUC B
Profibus card2 A20B-8001-0500 FANUC B
.c

Memory module A A20B-2900-0531 FANUC RAM 128KB, Replaceable with the following B
A20B-2902-0332 FANUC RAM 128KB B
Memory module B A20B-2900-0530 FANUC RAM 256KB, Replaceable with the following B
w

A20B-2902-0331 FANUC RAM 256KB B

Memory module C A20B-2900-0541 FANUC RAM 512KB, Replaceable with the following B
w

A20B-2902-0330 FANUC RAM 512KB B

CPU module A20B-2901-0500 FANUC B
w

Spindle module A20B-2900-0851 FANUC Analog spindle B

A20B-2900-0850 FANUC Serial spindle B
A20B-2901-0210 FANUC Analog input + Serial spindle B
Digital servo module A20B-2900-0160 FANUC Corresponding tp S series servo B
A20B-2901-0340 FANUC Corresponding tp E, α series servo B
Digital servo interface A20B-2900-0380 FANUC B
module
Memory module CSA A20B-2902-0230 FANUC RAM addition 512KB B
Analog spindle X 2

386
 C. LIST OF MAINTENANCE
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX PARTS

Maintenance Parts (Parts to be repaired by us)

Name Drawing number Vender Remarks Rank
Memory module BSA A20B-2902-0231 FANUC RAM addition 256KB B
Analog spindle X 2
A20B-2902-0234 RAM addition 256KB
Analog spindle
Memory module ASA A20B-2902-0232 FANUC Analog spindle X 2 B
Memory module ASA A20B-2902-0235 FANUC Analog spindle B
Spindle module S analog

om
memory module C A20B-2902-0236 FANUC RAM addition 512KB B
Memory module B A20B-2902-0237 FANUC RAM addition 256KB B
Memory module BSSA A20B-2902-0221 FANUC RAM addition 256KB B
Serial spindle
Analog input

r.c
Memory module ASSA A20B-2902-0222 FANUC Serial spindle B
Analog input
Memory module CSS A20B-2902-0223 FANUC RAM addition 512KB B
Serial spindle
Memory module BSS A20B-2902-0224 FANUC RAM addition 256KB B

e
Serial spindle
Memory module ASS A20B-2902-0225 FANUC Serial spindle B
Spindle module S serial
PMC control module A
CRT control module
nt
A20B-2900-0142
A20B-2901-0480
FANUC
FANUC
PMC-PA1 B
B
ce
Touch panel control module A20B-2902-0470 FANUC B
HSSB module A20B-2902-0540 FANUC B
PMC control module B A20B-2901-0660 FANUC PMC-PA3 B
nc

A20B-2901-0662 FANUC Replaceable with A20B-2901-0660 B

CRT control P.C.B A20B-2000-0840 FANUC B
A20B-2000-0841 FANUC In-line connection type B
A20B-2100-0061 FANUC Picture display 32 screen B
.c

A16B-2100-0060 FANUC Picture display 64 screen B

I/O card A A16B-2201-0071 FANUC DI:48, DO:32(Sink type) B
w

I/O card B A16B-2201-0070 FANUC DI:96, DO:64(Sink type) B

I/O card D A16B-2202-0733 FANUC DI:48DO:32 (Source type) B
I/O card E A16B-2202-0732 FANUC DI:96DO:64 (Source type) B
w

DPL/MDI P.C.B. A20B-8000-0141 FANUC B

DPL/MDI P.C.B. A20B-8000-0490 FANUC Long direction type B
w

DPL/MDI P.C.B. A20B-8001-0310 FANUC Dust protected type B

DPL/MDI Switch circuit A16B-2600-0080 FANUC B
Handy operator’s panel A20B-2002-0200 FANUC B
control P.C.B.
HSSB adapter P.C.B. A20B-8001-0510 FANUC B
Position display unit P.C.B A20B-1004-0360 FANUC B
A20B-1004-0370 FANUC B

387
C. LIST OF MAINTENANCE
PARTS APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

Maintenance Parts (Parts to be repaired by us)

Name Drawing number Vender Remarks Rank
CRT/MDI Unit A02B-0166-C001 FANUC B
A02B-0166-C003 FANUC In–line connection type B
A02B-0166-C201#R FANUC For CE marking B
A02B-0166-C203#R FANUC For CE marking, in–line connection type B
A02B-0166-C201#S FANUC For CE marking B
A02B-0166-C203#S FANUC For CE marking, in–line connection type B

om
CRT/MDI Unit A02B-0166-C221#R FANUC Graphic 32 screen B
(Pi t
(Picture di
display)
l )
A02B-0166-C221#S FANUC Graphic 32 screen B
A02B-0166-C222#R FANUC Graphic 64 screen B
A02B-0166-C222#S FANUC Graphic 64 screen B
Separate type CRT A02B-0120-C111 FANUC B

r.c
Separata type PDP A02B-0120-C113 FANUC 200VAC input B
A02B-0200-C100 FANUC 24VDC input, For CE marking B
Separate type MDI unit A02B-0166-C010 FANUC B
A02B-0166-C210#R FANUC For CE marking B

e
A02B-0166-C213#R FANUC For CE marking, In-line connection type B

Separate type MDI unit

nt
A02B-0166-C210#S
A02B-0166-C213#S
A02B-0166-C231#R
FANUC
FANUC
FANUC
For CE marking
For CE marking, In-line connection type
Graphic 32 screen
B
B
B
(Pi t
(Picture di
display)
l )
ce
A02B-0166-C232#S FANUC Graphic 32 screen B
A02B-0166-C232#R FANUC Graphic 64 screen B
A02B-0166-C231#S FANUC Graphic 64 screen B
Separate type LCD unit A02B-0166-C251 FANUC B
nc

Detachable LCD/MDI unit A02B-0166-C271#R FANUC B

A02B-0166-C271#S FANUC B
CRT display device A61L-0001-0093 MATSUSHITA Usable unit B
.c

A02B-0166-C001
A02B-0166-C201#R
A02B-0166-C201#S
A02B-0120-C111
w

Plasma display device A61L-0001-0116 FUJITSU Usable unit A02B-0120-C113 B

A61L-0001-0116#S FUJITSU Usable unit A02B-0200-C100 B
w

LCD disply device A61L-0001-0142 HITACHI Usable unit A02B-0166-C251 B

Handy operator’s panel A02B-0211-020#R FANUC B
A02B-0211-020#S FANUC B
w

LCD A61L-0001-0119 EPSON Usable unit A02B-0211-C020#R, #S B

HSSB adapter A02B-0211-C220 FANUC B
I/O link-II terminal board A08B-0048-C331 FANUC B
Display unit A02B-0118-C020 FANUC B
CRT link intermediate unit A02B-0124-D002 FANUC B

388
 C. LIST OF MAINTENANCE
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX PARTS

Maintenance Parts (Parts to be repaired by us)

Name Drawing number Vender Remarks Rank
FANUC, A02B-0168-C010 FANUC B
Table mount
FANUC, A02B-0168-C011 FANUC B
Wall mount
DPL/MDI
GEFanuc, A02B-0168-C012 FANUC B
Table mount
GEFanuc, A02B-0168-C013 FANUC B
Wall mount

om
FANUC, A02B-0118-C030 FANUC A02B-0118-C131, B
Table mount C132, C133
FANUC, A02B-0118-C031 FANUC A02B-0118-C130, B
Long
g direction type
y Wall mount C132, C133
DPL/MDI GEFanuc, A02B-0118-C032 FANUC A02B-0118-C130, B

r.c
Table mount C131, C133
GEFanuc, A02B-0118-C033 FANUC A02B-0118-C130, B
Wall mount C131, C132
FANUC, A02B-0118-C130#R FANUC For CE marking A02B-0118-C131#R, B
Table mount C132#R, C133#R

e
A02B-0118-C130#S FANUC For CE marking A02B-0118-C131#S, B
C132#S, C133#S
FANUC,
Wall mount
nt
A02B-0118-C131#R

A02B-0118-C131#S
FANUC

FANUC
For CE marking

For CE marking
A02B-0118-C130#R,
C132#R, C133#R
A02B-0118-C130#S,
B

B
ce
Dust C132#S, C133#S
rotected ty
protected e
type
DPL/MDI GEFanuc, A02B-0118-C132#R FANUC For CE marking A02B-0118-C130#R, B
Table mount C131#R, C133#R
A02B-0118-C132#S FANUC For CE marking A02B-0118-C130#S, B
nc

C131#S, C133#S
GEFanuc, A02B-0118-C133#R FANUC For CE marking A02B-0118-C130#R, B
Wall mount C131#R, C132#R
A02B-0118-C133#S FANUC For CE marking A02B-0118-C130#S, B
.c

C131#S, C132#S
LCD A61L-0001-0110#A HITACHI Usable uint B
A02B-0168-C010 to C013
A02B-0118-C030 to C033
w

A02B-0118-C130#R to C133#R
A02B-0118-C130#S to C133#S
w
w

389
D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
FROM A MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

D DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM A MEMORY CARD

D.1 OVERVIEW
D.2 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

om
D.3 OPERATION
D.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM A
MEMORY CARD
D.5 ERROR CODES
D.6 MEMORY CARD WRITE PROTECT SWITCH

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

390
 D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX FROM A MEMORY CARD

D.1 Data stored in memory of the Power Mate can be output to a single
memory card at one time. Moreover, programs, parameters, variables,
OVERVIEW PMC data can be input to the CNC.
Use the flash type memory card specified by FANUC.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

391
D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
FROM A MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

D.2
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION

D.2.1 Before this function can be enabled, the Power Mate and a memory card
Conditions for to be used must meet the conditions explained following.
Enabling This Function
- Conditions of the Power Mate

om
(1) For input, the Power Mate is in either EDIT or MDI mode, while for
output, it is in EDIT mode.
(2) The Power Mate must be placed in the emergency stop state.
(3) The program display screen must be selected.

r.c
(4) To input data, setting parameter <parameter write> must be set to 1.
(For the DPL/MDI, <PWE> must be set to 1.)
- Conditions of the memory card
(1) The capacity of the memory card must be greater than the storage

e
capacity of the Power Mate.
(2) To output data, the write protect switch must be set off.
nt
(3) The memory card must have attribute information.
*This function cannot be used with memory cards having no attribute
information. So, use memory cards version 4.0 or later.
ce
D.2.2 The contents of the entire memory area of the Power Mate are output to
Output to a Memory a memory card. The size of the output data is recorded in the memory card.
nc

If the capacity of the memory card is smaller than the memory size of the
Card Power Mate, alarm 5106 is issued. The Power Mate memory cannot be
divided in order to be output to two or more memory cards.
.c
w
w
w

392
 D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX FROM A MEMORY CARD

D.2.3 Data can be input from a memory card to the Power Mate only when the
Input from a Memory memory size recorded in the memory card matches the memory size of
the Power Mate. If they do not match, alarm 5107 is issued.
Card
NOTE
In the case of a 1–path Power Mate–D and the Power
Mate–F, parameters, some variable data (#001 to #033,
#100 to #149, #500 to #531), and tool length compensation
data can be input regardless of the system’s storage

om
capacity, provided their data types are specified when
individual data items are input.

- Inputting all data

(1) With the CRT/MDI

r.c
M →[READ]→[EXEC]
(2) With the DPL/MDI

e
M →[READ]
nt
- Inputting data individually
(1) With the CRT/MDI
ce
M n7 n6 n5 n4 n3 n2 n1 →[READ]→[EXEC]
(2) With the DPL/MDI
M n7 n6 n5 n4 n3 n2 n1 →[READ]
nc

n1 : Program
n2 : Parameter, Pitch error compensation data
n3 : Variable, tool length compensation data
.c

n4 : Ladder program
n5 : PMC data
*n6: Operation history data (usable with a 256–K, 512–K, or
w

768–K 1–path Power Mate–D)

(usable with a 512–K or 768–K
2–path Power Mate–D)
w

*n7: Macro executor (usable with a 512–K or 768–K

1–path Power Mate–D)
(usable with a 768–K 2–path Power
w

Mate–D)
Specifying 1 causes the corresponding data to be read.
Specifying 0 causes the corresponding data to be skipped.
(Example) When variable number and program are read.
M 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 →[READ]→[EXEC]

393
D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
FROM A MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

D.3
OPERATION

D.3.1 Data stored in Power Mate memory can be output to a memory card by
Outputting Data to a following the procedure below.
Memory Card (1) Place the Power Mate in EDIT mode.
(2) Place the system in the emergency stop state.
(3) Press the <PRGRM> display button to display the program display

om
screen.
(4) Insert the memory card in the CNC.
(5) Enter address <M>.
(6) Select the [OPERATION], [→], and [PUNCH] soft keys, then press
[EXEC].

r.c
(When the DPL/MDI is used, press the <WRITE> key.)
All data in the Power Mate memory is then output.

NOTE

e
1 The output data varies with the storage capacity of the
Power Mate.
nt
2 For a 2–path Power Mate–D, place both paths in the
emergency stop state.
ce
D.3.2 Data can be input from a memory card to Power Mate memory by
Inputting Data from a following the procedure below.
nc

Memory Card - Inputting all data

(1) Place the Power Mate in either EDIT or MDI mode.
(2) Place the system in the emergency stop state.
.c

(3) For both paths, set setting parameter [parameter write enable] to 1.
(When the DPL/MDI is used, set [PWE] to 1.)
(4) Press the <PRGRM> display boutton to display the program display
w

screen.
(5) Insert the memory card in the Power Mate.
(6) Enter address <M>.
w

(7) Select the [OPERATION] [→] and [READ] soft keys, then press
[EXEC].
w

(When the DPL/MDI is used, press the <READ> key.)

All data is then read into the CNC memory.

NOTE
1 The output data varies with the storage capacity of the
Power Mate.
2 For a 2–path Power Mate–D, read all data related to the path
currently being displayed. To read all data for both paths, key
in <#> after address <M> in step (5).

394
 D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX FROM A MEMORY CARD

- Inputting specific data

(1) Place the Power Mate in either EDIT or MDI mode.
(2) Place the system in the emergency stop state.
(3) Set setting parameter [parameter write] to 1.
(When the DPL/MDI is used, set [PWE] to 1.)
(4) Press the <PRGRM> display button to display the program display
screen.
(5) Insert the memory card in the Power Mate.
(6) Enter address <M>.

om
(7) Specify the types of data to be input by using numeric characters in
the form <n7n6n5n4n3n2n1>.
n1 : Program
n2 : Parameter, Pitch error compensation
n3 : Variable, tool length compensation data

r.c
n4 : Ladder program
n5 : PMC data
n6 : Operation history data
n7 : Macro executor

e
Specifying 1 causes the corresponding data to be read. Specifying 0
causes the corresponding data to be skipped.
nt
(8) Select [OPERATION], [→] and [READ], then press [EXEC].
(When the DPL/MDI is used, press the [READ] key.)
The specified data is then read into the Power Mate memory.
ce
NOTE
1 The operation history data can be read for a 256–K, 512–K,
or 768–K 1–path Power Mate–D or 512–K or 768–K 2–path
nc

Power Mate–D.
2 The macro executer can be read for a 512–K or 768–K
1–path Power Mate–D or 768–K 2–path Power Mate–D
system.
.c

3 For a 2–path Power Mate–D, data for currently displayed

path is read.
w
w
w

395
D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
FROM A MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

D.4 The data that can be input/output to and from a memory card varies
according to the memory size of the power Mate.
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
TO AND FROM A  D.4 (a) Valid Data for Different Memory sizes of
the 1–path Power Mate–D
MEMORY CARD
Power Mate–D memory size (bytes)
Data type
128K 256K 512K 768K
Program f f f f
Parameter
f f f f
Pitch error compensation data

om
Variable data
f f f f
Tool offset data
Ladder f f f f
PMC data f f f f
Operation history data f f f

r.c
Macro executor f f
f : Valid data, : Invalid data

 D.4 (b) Valid Data for Different Memory sizes of

e
the 2–path Power Mate–D
Power Mate–D memory size (bytes)
nt
Program
Data type
256K
f
512K
f
768K
f
Parameter
ce
f f f
Pitch error compensation data
Variable data
f f f
Tool offset data
Ladder f f f
nc

PMC data f f f
Operation history data f f
Macro executor f
.c

f : Valid data, : Invalid data

 D.4 (c) Valid Data for Different Memory sizes of the Power Mate–F
w

Data type Power Mate–F memory size

Program f
w

Parameter
f
Pitch error compensation data
Variable data
f
Tool offset data
w

Ladder f
PMC data f
f : Valid data, : Invalid data

396
 D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX FROM A MEMORY CARD

D.5
ERROR CODES
No. Message Explanation
5101 MEMORY CARD NOT CONNECTED No memory card is connected to the unit. Before performing input/op-
utput, a memory card.
5102 WRITE PROTECTED The memory card is write-protected. Before writing data to the card,
release write protection.
5103 MEMORY CARD READ/WRITE ER- (Seve) Data cannot be written to the memory card.
ROR (Restoration) The memory card does not contain correct data.

om
The card may be damaged. Retry input/output with another memory
card.
5104 EMERGENCY STOP RELEASED Emergency stop was released during input/output to or from a memory
card. Place the system in the emergency stop state, then retry input/
output.
5105 LADDER READ ERROR An alarm was issued during input of ladder data from a memory card.

r.c
Retry input of ladder data.
5106 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY CARD The capacity of the memory card is insufficient to save the data. Insert
CAPACITY a memory card with sufficient memory, then retry.
5107 IMPROPER MEMORY The data stored in a memory card is not appropriate for the unit. Insert

e
a memory card holding appropriate data, then retry.
5109 PMC COMMUNICATION ERROR A PMC communication error occurred during input/output to or from a

5110 MEMORY CARD READ ERROR

nt memory card. Retry input/output.
An attempt was made to read data for both paths from the memory
card at a time, but data reading for the path whose data is not currently
displayed was abnormal.
ce
Corrent the input conditions, and try data writing for both paths again.
(This applies to the Power Mate–D2 only.)
5111 READ DATA MISSING IN PART An attempt was made to read the path 1 macro library from the
memory card into path 2, or vice versa. (This applies to the Power
Mate–D2 only.)
nc
.c
w
w
w

397
D. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND
FROM A MEMORY CARD APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

D.6 The write protect switch is used to protect the data recorded on the card.
Important data can be kept safely by setting the write protect switch as
MEMORY CARD shown in the figure below. The switch prevents data from being
WRITE PROTECT inadvertently rewritten.
SWITCH
To the Power Mate

om
r.c
Switch of writeprotect

Write enable

e
Write protect
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

398
 E. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX MANUAL

E MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S MANUAL

E.1 OUTLINE
E.2 NAMES AND FUNCTION OF MEMORY

om
COMPONENTS
E.3 OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

399
E. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
MANUAL APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

E.1 FANUC–specified flash memory cards can be used as a data exchanging

media for CNC unit, and are based on following standards.
OUTLINE
D JEIDA “IC Memory Card Guideline Ver. 4.0”
D PCMCIA “PC Card Standard R.2.0”
The memory card is easy to use and a data exchanging media which can
be input and output data with high speed, and you should take care of
operation for the memory card.
This manual describes operating procedure and advice for the memory
card.

om
Some software of CNC unit may restrict a kind of useful
memory card, input/output file function.
For detail, refer to the manual of each CNC unit.

r.c
FANUC–specified flash memory cards are listed below.
Fujitsu Ltd. Fuji Electrochemical Co., Ltd.
256KB MB98A80813–20–G–S SC–9027–22H14

e
512KB MB98A80913–20–G–S SC–9027–42H14
1MB MB98A801013–20–G–S SC–9027–82H14
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

400
 E. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX MANUAL

E.2
NAMES AND
FUNCTION OF
MEMORY
COMPONENTS

om
r.c
Name Function
1 Write Protect The memory card can be protected from writing data
Switch into the memory card by setting of the write protect

e
switch.

Non Write Protect Write protect

nt
ce
2 Battery Case Incase of the SRAM memory card, the battery case
includes the battery for data backup.
The flash memory card has no battery case.
nc
.c
w
w
w

401
E. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
MANUAL APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

E.3
OPERATING OF
MEMORY CARD

E.3.1 (1) Insert the memory card in the direction shown in the figure through the
Connection of Memory memory card insertion slot.
Card (2) The memory card cannot be inserted with wrong side, because the
memory card has insertion guides.

om
Take care the direction of the memory card.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc

E.3.2 (1) For the read/write operation, refer to Appendix D.

Operation
.c

E.3.3 (1) Pull the memory card out in the direction shown in the figure.
Disconnection of
w

Memory Card
w
w

402
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX F. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS

F NOTATION OF MDI KEYS

FANUC Power Mate has two types of MDI keypads : English type and Symbolic type.
The table below shows correspondence between English keys and Symbolic keys.
This manual uses English type in the text.

om
Therefore when a user uses Symbolic type MDI keypads and encounters an English key in the text, please refer
to the correspondence table shown below.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

403
F. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS APPENDIX B–62835EN/01

MDI keys for CRT

Name English key Symbolic key Name English key Symbolic key

CANCEL key CAN DELETE key DELETE

POSITION key POS PAGE UP key

PAGE

om
PAGE DOWN PAGE
PROGRAM key PROG
key

OFFSET/ OFFSET
HELP key HELP

r.c
SETTING key SETTING

CUSTOM key CUSTOM RESET key RESET

e
CUSTOM/ CUSTOM
SYSTEM key SYSTEM
nt GRAPH key GRAPH

MESSAGE key
ce
MESSAGE

GRAPH key GRAPH

nc

CNC
CNC/MMC key
MMC
.c

SHIFT key SHIFT

w

INPUT key INPUT

w

ALTER key ALTER

w

INSERT key INSERT

404
B–62835EN/01 APPENDIX F. NOTATION OF MDI KEYS

MDI keys for DPL

Name English key Symbolic key

POSITION key

PROGRAM key

om
MENU/VAR key

INSERT key

r.c
DELETE key

e
ALTER key
nt
INPUT key
ce
DIAGNOSE/PARAMETER key
nc

OPERATION/ALARM key
.c

READ key
w

WRITE key
w

CANCEL key
w

405
B–62835EN/01 Index
[A] Alarm 920 (Watch Dog or RAM Parity), 325
Alarm 924 (Servo Module Mounting Error), 328
Abnormal Sound and Vibration During Rotation, 351
Alarm 930 (CPU Error), 329
AC Spindle (Analog Interface), 238
Alarm 950 or 951 (PMC System Alarm), 330
AC Spindle (Serial Interface), 223
Alarm 970 (NMI Alarm in PMC Module), 331
Action Againts Noise, 58
Alarm 971 (NMI Alarm in SLC), 332
Address, 159
Alarm 973 (NMI Alarm by Unknown Cause), 333
Address List, 181
Alarm History Screen, 23
Adjusting Reference Position (Dog Method), 219
Alarm List, 363

om
Adjusting the Plasma Display, 135
Associated Parameters, 222
AL–01 (Motor Overheat), 344
Automatic Operation Cannot be Done, 267
AL–02 (Excessive Deviation of Speed), 345
Automatic Setting of Standard Parameter, 237
AL–06, 07 (Over Speed), 346

r.c
AL–09 (Unit Overheat / 6S to 26S only), 347
AL–10 (Low Input Voltage), 348 [B]
AL–11 (DC Link Excessive Voltage), 349 Basic Unit, 111
AL–12 (DC Link Excessive Current), 350 Battery of Controller, 96

e
Alarm 300 (Request for Reference Position Return), Block Diagram, 239
285
Built–in Debug Function, 159
286
nt
Alarm 301 to 305 (Absolute Pulse Coder is Faulty),

Alarm 306 to 308 (Absolute Pulse Coder Battery is

Low), 287 [C]
ce
Alarm 350 (Serial Pulse Coder is Abnormal), 291 Calculation of S Analog Voltage and Associated Pa-
Alarm 351 (Serial Pulse Coder is Abnormal), 292 rameters, 240
Alarm 400 (Overload), 293 Clearing Alarm History, 23
nc

Alarm 401 (*DRDY Signal Turned OFF), 295 Conditions for Enabling This Function, 392
Alarm 404 and 405 (*DRDY on, Reference Position Configuration Display of Software, 19
Return Abnormal), 297 Confirmation of Transistor Module, 353
Alarm 410 (Excessive Position Error Amount During Confirming Power Supply (Serial Interface), 228
.c

Stop), 299
Confirming the Parameters Required for Data input/
Alarm 411 (Excessive Position Error During Move), Output, 143
300
w

Connection of Memory Card, 402

Alarm 414 (Digital Servo System is Abnormal), 302
Connection to Analog Spindle Amplifier, 80
Alarm 416 (Disconnection Alarm), 314
Connection to Serial Spindle Amplifier, 78
w

Alarm 417 (Digital Servo System is Abnormal), 315

Connector and Signal Name, 90
Alarm 700 (Overheat at Control Side), 316
Contens Displayed (DPL/MDI), 32
Alarm 749 (Serial Spindle Communication Error), 317
w

Contents Displayed (Common), 28

Alarm 750 (Spindle Serial Link cannot be Started),
319 Corrective Action for Failures, 254

Alarm 751 (Spindle Alarm), 321 Correspondence Between Operation Mode and Param-
eters on Spindle Tuning Screen, 236
Alarm 85 to 87 (Reader/Puncher Interface Alarm),
278 CRT/MDI, 19
CRT/MDI Unit, 65
Alarm 90 (Reference Position Return is Abnormal),
282 CRT/MDI, DPL/MDI Printed Board, 115
Alarm 900 (ROM Parity Error), 322 CRT/MDI, DPL/MDI Unit, 114
Alarm 910 to 911 (Sram Parity), 323 Cycle Start LED Signal has Turned OFF, 274

i–1
 Index B–62835EN/01

hardware Configuration, 358

Help Funciton, 24
[D] How to Replace the Batteries, 116
How to Replace the Modules, 121
Data Input/Output to and from a Memory Card, 390,
396
Digital Servo, 211
Disconnection of Memory Card, 402 [I]
Display and Operation, 1 I/O Link, 72
Display Method, 21, 24, 161, 231 I/O Unit Model A, 357

om
Display of Special Alarms, 23 Initial Setting Servo Parameters, 212
Displaying Diagnostic Page, 27 Input and Output of Data, 139
Displaying of CRT/MDI, 27 Input from a Memory Card, 393
Displaying of DPL/MDI, 27 Inputting CNC Parameters, 149

r.c
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen, 216 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 152
Dogless Reference Position Setting, 221 Inputting Data from a Memory Card, 394
DPL/MDI, 17, 20 Inputting Part Programs, 153
DPL/MDI Interface, 82 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Data, 155

e
Inputting PMC Ladder, 154
Inputting PMC Parameters, 151
[E]
Editing Ladder Mnemonics, 174
nt Inputting Tool Compensation Amount, 152
Inputting/Outputting Data, 143
ce
Editing the Sequence Program (Edit), 174 Insertion, 121
Environmental Requirement, 57 Installation, 57
Error Codes, 397 Inter–Machine Connection, 65
Error Messages (for Ladder Mnemonics Editing), 178 Interface Between NC and PMC, 156
nc

Execution Period of PMC, 160 Investigating the Conditions Under Which Failure
Occurred, 254

[F]
.c

[J]
Function Description, 392
Jog Operation Cannot be Done, 261
Function Keys and Soft Keys, 2
w

Fuse, 95
Fuses, 360 [L]
w

LED Display of Control Unit, 89

LED display of I/O Link Connection Unit, 110
[G]
w

Led Display/Setting and Module Configuration of

General of Interface, 157 Unit, 89
General of Spindle Control (Analog Interface), 239 LED Indication, 359
General of Spindle Control (Serial Interface), 224 List of Maintenance Parts, 384
List of Operation (DPL/MDI), 46
List of Operations (CRT/MDI), 43
[H] List of parameter, 247
Handle Operation (MPG) can not be done, 264 List of Printed Board and Unit, 111
Hardware, 50 List of Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier Alarms, 335

i–2
B–62835EN/01 Index

List of Signals by Each Mode, 179 [P]

Location of Modules and Internal Printed Boards, 98
Parameter Setting, 216
PMCDGN Screen, 163
PMCLAD Screen, 162
[M] PMCRAM Screen, 167
Maintenance of Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger, 126
Position Coder Interface, 81
Maintenance Parts, 385
Power Cannot be Turned ON, 256
Manual Pulse Generator, 70 Power Capacity, 57
Memory Card Operator’s Manual, 399

om
Power Mate–D for 1–path Control, 181
Memory Card Write Protect Switch, 398 Power Mate–D for 2–path Control, 189
Method A of Gear Change (PRM3705#2=0), 225 Power Mate–F, 196
Method B of Gear Change (PRM 3705#2=1), 225 Power Supply, 228
Model 1S to 3S (Amp. specification: Power Unit, 112

r.c
A06B–6059–H00x), 242
Printed Circuit Board (A16B–2201–0440), 226
Models 6S to 26S (Amp. specification:
A06B–6059–H2xx), 243
Module, 113
[R]

e
Module Configuration Screen, 22
Reader/Puncher Interface, 69

[N]
nt
Names and Function of Memory Components, 401
Reference Position Deviates, 281
Removing, 121
Removing a Printed Circuit Board, 361
ce
NC State Display, 34 Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up, 117
No Manual Operation nor Automatic Operation Can Replacing Batteries for Absolute Battery, 120
be Executed, 257 Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder (a Se-
No Rotation or Incorrect Speed, 352 ries Servo Amplifier/Built–in Type Battery), 118
nc

Notation of MDI Keys, 403 Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder (b Se-
ries Servo Amp Module/Built–in Type Battery), 119
Replacing Printed Circuit Board and Unit, 122
Replacing the DRL/MDI Switcher Fuses, 133
.c

[O] Replacing the Fuse, 129

Operating of Memory Card, 402
Replacing the Lcd Baklight, 138
Operation, 221, 394, 402
w

Replacing the LCD Fuse, 134

Operation History, 35 Rotary Switch MTSW, 97
Operation on the CRT/MDI, 161
w

Operation on the DPL/MDI, 172

Output Data to a Memory Card, 394 [S]
w

Output to a Memory Card, 392 Screen Display, 23, 35

Outputting CNC Parameters, 144 Selectingthe PMC Programmer Menu, 173
Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 146 Servo Interface, 74
Outputting Ladder Programs, 148 Servo Tuning Screen, 216
Outputting Part Program, 147 Setting and Displaying System Parameters (System
Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data, 149 Param), 173
Setting Parameters (Digital AC Spindle), 245
Outputting PMC Parameters, 145
Setting Parameters for Input/Output, 140
Outputting Tool Compensation Amount, 146
Setting Standard Parameters, 246

i–3
 Index B–62835EN/01

Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be Re- The CRT Control Printed Circuit Board, 124
corded in the Operation History, 38
The CRT Display, 125
Setting the Rotary Switch RSW, 96
The CRT/MDI Control PCB Fuse, 130
Signal and Symbol Correspondence Table, 203
The Fan motor, 124
Signal Waveform a Test Points, 227
The I/O Card Fuses, 131
Soft Keys, 2
The I/O Unit–MODEL A Fuses, 132
Software Configuration Screen, 21
The MDI Keyboard, 125
Specification, 158
The Power Mate Controller Fuse, 129
Specification of PMC, 158

om
The Power Supply Printed Circuit Boards and Sub
Spindle Monitor Screen, 234 Printed Board, 123
Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen, 231 Total Connection Diagram, 51
Spindle Setting Screen, 231
Troubleshooting, 252
Spindle Tuning Screen, 232
Troubleshooting (Analog Interface Spindle), 343

r.c
Starting and Stopping the Sequence Program (Run/
Stop), 178 Troubleshooting (Serial Interface Spindle), 334
System Configuration, 358 Troubleshooting for each alarm, 337
System Configuration Screen, 21 Tuning after replacing PCB (S series AC spindle), 250
Tuning S Analog Voltage (D/A Converter), 241

e
System Reserve Area of Internal Relay, 160

[T]
Table of Test Points, 226, 242
nt [W]
Warning Screen Displayed when an Option is
ce
Test Points, 228 Changed, 49

Test Points Signal Waveform, 244 When Manipulation is not Possible with the CRT/
MDI, 276
The Base Printed Circuit Boards, 122
nc
.c
w
w
w

i–4
 Revision Record
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL D/F MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–62835EN)
w
w
w
.c
nc
ce
nt
e r.c
01 Oct., ’96
om
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents